Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
Contents, Foreword
T 400
FM 458-1 DP
SIMADYN D
SIMATIC TDC
Function Blocks
Manual
Edition 12.2004
Conversion modules
Logic blocks
Service-/diagnostic blocks
SFC blocks
GMC blocks
Special blocks
Appendix
Index
Safety guidelines
This Manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal
safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are
highlighted in the Manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to
the level of danger:
DANGER
indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
CAUTION
used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in property damage.
NOTICE
used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided,
may result in an undesireable result or state.
Correct usage
Trademarks
Disclaimer of liability
Siemens AG
A&D
Frauenauracher Strae 80
91056 Erlangen
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Siemens AG 2004
Technical data subject to change.
Editions
T 400, FM 458-1 DP, SIMADYN D, SIMATIC TDC
Manual
Function Blocks
Edition 12.2004
NOTE
Overview
(chapter editions)
Chapter
Edition
Foreword
Edition 12.2004
Edition 12.2004
Arithmetic blocks
Edition 12.2004
Input/output blocks
Edition 03.2003
Communication blocks
Edition 12.2004
Conversion modules
Edition 12.2004
Logic blocks
Edition 12.2004
Service-/diagnostic blocks
Edition 03.2003
SFC blocks
Edition 03.2003
GMC blocks
Edition 12.2004
10
Special blocks
Edition 12.2004
11
Appendix
Edition 12.2004
ii
Foreword
Purpose of this
Manual
This Manual explains the principle use and functions of the STEP 7
automation software with the main focus on the appropriate technological
and drive control components T400, FM 458-1 DP, SIMADYN D,
SIMATIC TDC or D7-SYS.
TDC: Technology and Drives Control
Basic knowledge
required
Validity of the
Manual
Additional support
If you have questions relating to the use of the products described in the
Manual, which cannot be answered here, then please contact your local
Siemens office. You can also call the Hotline:
Training Center
Tel.:
Fax:
e-mail:
adsupport@siemens.com
Fax:
Internet: www.siemens.de/sibrain
Intranet: http://info-tc.erlm.siemens.de/
NOTE
This user part of the Manual does not include any detailed
information/instructions with individual descriptions, but is only intended
to provide a basic procedure. More detailed information on the dialog
boxes in the software and how they are handled is provided in the
appropriate online help.
iii
Foreword
Information
overview
This manual is part of the overall documentation for the technological and
drive control components T400, FM 458, SIMADYN D, SIMATIC TDC
and SIMATIC D7-SYS:
Title
System and
communications
configuring D7-SYS
Content
The first project in a few steps
This Section provides an extremely simple entry into the methodology when
assembling and programming the SIMATIC TDC/SIMADYN D control
system. It is especially conceived for first-time users of a control system.
System software
This Section provides basic know-how about the structure of the operating
system and an application program of a CPU. It should be used to obtain an
overview of the programming methodology, and basis for configuring user
programs.
Communications configuring
This section provides you with basic know-how about the communication
possibilities and how you configure links to the communication partners.
Changeover from STRUC V4.x to D7-SYS
Essential features are included in this section, which have changed over
STRUC V4.x with the introduction of SIMATIC D7-SYS.
Function blocks
iv
Foreword
Guide
A&D Technical
Support
World-wide (Nrnberg)
Technical Support
Local time: 0:00 to 24:00 / 365 days
Phone:
+49 (180) 5050-222
Fax:
+49 (180) 5050-223
E-Mail:
adsupport@siemens.com
GMT:
+1:00
Contents
Foreword ........................................................................................................................................ iii
1 Closed-loop control blocks................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
PC P controller........................................................................................................ 1-22
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
vii
Contents
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21
2.22
2.23
SII Inverter...............................................................................................................2-14
2.24
2.25
2.26
2.27
2.28
2.29
2.30
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
viii
Contents
4.2
4.2.1
4.1.2.1
4.1.2.2
4.1.2.3
4.2.2
4.2.2.1
4.2.2.2
4.2.2.3
4.2.3
4.3.2.1
4.2.4
4.4.2.1
4.4.2.2
4.4.2.3
4.2.5
4.5.2.1
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.4
4.4.1
4.1.4.1
4.4.2
4.2.4.1
4.2.4.2
4.2.4.3
4.4.3
4.3.4.1
4.3.4.2
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
4.6.5
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.8
4.8.1
ix
Contents
4.9
4.9.1
4.9.2
4.9.3
4.9.4
4.9.5
4.9.6
Gates......................................................................................................................... 6-1
AND block (BOOL type)............................................................................................ 6-1
AND12 AND block, status word (WORD type) ......................................................... 6-1
AND_W AND block (WORD type) ............................................................................ 6-3
NAND block (BOOL type) ......................................................................................... 6-4
Contents
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
6.1.8
6.1.9
6.1.10
6.1.11
6.1.12
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4
6.5.5
6.5.6
Switches.................................................................................................................. 6-22
ANS Automatic numerical changeover switch (REAL type) ................................... 6-22
ANS_I Automatic numerical changeover switch (INTEGER type) ......................... 6-23
BSW Binary changeover switch (INTEGER type) .................................................. 6-24
NSW Numerical changeover switch (REAL type) .................................................. 6-24
NSW_D Numerical changeover switch (DOUBLE-INTEGER type) ....................... 6-24
NSW_I Numerical changeover switch (INTEGER type)......................................... 6-24
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3
6.6.4
Multiplexer............................................................................................................... 6-25
DX8 Demultiplexer, 8 outputs, can be cascaded (REAL type)............................... 6-25
DX8_I Demultiplexer, 8 outputs, can be cascaded (INTEGER type) ..................... 6-27
MUX8 Multiplexer, can be cascaded (REAL type) ................................................. 6-29
MUX8_I Multiplexer, can be cascaded (INTEGER type)........................................ 6-31
6.7
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.3
6.7.4
6.7.5
6.7.6
6.7.7
6.8
Buffers..................................................................................................................... 6-44
xi
Contents
6.8.1
6.8.2
6.8.3
6.8.4
6.8.5
6.8.6
6.8.7
DAT Function block to input/output real values in/out of a data memory (REAL
type) ........................................................................................................................ 6-44
DLB Delay block (REAL type)................................................................................. 6-45
SAV Value buffer (REAL type)................................................................................ 6-46
SAV_B Value buffer (BOOL type)........................................................................... 6-47
SAV_D Value buffer (DOUBLE-INTEGER type) .................................................... 6-48
SAV_I Value buffer (INTEGER type) ...................................................................... 6-49
TSAV, TSAV_B, TSAV_I, TSAV_Dvalues are backed-up in the technology
save area (TSAVE area)......................................................................................... 6-50
6.9
6.9.1
6.9.2
6.9.3
6.9.4
6.9.5
6.9.6
6.9.7
6.9.8
6.9.9
6.9.10
6.9.11
6.9.12
6.9.13
6.9.14
6.9.15
6.9.16
6.10
6.10.1
6.10.2
6.10.3
xii
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
SQGB Clock generator for binary signals (BOOL type) ......................................... 7-13
7.9
7.10
Contents
7.11
SYF1 System error field (WORD type, 1 word long) .............................................. 7-18
7.12
SYF4 System error field (WORD type, 4 words long) ............................................ 7-21
7.13
8.2
8.3
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
9.10
9.11
9.12
9.13
9.14
9.15
9.16
xiii
Contents
9.17
9.18
9.19
9.20
9.21
9.22
MDCMP1 basic and equalization functions for Motion Control ............................ 9-97
9.23
9.24
9.25
9.26
9.27
9.28
9.29
9.30
9.31
9.32
9.33
10.2
10.3
A.2
xiv
1.1
Symbol
DEL
input quantity R
activation threshold R
Brief description
X
B
R output quantity
Mode of operation
X + B for X <= -B
0 for -B < X < B
X - B for X >= B
1-1
Transfer function
-B
+B
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
Response threshold
(default: 0.0)
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
Configuringdata
1-2
T400/PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
2,1
0,7
0,4
1.2
Symbol
DEZ
input quantity R
response value R
Brief description
X
TH
R output quantity
Mode of operation
TH
1-3
Transfer function
-TH
+TH
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
TH
Response value
(default: 0.0)
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
Configuringdata
1-4
T400/PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
2,5
0,8
0,4
1.3
Symbol
DIF
input quantity R
derivative act. time const. TS
X
TD
R output quantity
Brief description
Mode of operation
Yn = ( X n - X n-1 )
TD
TA
Yn
Xn
Xn1
NOTE
The higher TD/TA is, then the higher is the amplitude change at Y from
one sampling instant to the next. TA is the sampling time in which the
function block is configured. TD is internally limited to TD > 0.
CAUTION
Overshoot is possible!
Block diagram
TD
1-5
Transfer function
X, Y
TA
TA
X
Y
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
TD
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
Configuringdata
1-6
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
9,5
3,1
1,6
yes
Can be configured in
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
1.4
DT1 block
Symbol
DT1
numerical input value
smoothing time constant
derivative action time constant
setting value
transfer setting vatue
Brief description
R
TS
TS
R
BO
X
T1
TD
SV
S
Y
YPT
Function block with derivative action and smoothing. Output DT1 can be
set.
Mode of operation
Setting function not active (S = 0)
Input quantity X is dynamically delayed by smoothing time constant T1,
and is fed to a differential element (differentiator) and block output YPT.
Output quantity Y of the complete DT1 is proportional to the rate of
change of YPT (difference quotient), multiplied by the derivative action
time TD.
T1 determines the gradient of the output quantity decrease. It specifies
the time at which the transfer function has decreased, after smoothing
and differentiation, to 37% of XTD/T1.
The transfer function, with a sufficiently high T1/TA ( T1/TA>10 )
corresponds to the following characteristic
t / T 1
with t = nTA
Y(t) = X(TD/T1)e
The discrete values are calculated according to the following algorithm:
Y1n =
TD
( Xn YPTn 1)
T1
YPTn = YPTn 1 +
TA
( Xn YPTn 1)
T1
YPTn
Yn
Xn
YPTn1
The higher T1/TA is, then the lower is the amplitude change at Y and at
YPT from one sampling instant to the next. TA is the sampling time in
which the function block is configured. The higher TD/TA is, the higher is
the amplitude change at Y from one sampling instant to the next. TD and
T1 are internally limited: TD >= 0, T1 >= TA.
1-7
YPTn = X n
T1
SVn
Td
for TD 0
The internal limits for T1 and TD are valid. For TD=0, the output
quantities remain unchanged as long as S = 1.
CAUTION
Block diagram
T1
PT1
TD
SV
YPT
Transfer function
Y1
Y1=f(X,t)
X TD
T1
Y1(t=T1)=0,37 X TD/T1
T1
1-8
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
T1
TD
SV
(default: 0.0)
YPT
(default: 0.0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
13,3
4,4
2,2
1-9
1.5
Symbol
FUZ
communications port
adress data
input x1
input x2
input x3
input x4
input x5
input x6
input x7
input x8
input x9
numerical input value x10
save changes in the eprom
Brief description
GV
S
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
BO
CTS
US
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
X10
EEP
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Yt1
Yt2
YTF
QTS
R
R
R
R
W
W
W
BO
output y1
output y2
output y3
output y4
error code, receiver
error code, transmitter
status display of the fuzzy block (integer typ)
communication port
Mode of operation
1-10
Initialization input to specify the configured name of the module via whose data
interface parameterization is to be realized.
US
Initialization input for address data. The data consists of a channel name, and, in addition, a
channel number (DUST1 syntax)
(default: empty string)
X1
Controller input 1
(default: 0.0)
X10
Controller input 10
(default: 0.0)
EEP
When a 1 is entered, all of the controller data, which have changed since the last time they
were saved in the EEPROM, are again saved there. It is recommended that all of
the controller data are saved in the EEPROM after "fine tuning".
(default: 0)
Y1
Controller output 1
(default: 0.0)
Y4
Controller output 4
(default: 0.0)
YT1
Status display of the receive channel; refer to "Communications Configuring D7-SYS for an
explanation
(default: 16#0000)
YT2
YTF
QTS
Block output QTS indicates whether the block is operating error-free (QTS = 1),
or after entering an error message, became inactive (QTS = 0)
(default: 0)
1-11
Configuringdata
1-12
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
70,0
23,1
11,6
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
1.6
Symbol
FUZ I
coupling module name
adress data
input X1
input X2
input X3
input X4
input X5
input X6
input X7
input X8
input X9
input X10
save changes in the EEPROM
Brief description
GV
S
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BO
CTS
US
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
X10
EEP
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
YT1
YT2
YZF
QTS
I
I
I
I
W
W
W
BO
output Y1
output Y2
output Y3
output Y4
error code receiver
error code transmitter
status display of the fuzzy block
block status
Mode of operation
1-13
Initialization input to specify the configured name of the module via whose data interface
parameterize operation is to be realized
US
Initialization input for address data. The data consists of a channel name, and, in addition, a
channel number (DUST1 syntax)
(default: empty string)
X1
Controller input 1
(default: 0)
X10
Controller input 10
(default: 0)
EEP
When a 1 is entered, all of the controller data, which have changed since the
last time they were saved in the EEPROM, are saved again. It is
recommended that all of the controller data are saved in the EEPROM after "fine tuning"
(default: 0)
Y1
Controller output 1
(default: 0)
Y4
Controller output 4
(default: 0)
YT1
YT2
YTF
QTS
Block output QTS indicates whether the block is operating error-free (QTS=1), or,
after entering an error message, became inactive (QTS=0)
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
1-14
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
70,0
23,1
11,6
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
1.7
INT Integrator
Symbol
INT
input quantity
upper limit value
lower limit value
setting
integral time constant
setting
Brief description
R
R
R
R
TS
BO
X
LU
LL
SV
TI
S
Y
QU
QL
R output quantity
BO integrator at the upper limit
BO integrator at the lower limit
Mode of operation
Yn = Yn-1 +
TA
Xn
TI
Yn
Yn1
Xn
For S = 1, output quantity Y is set to setting value SV. Two functions can
be implemented via S:
Integrator tracking (Y = SV)
If binary input S=1, and setting value SV is changed: After setting, the
output immediately jumps to the setting value.
Setting the integrator to the initial value SV:
S1 is switched to 1. S is then set to 0 and the integrator ramps from SV in
the direction, which is specified by the polarity of input X.
NOTE
1-15
Block diagram
SV
TI
LL
LU
QU
Y
QL
Condition
QU
QL
Mode
LL<Yn-1+XTA/TI<LU
Yn
Integrating
Yn-1+XTA/TI >= LU
LU
Yn-1+XTA/TI <= LL
LL
LL<SV<LU
SVn
Setting
SV >= LU
LU
SV <= LL
LL
Condition
QU
QL
Mode
LL >= LU
LU
* = any
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
LU
(default: 0.0)
LL
(default: 0.0)
SV
Setting value
(default: 0.0)
TI
Setting
(default: 0)
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
QU
(default: 0)
QL
1-16
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
7,5
2,5
1,3
1-17
1.8
LIM Limiter
Symbol
LIM
input quantity R
upper limit value R
lower limit value R
Brief description
X
LU
LL
Y
QU
QL
R output quantity
BO input quantity at the upper limit
BO input quantity at the lower limit
Mode of operation
The function block transfers input quantity X to its output Y. The input
quantity is limited according to LU and LL.
Output QU is set to 1 if the input quantity reaches the upper limit value
LU.
Output QL is set to 1 if the input quantity reaches the lower limit value LL.
If the lower limit value is greater than or equal to the upper limit value,
output Y is set to the upper limit value LU.
Algorithm:
LUfor X LU
LL
LU
QU
Y
QL
1-18
Condition
QU
QL
Mode
LL < X < LU
X >= LU
LU
X <= LL
LL
Condition
QU
QL
Mode
LL >= LU
LU
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
LU
(default: 0.0)
LL
(default: 0.0)
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
QU
(default: 1)
QL
(default: 1)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
3,0
0,9
0,5
1-19
1.9
Symbol
LIM_D
input quantity D
upper limit value D
lower limit value D
Brief description
X
LU
LL
Y
QU
QL
D output quantity
BO input quantity at the upper limit
BO input quantity at the lower limit
Mode of operation
The function block transfers input quantity X to its output Y. The input
quantity is limited according to LU and LL.
Output QU is set to 1 if the input quantity reaches the upper limit value
LU.
Output QL is set to 1 if the input quantity reaches the lower limit value LL.
If the lower limit value is greater than or equal to the upper limit value,
output Y is set to the upper limit value LU.
Algorithm:
LUfor X LU
LL
LU
QU
Y
QL
1-20
Condition
QU
QL
Mode
LL < X < LU
X >= LU
LU
X <= LL
LL
Condition
QU
QL
Mode
LL >= LU
LU
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
LU
(default: 0.0)
LL
(default: 0.0)
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
QU
(default: 1)
QL
(default: 1)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
3,0
0,9
0,5
1-21
1.10
PC P controller
Symbol
PC
setpoint 1
setpoint 2
setpoint 3
actual vlaue
upper limit value
lower limit value
proportional coefficient
controller enable
Brief description
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
BO
W1
W2
W3
X
LU
LL
KP
EN
Y
YE
QU
QL
R
R
BO
BO
output quantity
system deviation
controller at the upper limit
controller at the lower limit
Mode of operation
The three setpoints W1, W2 and W3 are added, and the actual value X is
subtracted from the setpoint sum. The result YE is multiplied by the
proportional coefficient KP and output at Y.
Algorithm:
Y = KP YE = KP (W1 + W 2 + W 3 X )
YE = W1 + W2 + W3 X
1-22
Block diagram
W1
KP
LL
LU
W2
QU
Y
YE
W3
X
QL
YE
EN
Truth table
for LL<LU
EN
Condition
QU
QL
Mode
LL< 0 <LU
Controller inhibit
LU <= 0
Controller inhibit
LL >= 0
Controller inhibit
LL<YE KP<LU
KP YE
Controller enable
YE KP >= LU
LU
Controller at the
upper limit
YE KP <= LL
LL
Controller at the
lower limit
Truth table
for LL>=LU
EN
Condition
QU
QL
Mode
None
Control inhibit
LL >= LU
LU
Controller at the
upper limit
I/O
W1
Setpoint 1
(default: 0.0)
W2
Setpoint 2
(default: 0.0)
W3
Setpoint 3
(default: 0.0)
Actual value
(default: 0.0)
LU
(default: 0.0)
LL
(default: 0.0)
KP
Proportional coefficient
(default: 0.0)
EN
Controller enable
(default: 0)
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
YE
System deviation
(default: 0.0)
QU
(default: 1)
QL
(default: 1)
1-23
Configuringdata
1-24
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
11,7
3,9
2,0
1.11
PIC PI controller
Symbol
PIC
setpoint 1
setpoint 2
actual value 1
actual value 2
pre-control value
upper limit value
lower limit value
setting value, integrator
proportional coefficient
integral action time
I controller
controller enable
set integrator
hold integrator value
Brief description
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
TS
BO
BO
BO
BO
W1
W2
X1
X2
WP
LU
LL
SV
KP
TN
IC
EN
S
HI
Y
YE
YI
QU
QL
R
R
R
BO
BO
output value
system deviation
integrator value
controller at the upper limit
controller at the lower limit
Mode of operation
The actual value sum (X1+X2) is subtracted from the setpoint sum
(W1+W2), corresponding to the following equation:
1-25
TA
Yn = Yn-1 + KP 1 +
YE n - YE n-1
TN
Yn1
W1
IC
TN
SV
LL
WP
LU
W2
YE
X1
X2
KP * YE
(YPn)
QU
(WPn)
Y
QL
(YIn)
YI>LU
YI<LL
HI
I
EN
.>=1
YI
Sign
YE
1-26
Transfer functions
KP * YE
LU
YI
1)
LL
LU
Y
KP * YE
TN
1)
LL
Charac. 1
2)
KP * YE absolute value further
integrated by YI
Charac. 2
Output Y and integrator value YI of the controller can be limited via inputs
LU and LL. When output quantity Y reaches the set limits, this is
indicated with either QU = 1 or QL = 1.
Operating modes
and control of the
closed-loop
controller
Commands at the
control inputs:
Control input
Value
Function
EN
Controller enable
IC
HI
1-27
Normal controller operation involves LL <= 0 <= LU and LL < Yn < LU.
However, other settings are possible, which are now subsequently
explained. To realize this, the algorithm is suitably adapted:
Yn = KP YE n + YI n + WPn
A differentiation can be made between 5 operating conditions, depending
on LU and LL.
No.
Condition
Yn
LU
LL
none
LU
none
LU
LL < LU
LL =LU
4
LL > LU
5
Integrator control
by limiting
Truth table
EN
IC
HI
YIn
YIn
Yn
Mode
Comments
Control inhibit
1-28
for condition 1, with LL < LU and LL< Yn < LU: normal mode
Truth table
EN
IC
HI
Yin
Yn
Mode
Comments
KPYEn YInTA/TN
1+YIn
KPYE
n+YIn
+WPn
PI controller
KPYEn YInTA/TN
1+YIn
YIn+W
Pn
I controller
P component = 0
SVn
KPYE
n+YIn
+WPn
P controller,
integrator
control
YIn = SVn
SVn
YIn+W
Pn
P controller,
integrator
control
YIn = SVn
YIn-1
KPYE
n+YIn
+WPn
P controller,
integrator =
constant
YIn = YIn-1
YIn-1
YIn+W
Pn
I controller,
integrator =
constant
YIn = YIn-1
Yin
* = any
for condition 2 with LL < LU and Yn = LU: Controller over modulation with
LU limiting function
Truth table
EN IC
HI
YIn
YIn
Yn
Mode
KPYEn
TA/TN
YIn-1+YIn for
YIn-1 < LU
YIn-1- YIn for
YIn-1 > LU
LU for YIn-1 =
LU
LU
PI controller
YIn integrates -> LU,
at the upper limit possibly with (-)
KPYEn
TA/TN
YIn-1+YIn for
YIn-1 < LU
YIn-1- YIn for
YIn-1 > LU
LU for YIn-1 =
LU
LU
LU
P controller at
the upper limit
LU
YIn-1
LU
P controller,
integrator =
constant
YIn-1
LU
I controller,
integrator =
constant
Comment
* = any
1-29
for condition 3 with LL < LU and Yn = LL: Controller over modulation with
LL limiting function
Truth table
EN IC
HI
YIn
YIn
Yn
Mode
Comments
KPYEn
TA/TN
YIn-1+YIn for
YIn-1 < LL
YIn-1- YIn for
YIn-1 > LL
LL for
YIn-1 = LL
LL
PI controller at
the lower limit
KPYEn
TA/TN
YIn-1+YIn for
YIn-1 < LL
YIn-1- YIn for
YIn-1 > LL
LL for YIn-1 = LL
LL
I controller at the
lower limit
SVn for
SVn > LL
LL for
SVn <= LL
LL
SVn for
SVn > LL
LL for SVn <=
LL
LL
I controller at the
lower limit
YIn-1
LL
P controller,
integrator =
constant
YIn-1
LL
I controller,
integrator =
constant
* = any
Truth table
EN
IC
HI
YIn
YIn
Yn
Mode
Yn - KPYEn - WPn
L=
LU
Controller control
refer to LL and LU
Comments
* = any
Truth table
EN
IC
HI
YIn
YIn
Yn
Mode
LU
PI controller at the
upper limit
Comment
= any
1-30
KP * YE
LU
LU
YI
LL
LU
LL
LU
LU
-DYIn
LL
1)
LL
LU
1)
LL
LL
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Changeover from
the PI mode into
the I mode
1-31
Changeover from
the PI mode into
the P mode
I- "PI characteristics
"1"
"1"
IC "0"
KP * YE
"0"
KP * YE
Y
YI
P- "PI characteristics
"1"
"1"
KP * YE
NOTE
KP * YE
KP * YE
YI
"0"
KP * YE
Y
YI
YI
1-32
I/O
W1
Setpoint 1
(default: 0.0)
W2
Setpoint 2
(default: 0.0)
X1
Actual value 1
(default: 0.0)
X2
Actual value 2
(default: 0.0)
WP
Pre-control value
(default: 0.0)
LU
(default: 0.0)
LL
(default: 0.0)
SV
(default: 0.0)
KP
Proportional coefficient
(default: 0.0)
TN
IC
I controller
(default: 0)
EN
Controller enable
(default: 0)
Set integrator
(default: 0)
HI
(default: 0)
Output value
(default: 0.0)
YE
System deviation
YI
Integrator value
(default: 0.0)
QU
(default: 1)
QL
(default: 1)
Configuringdata
(default: 0.0)
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
14,3
4,7
2,4
1-33
1.12
PT1 element
Symbol
PT1
input quantity
smoothing time constant
setting value
transfer setting value
Brief description
R
TS
R
BO
X
T
SV
S
R output quantity
Mode of operation
Setting function not active (S = 0)
Input quantity X, dynamically delayed by the smoothing time constant T,
is output at Y.
T defines the rate of rise (gradient) of the output quantity. It specifies the
time at which the transfer function has increased to 63% of its final value.
After t = 3T, the transfer function has reached approximately 95% of its
final value.
The internally fixed proportional gain is 1 and cannot be varied.
The transfer function, if T/TA is sufficiently high (T/TA > 10) has the
following characteristic.
Y( t ) = X (1 e t / T )
with t = nTA.
The discrete values are calculated using the following algorithm:
Yn = Yn-1 +
TA
( X n - Yn-1 )
T
Yn
Yn1
Xn
1-34
The higher T/TA is, then the lower is the amplitude change at Y from one
sampling instant to the next. TA is the sampling time in which the function
block is configured.
T is internally limited: T >= TA.
Block diagram
SV
Transfer function
Y=f(X,t)
Y(t=T)=0,63X
X
X
Y
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
SV
Setting value
(default: 0.0)
(default: 0)
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
5,5
1,8
0,9
1-35
1.13
Symbol
PWM
input quantity
amplification factor
period
max. pulse width
min. pulse width
enable
Brief description
R
R
TS
TS
TS
BO
X
XF
TP
TU
TL
EN
QP
QN
Mode of operation
The function block generates square wave pulses with period TP and
width PW. The width PW of the pulses is generated from the following
product:
PW = X * XF
with the secondary condition TL <= PW <= TU. Pulse width PW has the
units of ms.
If the sign of X.XF is positive (positive polarity), pulses are output at QP; if
the sign is negative, pulses are output at QN.
The time interval, within whose limits the pulse width can be varied, can
be defined via inputs TL and TU.
For EN = 1, the function block is enabled; for EN = 0, it is inhibited.
When configuring it should be observed that the following is selected:
T <=PW <=TU<TP.
TP dominates over TU, TL and PW. After TP expires, a new period
starts, independent of TU, TL and PW.
NOTE
32
1) * TA
Block diagram
TP TU TL
X
XF
QP
QN
EN
1-36
Pulse diagram
QP, QN
1
0
t
TL
PW
TU
TP
PW = Pulse width
= illegal zone, outside the limits
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
XF
Amplification factor
(default: 0.0)
TP
Period
TU
TL
EN
Enable
(default: 0)
QP
(default: 0)
QN
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
3,1
1,0
0,5
1-37
1.14
Symbol
RGE
input quantity R
Normalization R
upper limit value R
lower limit value R
setting value, output R
ramp-up time TS
ramp-down time TS
raise BO
lower BO
output equal to input BO
set BO
Brief description
X
NRM
LU
LL
SV
TU
TD
CU
CD
CF
S
Y
YA
QE
QU
QL
R output quantity
R acceleration value
BO output Y equals input X
BO upper limit reached
BO lower limit reached
Mode of operation
1-38
The function block includes an integrator with two integral time constants
which can be independently set from one another. Output Y changes
according to the following algorithm
Yn = Yn 1 + YAn .
The acceleration value YE is separately calculated for ramp up and for
ramp down and is output at one output.
Ramp up is when the output value Y moves away from zero.
Ramp down is when the output value Y approaches zero.
Block diagram
CU
TU TD SV LL
CD
LU
Control
logic
CF
X
YA
QE
QU
QL
YA =
TA
* NRM fr Y > 0
TU
YA =
TA
* NRM fr Y < 0
TU
YA =
YA =
TA
* NRM fr Y > 0
TD
TA
* NRM fr Y < 0
TD
The ramp up time TU is the time in which the absolute value of the output
quantity increases by NRM.
The ramp down time TD is the time in which the absolute value of the
output quantity is reduced by NRM.
The ramp up time and ramp down time can be different.
The lower TA/TU or TA/TD, then the lower is the amplitude change at Y
from one sampling instant to the next. TA is the sampling time in which
the function block is executed.
1-39
Function of the
control inputs:
S =1
CF =1
CU =1
CD =1
NOTE
The integrator operates internally with a high accuracy so that even for
low setpoint actual value differences, the block still integrates. It should
be ensured that the sampling time is sufficiently low with respect to the
ramp up or ramp down time.
TU and TD are internally limited: TU >= TA, TD >= TA.
Ramp function generator stop
Truth table
S
CF
CU
CD
YAn
Yn
Mode
Comment
Yn-1
Stop
Y is constant
1-40
LL < LU and
LL < actual value
Yn-1 < LU
S
CF
CU
CD
YAn
Yn
Mode
Comment
Step
SVn
Set output to SV
TA/TU;
TA/TD
Yn-1
+YAn
Standard operation
Y -> X
TA/TU
(TA/TD)
Yn-1
+YAn
Approach upper
limit value Y -> LU
TA/TD
(TA/TU)
Yn-1
+YAn
* = any
Transfer functions
X,Y
LU
X1
NRM
NRM
TU
X2
TU
TD
X4
TD
t
NRM
X
Y
NRM
X3
LL
Example 1: CF = 1 with LL < LU and LL < X < LU, as well as X1=1.5, X2=X4 =0.0, X3=1.5,
LU=2.0, LL=2.0, TU > TD
1-41
CU
CD
1
0
1
0
Y
LU
LL
Example 2: Motorized potentiometer function with CU and CD and with LL<LU
CF
1
0
1
0
CD
Y
LU
X
SV
LL
Example 3: Set integrator with LL < LU
1-42
CU
1
0
CD
1
0
LL < LU
LL > LU
LL < LU
LU
Pull-in
limit
Pull-in
limit
Push-out
limit
LL
Example 4: Changing and interchanging the limits
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
NRM
Normalization
(default: 1.0)
LU
(default: 0.0)
LL
(default: 0.0)
SV
(default: 0.0)
TU
Ramp-up time
TD
Ramp-down time
CU
Raise
(default: 0)
CD
Lower
(default: 0)
CF
(default: 0)
Setting
(default: 0)
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
YA
Acceleration value
(default: 0.0)
QE
(default: 0)
QU
(default: 0)
QL
(default: 0)
1-43
Configuringdata
1-44
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
32,9
10,9
5,5
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
1.15
Symbol
RGJ
input quantity R
Normalization R
control deviation R
upper limit value R
lower limit value R
setting value output R
acceleration setting value R
control deviation weighting R
ramp up time TS
ramp down time TS
rounding-off time during ramp-up TS
rounding-off time during ramp-up TS
rounding-off time during ramp-up TS
rounding-off time during ramp-down TS
rounding-off time during ramp-down TS
rounding-off time during ramp-down TS
raise BO
lower BO
output equal to the input BO
upper limit reached BO
lower limit reached BO
Rounding off on BO
setting acceleration BO
set BO
enable BO
Brief description
X
NRM
EV
LU
LL
SV
ASV
WD
TU
TD
TRU
TR1
TR2
TRD
TR3
TR4
CU
CD
CF
ULR
LLR
RQN
SA
S
EN
Y
YL
YA
YB
QE
QU
QL
R output quantity
R Limited output quantity
R acceleration value
R jerk value
BO output Y equal to input X
BO upper limit reached
BO lower limit reached
Mode of operation
Yn = Yn 1 + YAn
YAn = YAn 1 + YBn
1-45
For the acceleration value YA outside the rounding off time, the
following is valid at ramp up:
YA = YAmax =
TA
NRM
TU
YA = YAmax =
TA
NRM
TU
for Y > 0
for Y < 0
YA = YAmax =
YA = YA max =
TA
NRM
TD
TA
NRM
TD
for Y > 0
for Y < 0
The following is valid for jerk value YB during the rounding-off time at
ramp-up:
YB =
TA YAmax
TRU
or
YB =
TA YAmax
TR1
YB =
TA YAmax
TR 2
The following is valid for jerk value YB during the rounding-off time at
ramp-down:
YB =
TA YAmax
TRD
or
YB =
TA YAmax
TR 3
YB =
TA YAmax
TR 4
The operating mode is specified via control logic dependent on the logical
statuses of binary quantities EN, S, SA, CF, CU and CD.
The input quantity X, and therefore indirectly output quantity Y are limited
via block inputs LU and LL. When Y reaches the set limits, this is
indicated at the binary outputs with QU = 1 or QL = 1.
Binary output QE is 1 if the output quantity Y is equal to the input quantity
X.
Ramp-up is sub-divided into three phases:
Phase 1
When setpoint X is increased, maximum jerk YB dependent on TRU
or TR1 is entered in the first phase. Thus, the acceleration is
increased in proportion to the time and in this rounding-off phase,
output quantity Y increases quadratically over time.
1-46
Phase 2
After the maximum acceleration YA has been reached, corresponding
to the specified ramp up time TU, acceleration is constant. Output
quantity Y increases in proportion to the time.
Phase 3
In the third phase, acceleration is reduced in proportion to time. In this
rounding off phase, output quantity Y dependent on TRU or TR1
approaches input quantity X quadratically over time.
Ramp down is essentially the same.
Transfer function:
RGJ, standard
ramp-up
X,Y
NRM
TU
0.0
t
TRU
TRD
YA
0.0
YB
0.0
1-47
X,Y
TR1
TR2
TR3
TR4
Ramp-up and
ramp-down time
The ramp time TU is defined as the time in which the absolute output
quantity is increased by the value of NRM in proportion to the time.
The ramp down time TD is defined as the time in which the absolute
output quantity is decreased by the value of NRM in proportion to the
time.
The ramp up and ramp down times can be different.
Rounding-off time
at ramp-up and
ramp-down
The ramp up time is defined as the time in which the output quantity
reaches the maximum acceleration value, starting from a constant initial
value. In this time, the jerk value is constant and is not equal to zero
(refer to phase 1).
The rounding off time is also defined as the time in which the output
quantity reaches a constant final value starting from its maximum
acceleration value (refer to phase 3).
The rounding off time at ramp up is defined with TRU or TR1, TR2 and at
ramp down with TRD or TR3, TR4.
When the setpoint direction changes, or at the zero crossover of the
transfer function, depending on the initial position, a changeover is made
from ramp up into ramp down or from ramp down into ramp up with the
associated rounding off operations. The appropriate is valid when
changing the ramp up or the ramp down time during operation.
If a ramp up follows a ramp down, whereby TRD and TD are low and
TRU and TU are high, at a ramp down, YA is reduced, so that at the
following ramp up, there is no overshoot as long as the target value
(X, LL or LU) and the ramp up generator times (TU, TD, TRU, TRD) do
not change.
If rounding off is disabled and Normalization is 1.0, RGJ acts just like
function block RGE.
1-48
RQN
0
X
X,Y
0.0
1.0
TU
YA
0.0
t
YB
0.0
t
Operating mode
"Rounding-off off"
If, during the rounding-off phase, input connectors are modified that
influence the kinematics (e.g. X, TU, TD, TRU, ...), then it can occur
that the ramp-function generator brakes more significantly than that
specified by the selected rounding-off.
If you wish to operate the function block in this mode, proceed as follows:
Set connections TRU, TR1, TR2, TRD, TR3 and TR4 to "0" (all
rounding-off times are "0").
Set the connection RQN to the value "1" mode ("Rounding-off on").
With these settings, the function block RGJ behaves as described in the
operating mode "rounding-off off" (RQN=0).
Modes and control
of the rampfunction generator
S=1
SA=1
CF=1
CU=1
CD=1
1-49
NOTE
Truth table
EN
SA
CF
CU
CD
YAn
Yn
Mode
Comment
Inhibit
Y=0
Yn-1
Inhibit
Y = constant
*= any
SA
CF
CU
CD
YAn
Yn
Mode
Comment
Step
SVn
Set output to
SV
SV as required, fixed or
variable
ASVn
Yn-1 +
YAn
Set output to
integrator 1,
ASV
TA/TU
(TA/TD)
Yn-1 +
YAn
Standard
operation
Y->X
TU for [X>YY0]
[X<YY<=0]
TD for
[X>YY<0][X<YY>0]
TA/TU
(TA/TD)
Yn-1 +
YAn
Approach
upper limit
value
Y -> LU
TU,TD as above,
dependent on the initial
position
TA/TD
(TA/TU)
Yn-1 +
YAn
* = any
1-50
Ramp-function
generator tracking
Yn = Yn 1 EVn + WD EVk
n = sampling interval n
k = the instant at which the controller went to its limit for the first time
(0->1 edge at ULR or LLR)
ULR
Tracking
1
0
X,Y
t
X
Y
0.0
t
x
0.0
t
EV
0.0
Generally, tracking can only be used for "classic control loops" (e.g. PI
speed controllers). In this case, the controller limits must be correctly set
(e.g. the same as the current limits).
Generally, WD is 1.01 to 1.1 (>1.0!). Jerk limiting is not active during
tracking.
The controller binary outputs (upper/lower limit reached) are fed back to
binary inputs ULR and LLR. When a limit is reached, one of the two
binary inputs ULR or LLR is set to 1, via the feedback at function block
RGJ, and thus tracking activated.
ULR and LLR should be set to 0 if tracking is not be used.
1-51
ULR
LLR EV
QL
QU
x*
x
Ramp-function generator
PI controller
"Tracking" example
Block diagram
CU
LL
LU
ASV TU TD SV
Steuer
Logik
TR4
CD
CF
LU
YL
LL
- YA
Abgleich fr
Verschleifung
YB
QE
QU
SA
NOTE
QL
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
NRM
Normalization TD/TU
(default: 1.0)
EV
Control deviation
(default: 0.0)
LU
(default: 0.0)
LL
(default: 0.0)
SV
(default: 0.0)
ASV
(default: 0.0)
WD
(default: 0.0)
1-52
TU
Ramp up time
TD
TRU
TR1
TR2
TRD
TR3
TR4
CU
Raise
(default: 0)
CD
Lower
(default: 0)
CF
(default: 0)
ULR
(default: 0)
LLR
(default: 0)
RQN
Rounding off on
(default: 0)
SA
Set acceleration
(default: 0)
Set
(default: 0)
EN
Enable
(default: 0)
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
YL
(default: 0.0)
YA
Acceleration value
(default: 0.0)
YB
Jerk value
(default: 0.0)
QE
(default: 0)
QU
(default: 0)
QL
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
15,0
5,0
2,5
1-53
Arithmetic blocks
NOTE
2.1
Brief description
NOTE
2.2
NOTE
Brief description
NOTE
2.4
ADD Adder
Brief description
2.3
The computation times are only valid for the CPU module PM 5.
Brief description
NOTE
2-1
Arithmetic blocks
2.5
Symbol
ADD_M
Modulo value DI
Input 1 DI
Input 2 DI
Brief description
MOD
X1
X2
Y
QP
QN
DI Output
BO Positive overflow
BO Negative overflow
The ADD_M function block is used to add position values for drives.
It can be used to "add-up" offsets for position reference values or for
deadtime compensation for real masters.
Mode of operation
I/O
MOD
(default: 0)
2 30
X1
Addition value 1
(default: 0)
X2
Addition value 2
(default: 0)
(default: 0)
QP
(default: 0)
Positive overflow
This is set, if the result of the addition of X1 + X2 is
greater than or
equal to the axis cycle length which was entered.
QP=1 Y MOD (Y=YMOD)
QN
Negative overflow
This is set if the results of the addition of X1 + X2
has a negative value.
QN=1 Y < 0
(Y=Y + MOD)
Configuringdata
2-2
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
(default: 0)
60,0
19,8
9,9
Arithmetic blocks
2.6
Brief description
NOTE
2.7
Brief description
NOTE
2.8
Symbol
AVA
input quantity R
Y
SN
Brief description
Mode of operation
The function block generates the absolute value (input quantity) at input
X. The result is output at Y.
Y= X
2-3
Arithmetic blocks
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
(default: 0.0)
SN
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
2.9
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
2,6
0,9
0,5
Symbol
AVA_D
input quantity D
Y
SN
Brief description
Mode of operation
The function block generates the absolute value (input quantity) at input
X. The result is output at Y.
Y= X
If the input quantity is negative, then the binary output SN is
simultaneously set to 1.
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
(default: 0.0)
SN
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
2-4
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
2,6
0,9
0,5
Arithmetic blocks
2.10
Brief description
NOTE
2.11
NOTE
NOTE
Brief description
NOTE
2.14
Brief description
2.13
DIV Divider
Brief description
2.12
Brief description
NOTE
2-5
Arithmetic blocks
Brief description
Mode of operation
The function block determines the highest of the value entered at generic
inputs X... The result is output at Y.
Y = Max{ X 01 ,..., X nn }
If the inputs have the same values, then this value is output as the
maximum input quantity.
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
(default: 0.0)
Configuringdata
2-6
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
3,9
1,3
0,7
yes
Generic FB
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
X is a generic input
Arithmetic blocks
2.16
Symbol
MIS
input quantity R
Brief description
Comparison block with REAL type generic inputs to determine the lowest
input value at the time the block is executed.
Mode of operation
Y = Min{ X 01 ,..., X nn }
If all the inputs have the same value, this value is output as the minimum
input quantity.
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
(default: 0.0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Generic FB
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
X is a generic input
4,4
1,5
0,8
2-7
Arithmetic blocks
2.17
MUL Multiplier
Brief description
NOTE
2.18
NOTE
Brief description
NOTE
2-8
Brief description
2.19
Arithmetic blocks
R Constant
R Constant 2
R Constant e
Brief description
Mode of operation
This function block already outputs the constants in the init mode.
I/O
PI
Konstante
Wert: 3.14159274
DPI
Konstante 2*
Wert: 6.28318548
Konstante e
Wert: 2.71828174
Configuring data
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
0,33
0,11
0,07
2-9
Arithmetic blocks
Brief description
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
X
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
R output quantity
Mode of operation
This function block adapts the output quantity Y to input quantity X via a
maximum of 10 breakpoints in four quadrants. The block linearly
interpolates between the breakpoints. The characteristic is horizontal
outside the abscissa values A1 and A10.
Example
Y
A5/B5
A10/B10
A4/B4
X
Xn
A3/B3
A1/B1
A2/B2
Yn
2-10
Arithmetic blocks
Configuring
instructions:
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
A1
(default: 0.0)
...
...
A10
(default: 0.0)
B1
(default: 0.0)
...
...
B10
(default: 0.0)
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
12,3
4,1
2,1
2-11
Arithmetic blocks
2.22
Symbol
PLI20
input quantity
abscissa value breakpoint 1
ordinate value breakpoint 1
abscissa value breakpoint 2
ordinate value breakpoint 2
abscissa value breakpoint 3
ordinate value breakpoint 3
abscissa value breakpoint 4
ordinate value breakpoint 4
abscissa value breakpoint 5
ordinate value breakpoint 5
abscissa value breakpoint 6
ordinate value breakpoint 6
abscissa value breakpoint 7
ordinate value breakpoint 7
abscissa value breakpoint 8
ordinate value breakpoint 8
abscissa value breakpoint 9
ordinate value breakpoint 9
abscissa value breakpoint 10
ordinate value breakpoint 10
abscissa value breakpoint 11
ordinate value breakpoint 11
abscissa value breakpoint 12
ordinate value breakpoint 12
abscissa value breakpoint 13
ordinate value breakpoint 13
abscissa value breakpoint 14
ordinate value breakpoint 14
abscissa value breakpoint 15
ordinate value breakpoint 15
abscissa value breakpoint 16
ordinate value breakpoint 16
abscissa value breakpoint 17
ordinate value breakpoint 17
abscissa value breakpoint 18
ordinate value breakpoint 18
abscissa value breakpoint 19
ordinate value breakpoint 19
abscissa value breakpoint 20
ordinate value breakpoint 20
2-12
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
X
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
A11
B11
A12
B12
A13
B13
A14
B14
A15
B15
A16
B16
A17
B17
A18
B18
A19
B19
A19
B20
output quantity
Arithmetic blocks
Brief description
Mode of operation
This function block adapts the output quantity Y to input quantity X via a
maximum of 20 breakpoints in 4 quadrants.
The block linearly interpolates between the breakpoints. The
characteristic is horizontal outside the abscissa values A1 and A20.
Mode of operation:
A18/B18
A17/B17
A19/B19
A20/B20
A16/B16
A15/B15
A14/B14
A13/B13
A12/B12
A11/B11
Xn
X
A10/B10
A9/B9
A8/B8
A7/B7
A6/B6
A5/B5
A1/B1
A4/B4
A2/B2 A3/B3
Yn
2-13
Arithmetic blocks
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
A1
(default: 0.0)
...
...
A20
(default: 0.0)
B1
(default: 0.0)
...
...
B20
(default: 0.0)
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
Configuringdata
2.23
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
14,9
4,9
2,5
SII Inverter
Brief description
NOTE
2.24
Brief description
NOTE
2.25
Brief description
NOTE
2-14
Arithmetic blocks
2.26
SUB Subtractor
Brief description
NOTE
2.27
NOTE
Brief description
NOTE
2.29
Brief description
2.28
Brief description
NOTE
2-15
Arithmetic blocks
2.30
Symbol
FRM
Input X1 X1
Input X2 X2
Input X3 X3
Input X4 X4
Input D1 D1
Input D2 D2
Input D3 D3
Input D4 D4
Input I1 I1
Input I2 I2
Input I3 I3
Input I4 I4
Formula expression FRM
Brief description
Y Result
YD Result, double
YI Result, integer
RDY Result, ready
QF Group fault
YFC Fault code
Mode of operation
The function block calculates the formula specified at input FRM. The
algebraic laws apply (point before slash etc.). The nesting depth and
length of the formula is only limited by the length of the input string. If the
formula does not have the correct syntax, an error is output. The result of
the formula is output at connectors Y, YD and YI.
If, for integer or double integer, there is an overflow, then this is output at
YFC - but not at QF.
NOTE
For binary operations, all values are internally converted into a double
integer and the operation is then executed. If an error occurs in the
conversion (e.g. a real value too large for double integer) an error is
output (QF and YFC, refer to the error codes).
It is not permissible to mix binary and arithmetic operations in a formula
and is rejected with an error (-10).
For shift operations, the arguments are converted into unsigned integer
and then back into integer. A logical shift is made. If the number of bits
to be shifted <= 0, then the result is the input value. If a shift is made by
32 or more bits, then the result is always 0.
When entering tan(+-((1+ 2*n)*Pi/2)) an equivalent value is supplied.
2-16
Arithmetic blocks
Expressions that
are permissible
Mathematical expressions
+, -, *, /
x**y, pow(x,y)
x to the power y
exp(x)
e to the power x
abs(x), fbas(x)
Absolute value of x
log(x), log10(x)
ln(x)
Natural logarithm
sqrt(x)
sin(x)
Sinusoidal function
cos(x)
Cosinusoidal function
tan(x)
Tangent function
asin(x), arcsin(x)
acos(x), arccos(x)
atan(x), arctan(x)
sinh(x)
cosh(x)
tanh(x)
%, mod
Modulo
ceil(x)
Help functions
Min(x,y)
Max(x,y)
Constants
e.g. 2.3, -0.5
Constant values
16#ABCD
Hexadecimal value
0xABCD
Hexadecimal value
pi
The number Pi
Eulerian number
Binary operations
&
OR logic operation
<<
>>
2-17
Arithmetic blocks
Table for the value range of the arguments for the individual functions
and operations
Range check,
limit value check
Error code
Minimum value /
limit value 1
Maximum value /
limit value 2
+, -, *
no
- infinity
+ infinity
yes
-7
infinity
x**y,
pow(x,y)
yes
-8
x<0 und y
infinity
-9
x=0 y=0
exp(x)
no
- infinity
+ infinity
abs(x),
no
- infinity
+ infinity
x0
+ infinity
fabs (x)
Log(x),
yes
-8
log10(x)
ln(x)
yes
-8
x0
+ infinity
sqrt(x)
yes
-8
x0
+ infinity
sin(x)
no
- infinity
+ infinity
cos(x)
no
- infinity
+ infinity
tan(x)
no
- infinity
+ infinity
asin(x),
yes
-8
-1
+1
yes
-8
-1
+1
no
- infinity
+ infinity
sinh(x)
no
- infinity
+ infinity
cosh(x)
no
- infinity
+ infinity
arcsin(x)
acos(x),
arccos(x)
atan(x),
arctan(x)
tanh(x)
no
- infinity
+ infinity
%, mod
no
- infinity
+ infinity
ceil
no
- infinity
+ infinity
Help functions
Min(x,y)
no
- infinity
+ infinity
Max(x,y)
no
- infinity
+ infinity
-2147483648
+2147483647
Binary calculations
x&y
yes
-3
x|y
yes
-3
-2147483648
+2147483647
x^y
yes
-3
-2147483648
+2147483647
x<<y
yes
-3
-2147483648
+2147483647
x>>y
yes
-3
-2147483648
+2147483647
Meaning RDY
2-18
Arithmetic blocks
Error codes at QF
No error occurred
Error occurred
No error occurred
>0
-1
Internal error
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
When an error occurs, the last valid values remain at the output
connectors Y, YD and YI.
I/O
X1
(default: 0.0)
X2
(default: 0.0)
X3
(default: 0.0)
X4
(default: 0.0)
D1
(default: 0)
D2
(default: 0)
D3
(default: 0)
D4
(default: 0)
I1
(default: 0)
I2
(default: 0)
I3
(default: 0)
I4
(default: 0)
FRM
Formula expression
(default: 0.0)
YD
(default: 0)
YI
(default: 0)
RDY
Result ready
(default: 0)
QF
Group error
(default: 0)
YFC
Error code
(default: 0)
2-19
Arithmetic blocks
Configuring data
2-20
Yes
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Computed in:
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Input/output blocks
Assignment of the input/output blocks to processor- and peripheral
devices
Block
Module
PM5
BII8
PM6 T400
X
X*)
BIQ8
SBI
X*)
SBQ
IT41
IT42 EA12
EB11
FM 458
FM 458-1DP
X
ADC
DAC
X
X
X
X
NAV
NAVS
Binary output
Bit
46
Q1
47
Q2
48
Q3
49
Q4
65
Q8
84
Q7
3-1
Input/output blocks
3.1
Symbol
ADC
hardware address
direct mode
offset compensation
scalling factor
adjustment type
Brief description
GV
BO
R
R
BO
AD
DM
OFF
SF
ADJ
Y
QF
YF
R measured value
BO group error massage
W error ID
Mode of operation
Y=
U
SF - OFF
5V
ADJ
AD
(2)
SF
OFF
QF
YF
DM
3-2
Input/output blocks
Adjustment
ADJ
Adjustment instant
No adjustment
0 -> 1
T400
IT41/IT42:
Fault signals
YF
PM5/PM6
Bit 1
Hardware fault
A/D conversion was not able to be completed within approx. 30 s.
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
The A/D converter was not able to read four times consecutively due to
adjustment on the same channel. (This error can only occur, if more than two
ADC are configured on a channel, and these simultaneously request
adjustment, or directly one after another.
Bit 6
Hardware fault
During adjustment, the status bit was not set in the result which was read.
The result was rejected.
Bit 7
Hardware fault
In a measurement result, the status bit for adjustment was set.
The result was rejected.
Bit 9
Hardware fault
Analog to bit 1, however, during initialization (no adjustment.
The nominal value is used
Bit 11
The other bits are not used. Bit 1 is the LSB, bit 16 is the MSB.
Resolution
3-3
Input/output blocks
I/O
AD
Hardware address
(no default)
DM
(default: 1)
OFF
Offset compensation
(default: 0.0)
SF
Scaling factor
(default: 0.0)
ADJ
Adjustment type
(default: 0)
Measured value
(default: 0.0)
QF
(default: 0)
YF
Error ID
(default: 16#0000)
Configuringdata
3-4
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
18,6
6,1
3,1
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
System mode
Normal mode
Special features
Input/output blocks
3.2
Symbol
AENC
resolution per turn
number of turns
preceding zero bits
alarm bit position
clock frequency
encocer type
data coding
parity check
reset error
gearbox ratio
normalization ,position
normalization, speed
position offset
upper limit speed
Brief description
NOTE
DI
DI
I
I
I
I
I
BO
BO
R
R
R
R
R
RPT
NOT
PZB
ABP
MDF
MDT
MDC
ENP
RE
NFG
NFP
NFY
OFF
LU
AD
YOP
YP
YRC
YSP
Y
QRC
QF
QNP
YF
YW
YFC
GV
DI
R
R
R
R
BO
BO
BO
W
W
W
hardware address
original position
position actual
revolution counter
sum position
speed actual value
revolution counter overflow
group fault
new position, received
hardware fault, encoder
alarm, encoder
error code
Example:
For an operating speed of 6000 RPM, half a revolution takes 5 ms. This
corresponds to the longest possible clock cycle duration. To take into
account extreme operating conditions (faults when transferred data
between the encoder and SIMADYN D module, increased computer
utilization), we recommend that a safety factor 2 is used, which results in
a clock cycle duration of approximately 2.5 ms.
3-5
Input/output blocks
Mode of operation
Example
(code rotary
encoder):
3-6
Input/output blocks
Linear encoder
with "position
overflow"
YP = YP0
RPT * NFP
Position * NFP
YP(OFF<0)
RPT * NFP
2
OFF
0
- RPT * NFP
YP(OFF=0)
2
Encoder operating range
Speed calculation
The AENC block calculates the speed from the change of the position
values (coded-rotary encoder) or the velocity (length measuring
systems). In this case, two system-related speed limits must be
observed. On one hand, coded-rotary encoders have a mechanical
speed limit (input LU), above which, no valid positions can be
determined. The speed actual value is undefined if this limit is exceeded.
The second speed limit is obtained from the configured sampling time.
For single-turn encoders, speed and position can only be uniquely
measured, if at least two measurements are made per revolution. If this is
not guaranteed, the revolution counter information YRC is also no longer
valid. A plausibility check is used to identify as to whether the speed limit
has been exceeded, whereby the magnitude of the speed change is
used.
In both cases, where the speed is exceeded, in addition to the group
error message, an appropriate indication is made in the error code word.
The speed is still calculated, whereby it is not possible to identify when
the block starts to re-output valid speed actual values. Thus, the error
messages are not re-set.
3-7
Input/output blocks
Defines the terminal designation of the absolute encoder. Each absolute value encoder
input may only be configured once. For the T400, XP2 and X01 (communications
interface) cannot be simultaneously used.
Terminal designations:
RPT
Module
T400
PM5
XP1
X5P
XP2
X5Q
Number of steps, which can be differentiated between, per revolution for coded rotary encoders.
The number n of the appropriate binary positions of the data transfer format are obtained. For
binary- or gray coding, RPT = 2
2
(with n>2). For length measuring systems, RPT is obtained from the number n of the
n
Number of revolutions, which can be differentiated between, of a multi-turn encoder. The number
m of the corresponding binary locations of the data transfer format can be obtained from NOT =
m
Number of non-relevant bits at the start of the position value transfer. This option is only
for SSI encoders. It allows different protocol versions to be specified, for example,
position transfer in the so-called "Christmas tree" format.
(initialization input)
(default value:
0 )
ABP
Position of the interrupt bit within data transfer protocol of an SSI encoder.
ABP = 0 if there is no alarm bit.
(initialization input)
(default value:
0)
Example:
SSI multi-turn
absolute value
encoder with alarm
bit A and parity bit
P
m = 11;
NOT
2048;
RPT
256;
ABP
25;
PZB
3;
n = 8;
The function block calculates the required protocol from the above data:
25 bits (for SSI, the hardware only permits two versions: 13 or 25 clock
cycles, + parity).
3-8
Input/output blocks
Clock cycle
1
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
0 M10... M1 M0
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0 0 0
PZB
n
ABP
Legend:
Mi : Binary position i of the revolution coding (multi-turn)
Si: Binary position i of the angular coding
A: Interrupt
P: Parity bit
m: No. of binary positions for the revolutions
n: No. of binary positions for the angular position
MDF
MDT:
MDC:
Clock frequency
Period
100 kHz
10 s
500 kHz
2 s
1 MHz
1 s
2 MHz
0.5 s
Encoder type
Coding
Binary code
Gray code
SSI
3-9
Input/output blocks
ENP:
RE:
Coding
Permissible for
No parity monitoring
SSI, EnDat
Parity monitoring
(even parity)
SSI
Resets the block and deletes error messages (QF, YF) and alarms
(YW), and individual error word bits (refer to YFC).
When EnDat encoders are used, these alarms and interrupt bits are
reset.
For SSI encoders, a reset is required after connecting or powering-up
the encoder.
(default value: 0)
RE
Significance
No change
No change
Takes into account a gearbox ratio between the coded rotary encoder
and the drive system. The position values and the speed are
converted to the actual drive system. For length-measuring systems,
NFG is not taken into account. The following is valid: (position drive) =
NFG position (encoder)
(default value: 1.0)
NFP:
Normalization factor for the position outputs YP, YRC, YSP and
normalization basis for the offset input OFF. NFP is the position value
for a drive revolution.
Principle:
YSP =
measured value
NFG NFP - OFF
RPT
Example:
The position of a multi-turn encoder is to be shifted through 90 using
an offset.
The encoder is rotated out of the zero position (YP = 0) by 1.5
revolutions.
Required
normalization
NFP
OFF
Default
0.25
Degrees
360
90
Radian
measure
3-10
Inputs
2 3,14 3.14/2
Input/output blocks
Millimeter
0.0001
0.1
Velocity units
(for NFY = 1)
m/min
mm/min
NFY:
OFF:
LU:
YOP:
Initial encoder position in steps. As the most significant bit should always
be zero (position position), the position may be coded with a maximum of
31 bits. Steps are output at YOP if the encoder overflow above the range
limits.
(default value: 0)
YP:
Actual angular position of the absolute value encoder. For coded rotary
encoders, the value lies in the range 0 <= YP < NFP (refer to connection
NFP). The validity of the position values is indicated using QF=0.
The following is valid for length-measuring system: YP = encoder position
* NFP - OFF (without range correction) or -NFP*RPT/2 < YP <
NFP*RPT/2 (with range correction).
(default value: 0.0)
3-11
Input/output blocks
YRC:
23
31
Sum of YP and YRC. When the rotational speed increases, the angular
position
resolution drops and is, for precise positioning, less suitable than YP.
The validity of the summed position is indicated by QF=0.
(default value: 0.0)
Y:
Provides the speed calculated from the position changes of the coded
rotary encoder or, for coded length measuring systems, the velocity. The
speed actual value is obtained as follows Y = speed [RPM] NFY.
The velocity is referred to the reference units, specified by NFP
(also refer to the example for NFP, NFY):
Y= Velocity [reference units/min] NFY.
The validity of the speed is indicated by QF=0.
(default value: 0.0)
QF:
Erroneous configuring
Detailed information on the fault/error cause can be taken from the error
vectors, YFC, YF.
(default value: 0)
QRC:
QNP:
Receive new position. QNP=1 indicates that a valid position value was
received in the last sampling interval.
(default value: 0)
Caution: For SSI encoders, there is no differentiation between:
valid invalid positions
existing non-existent encoders
(Vorbesetzung: 0)
3-12
Input/output blocks
YF:
Error status word of an EnDat encoder. The significance of the error bits
can be taken from the manufacturers data sheets.
For SSI encoders, which do not send an interrupt bit, YF is set to 0. If an
SSI encoder
sends a set alarm bit, YF is set to FFFFh.
(default value: 0)
YW:
updated every 2
(default value: 0)
YFC:
Error bits of the AENC function block (with the exception of the hardware
fault of encoder YF).
Syntax error for the inputs of the function block (configuring error)
Operating error
(Default value: 0)
YFC bit
Delete
Significance
>11
Not specified
11
Init
10
RE
RE
RE
RE
RE
autom.
autom.
autom.
RE
Not specified
3-13
Input/output blocks
RE
3-14
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
50,0
16,5
8,3
--
Can be configured in
Alarm tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
System mode
Normal mode
Special features
Input/output blocks
3.3
Symbol
BII8
hardware address GV
direct mode BO
Brief description
AD
DM
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
binary quantity 1
binary quantity 2
binary quantity 3
binary quantity 4
binary quantity 5
binary quantity 6
binary quantity 7
binary quantity 8
Mode of operation
Block diagram
Q1
AD
.
.
Q8
DM
The hardware address of the binary inputs, which are to be read-in, is
addressed at AD.
Initialization
The function block also reads-in the eight binary values during
initialization. Thus, possibly configured initialization values are
overwritten at the outputs.
3-15
Input/output blocks
I/O
AD
Hardware address
(no default)
DM
(default: 0)
Q1
Binary quantity 1
...
...
Q8
Binary quantity 8
Configuringdata
3-16
(default: 0)
(default: 0)
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
13,4
4,4
2,2
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
System mode
Normal mode
Special features
Input/output blocks
3.4
Symbol
BIQ8
hardware address
direct mode
binary quantity 1
binary quantity 2
binary quantity 3
binary quantity 4
binary quantity 5
binary quantity 6
binary quantity 7
binary quantity 8
Brief description
GV
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
AD
DM
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
Mode of operation
Block diagram
I1
.
.
AD
I8
DM
3-17
Input/output blocks
I/O
DM
I1
Binary quantity 1
...
...
I8
Binary quantity 8
AD
Hardware address
Configuringdata
3-18
(default: 0)
(default: 0)
(default: 0)
(no default)
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
12,7
4,2
2,1
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
System mode
Normal mode
Special features
Input/output blocks
3.5
Symbol
DAC
direct mode
input quantity
offset
scalling factor
Brief description
BO
R
R
R
DM
X
OFF
SF
AD
QU
QL
GV hardware address
BO limit indicator positive
BO limit indicator negative
Mode of operation
X + OFF
5V
SF
for QU and QL
X + OFF
SF
Output voltage
QU
QL
>= 2.0
+10.0 V
<= -2.0
-10.0 V
2.0 <
X + OFF
< 2.0
SF
3-19
Input/output blocks
Block diagram
AD
OFF
200%)
QL
QU
SF
The resolution depends on the selected module. The following is valid for
the T400 module:
The D/A converter has a resolution of 1/4096 (12 bits). Referred to the
range from 20 V or 400%, this corresponds to a resolution of 4.88 mV or
0.098 %.
Resolution
(default: 0)
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
OFF
Offset
(default: 0.0)
SF
Scaling factor
(default: 5.0)
AD
Hardware address
(default: 0)
QU
(default: 0)
QL
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
3-20
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
12,8
4,2
2,1
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
System mode
Normal mode
Special features
Input/output blocks
3.6
Symbol
NAV
number of encoder pulses
rated speed of the machine
rated pulses
mode of operation
synchronization type
reset position
set position
set position at syn
position setting value
Brief description
I
R
DI
W
W
BO
BO
BO
R
PR
RS
RP
MOD
SYM
R
S
SP
SV
AD
Y
YP
DYP
DP
SS
QP
QN
PRE
QF
QFC
YFC
GV
R
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
W
hardware address
speed actual value
postition actual value
differential actual value
pulse difference
synchronus position set
overflow position positive
overflow position negative
pulse is detected
monitoring error encoder interrupt
group error
error ID
Mode of operation
The digital speed actual value sensing with the NAV function block is
realized via hardware modules. The hardware address of the partial
connector, to which the pulse encoder is connected, must be specified at
input AD. Each hardware address may only be assigned once.
The function block calculates the speed and position actual value from
the output signals of a pulse encoder and outputs them at outputs Y and
YP.
The measuring technique integrates continuously between 2 sampling
instants. The measuring time is approximately as long as the configured
sampling time TA.
The function block cyclically reads the pulses summed on the hardware
module and calculates the speed actual value Y according to the
following equation:
3-21
Input/output blocks
Y=
RS
PR
*NF
AD
Y
YP
RP
MOD
SYM
SV
QF
QFC
SP
YFC
Nx
Nx
TRG
TRGx
V
Nact
min
fc TA
3-22
Input/output blocks
The function block also calculates the position actual value in addition to
the speed actual value. For the calculation, the number of new pulses
received are added to the position actual value in each sampling interval.
The position actual value is calculated as follows.
YP =
RP
"set position",
"reset position",
"set position for syn" or
"reset"
As you can see from the equation, YP has a value of 1 if RP pulses are
received.
For encoder type 1, the forward- and reverse pulses are quadrupled
pulses. If the position actual value is not to be calculated from the
quadruple pulses when using encoder type 1, 4 x the pulse number must
be entered at RP for which YP = 1.0.
When the number of received pulses has reached the value 2147483647
31
3-23
Input/output blocks
Truth table:
Set/reset inputs
Hardware
SP
Syn
YPn
0->1
*
Syn
As required
zero pulse or input trigger signal
MOD format:
X X
X X
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
3 2 1 0
Encoder type
Standstill limit
offset
Filter parameterization
Setting mode S
any
3-24
Input/output blocks
Standstill limit
correction
Hexadecimal:
FD...7F
Corresponding decimal
number:
-3...127
Source of the
incremental tracks
(only relevant for
XE1 on T400
Setting mode S:
Set YP to SV
Subtract SV from YP
Filter
parameterization:
Encoder type:
Synchronizing
Filterung
Encoder type 1
Encoder type 2
No filtering
No filtering
>0
001
500 ns
125 ns
010
2 s
invalid
011
8 s
invalid
100
16 s
invalid
>100
invalid
invalid
Encoder
type 1
Encoder
type 2
The function block uses a synchronizing signal for "set position for syn"
(zero pulse). For an IT41 module, a trigger signal can alternatively be
used for synchronization.
Input SYM selects which synchronizing signal is to be used (only valid for
IT41) and whether, for SP = 1, and when a synchronizing signal is
received, the position actual value is set to SV or SV is subtracted from
the position actual value (SP setting mode).
3-25
Input/output blocks
Format of SYM:
X X
X X
1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
any
3 2 1 0
Coarse pulseany
evalulation
Setting mode SP
(T400)
Synchronization
Coarse pulse
evaluation (only
T400):
>0
Setting mode SP
Set YP to SV
Subtract SV from YP
Synchronization:
The function block evaluates the alarm outputs of the pulse encoder and
flags an encoder alarm separately from the other errors, at output QF
with 1. There is no internal response to the encoder alarm. For encoder
type 2, for each call, the encoder alarm is reset after having been read.
All other faults/errors are flagged by a 1 at output QFC. The fault/error
cause is output as status word at output YFC.
3-26
Input/output blocks
Significance
Response
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 6
Bit 9
Hardware address
(default value: 0)
PR
RS
RP
Rated pulses
MOD
Mode of operation
SYM
Synchronization type
Reset position
(default value: 0)
Set position
(default value: 0)
SP
(default value: 0)
SV
Position setpoint
YP
DYP
Pulse difference,
(default value: 0)
No. of pulses during the last cycle
SS
(default value: 0)
QP
(default value: 0)
QN
PRE
Pulse is detected
QF
QFC
Group error
(default value: 0)
YFC
Error ID
(default value: 0)
3-27
Input/output blocks
Configuringdata
3-28
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
38,5
12,7
6,4
--
Canbe configured in
Alarm tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
System mode
Normal mode
Special features
Input/output blocks
3.7
Symbol
NAVS
hardware address
number of encoder pulses
rated speed of the machine
rated pulses
master/slave
mode of operation
synchronization type
reset position
set position
set position for syn.
position setting value
set position defference
position differential setting value
numerator ration
denominator ratio
Brief description
GV
I
R
DI
BO
W
W
BO
BO
BO
R
BO
R
DI
DI
AD
PR
RS
RP
MS
MOD
SYM
R
S
SP
SV
SD
SCD
NM
DN
Y
YP
YDP
YPS
SS
QP
QN
PRE
QF
QFC
YFC
R
R
R
R
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
W
Mode of operation
The digital speed actual value sensing using the NAVS function block is
realized using hardware modules. The hardware address (terminal
designation), where the pulse encoder is connected, must be specified at
input AD. Only one master may be configured at each hardware address,
but several slaves.
The measuring technique continuously integrates between two sampling
instants. The measuring duration is approximately the same as the
configured sampling TA.
3-29
Input/output blocks
RS
PR
Y
AD
YP
RP
SV
S
R
SP
Nx
TRGx
YPS
Position at the
sync. instant
Master
counting pulse
Pos. difference
YDP
SD
SVD
MS
QF
MOD
SYM
QFC
YFC
Master-slave
cascade
3-30
Input/output blocks
The function block cyclically reads the pulses summed on the hardware
module and calculates speed actual value Y according to the following
equation:
forward pulses - reverse pulses
x NF
time pulses
Y=
V
min
]=
V
min
fc x TA
Nact [
Position actual
value
The function block also calculates the position actual value in addition to
the speed actual value. For the calculation, the number of new pulses
received are added to the position actual value in each sampling interval.
The position actual value is calculated as follows.
YP=
RP
* since the even "set position"
"reset position"
"set position for syn" or
"reset"
As you can see from the equation, YP has a value of 1 if RP pulses are
received.
3-31
Input/output blocks
For encoder type 1, the forward- and reverse pulses are quadrupled
pulses. If the position actual value is not to be calculated from the
quadrupled pulses when using encoder type 1, 4 x the pulse number
must be entered at RP for which YP = 1.0.
When the number of received pulses has reached the value 2147483647
31
Hardware
SP
Syn
YPn
interval
0->1
3-32
any
Syn
Input/output blocks
Position difference
Position difference
actual value
MPZ
NM/DN
PRM
PRS
RS
Rated speed
RP
sign(RS)
3-33
Input/output blocks
MOD format:
X X
X X
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
3 2 1 0
Encoder type
Standstill limit
offset
Filter parameterization
Setting mode S
Setting Mode SD
Correction of the
standstill limit:
Hexadecimal:
FD...7F
Corresponds to the
decimal number:
-3...127
Source of the
incremental tracks
(only relevant for
XE1 on T400
Set YP to SVD
Set YP to SV
Subtract SV from YP
Setting mode S:
Filter
parameterization:
3-34
Filtering
Encoder type 1
Encoder type 2
No filtering
No filtering
>0
001
500 ns
125 ns
010
2 s
illegal
011
8 s
illegal
100
16 s
illegal
>100
illegal
illegal
Input/output blocks
Encoder type:
0
Encoder type 1
Two pulse tracks, shifted through 90, with or without zero pulse track
Maximum track frequency: 1 MHz. The pulses are quadrupled.
Encoder type 2
One pulse track for each direction of rotation, without zero pulse
track. Maximum track frequency: 2.5 MHz. Single pulses are counted.
Synchronization
The function block uses a synchronizing signal for "set position at SYN"
(zero pulse; for the IT41 module, alternatively a trigger signal can be
input via connector X7C - binary inputs 1 to 4). Input SYM is used to
select which of the synchronizing signals is used (only for IT41), and
whether for SP=1 and a received synchronizing signal, the position actual
value is set to SV or SV is subtracted from the position actual value
(setting mode SP). For the T400 technology module, coarse/fine pulse
evaluation can be set (for details, refer to the Hardware Manual, Section
"Technology module T400").
SYM format:
X X
Setting mode SP
and
Synchronization
Coarse/fine pulse
evaluation (only
T400):
X X
any
Coarse/fine pulse
evaluation
(T400)
Value
Setting mode SP
Synchronization
Set YP to SV
Set YP to SV
Subtract SV from YP
Subtract SV from YP
Value
Evaluation
3-35
Input/output blocks
When synchronizing, the function block uses a direction of rotationdependent edge evaluation, which ensures, that independent of the
direction of rotation, this same edge is used for synchronization.
Track
signals
Zero pulse
Direction of
rotation
Fault messages
The function block evaluates the alarm outputs of the pulse encoder and
flags an encoder alarm separately from the other errors, at output QF
with 1. There is no internal response to the encoder alarm. For encoder
type 2, for each call, the encoder alarm is reset after having been read.
All other faults/errors are flagged by a 1 at output QFC. The fault/error
cause is output as status word at output YFC.
Significance
Response
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Multiple-configured master:
Several masters are configured at the
same hardware address.
Bit 7
Bit 9
3-36
Input/output blocks
I/O
AD
Hardware address
PR
RS
RP
Rated pulses
MS
Master/slave
MOD
Mode of operation
SYM
Synchronization type
LIM
(default value: 0)
Reset position
(default value: 0)
Set position
(default value: 0)
SP
(default value: 0)
SV
SD
(default value: 0)
SVD
NM
Numerator ratio
(default value: 1)
DN
Denominator ratio
(default value: 1)
YP
YDP
Position difference
SS
(default value: 0)
QP
(default value: 0)
QN
(default value: 0)
PRE
Pulse is detected
(default value: 0)
QF
(default value: 0)
QFC
Group error
(default value: 0)
YFC
Error ID
Configuringdata
(default value: 0)
(default value: 1.0)
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
System mode
Normal mode
Special features
48,5
16,0
8,0
3-37
Input/output blocks
3.8
Symbol
SBI
hardware address GV
direct mode BO
Brief description
AD
DM
QB
BY output quantity
Mode of operation
Block diagram
AD
QB
#
DM
Initialization
3-38
Input/output blocks
I/O
AD
Hardware address
(no default)
DM
(default: 0)
QB
Output quantity
(default: 16#00)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
System mode
Normal mode
Special features
5,6
1,8
0,9
3-39
Input/output blocks
3.9
Symbol
SBQ
hardware address GV
direct mode BO
input quantity BY
Brief description
AD
DM
IB
Mode of operation
Function block SBQ is used together with function block W_BY. Function
block W_BY converts 1 status WORD into 2 status bytes. Function block
SBQ outputs input quantity IB (1 byte) via 8 binary outputs of a hardware
module.
Input DM is parameterized to select whether output is realized in the
normal- or system mode. For DM = 1 (direct mode), output is realized in
the normal mode, i.e. if the function block is executed in the sampling
time according to its configured sequence.
For DM = 0 (no direct mode), the normal mode saves the data to be
output. The data is then output in the next system mode. The system
mode is always calculated at the start of the sampling time.
Block diagram
IB
AD
DM
The hardware address of the binary outputs, at which the binary values
are to be output, is specified at AD.
3-40
Input/output blocks
I/O
DM
(default: 0)
IB
Input quantity
(default: 16#00)
AD
Hardware address
(no default)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
System mode
Normal mode
Special features
5,4
1,8
0,9
3-41
Communication blocks
4.1
GV
GV
GV
GV
GV
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
I
I
I
I
BO
CTS
CT1
CT2
CT3
CT4
AR1
AR2
AR3
AR4
AT
MO1
MO2
MO3
MO4
MOD
LT1
LT2
LT3
LT4
EN
QTS
YEV
BO block status
W status
Brief description
Mode of operation
4-1
Communication blocks
Intialization input to specify the configured module name, via whose data interface
data is to be transmitted.
(default : 0)
CT1-4
Name of the configured module on which the data interfaces for the
4 receive channels are located.
(default : 0)
AR1-4
AT
MO1-4
Data transfer modi for received channels (H for handshake, R for refresh, S for
select or M for multiple).
(default : R)
MOD
Initialization input to specify the access mechanism on the transmitting side: Handshake,
Refresh, Select, Multiple. Possible entries:
H = Handshake
R = Refresh
S = Select
M = Multiple
(default : R)
LT1-4
EN
4-2
Communication blocks
QTS
Block output QTS is used to indicate as to whether the block is operating error-free
(QTS = 1)
or, after entering a communications error message, became inactive (QTS = 0).
(default : 0)
YEV
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
249,3
82,3
41,2
4-3
Communication blocks
GV
GV
GV
GV
GV
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
I
I
I
I
BO
CTS
CT1
CT2
CT3
CT4
AR
AT1
AT2
AT3
AT4
MOD
MO1
MO2
MO3
MO4
LT1
LT2
LT3
LT4
EN
QTS
YEV
BO block status
W status
Brief description
The function block CDC4 receives a data block, sub-divides it into four
data blocks, and writes the 4 data blocks into channels at the configured
data interfaces.
Mode of operation
The function block CDC4 distributes the data from the receive channel in
up to 4 transmit channels.
Function blocks CTV, CRV, CCC4 and CDC4 can be configured as direct
coupling partners.
The data length of the receive channel is obtained from the sum of the
data lengths of the configured transmit channels.
At least two transmit channels must be configured so that the function
block operates correctly.
The configured data interfaces must always be specified in an increasing
sequence, i.e. legal CT1- and CT2 connection data must always be
made. Only the data entries at inputs CT3 and CT4 are optional.
The function processes 5 channels one after the other; starting off with
the receive channel, and then the 4 transmit channels.
The net data of the transmit channels consist of the net data of the
receive channels. If the transmit channels are temporarily faulted, the
block still receives.
If a transmit channel goes into an irreparable error condition, the function
block becomes inactive and enters an appropriate fault message into the
communications error field.
The individual channels can be configured in different data transfer modii.
4-4
Communication blocks
For irreparable errors, the block enters an appropriate error message into
the communications error field and no longer executes its task.
Temporary errors are displayed at the YEV output; the block is still
executed.
The computation of CDC4 is essentially dependent on the number of
bytes to copied.
I/O
CTS
Initialization input to specify the name of the configured module via whose data interface
data is to be received.
(default : 0)
CT1-4
Specifies the name of the configured module which has the data interfaces for the 4
transmit channels.
(default : 0)
AR
Initialization input for the address names for the receive channel. The name consists of a
channel name and additionally, depending on the coupling type
(e.g. DUST1 or SINEC H1), also of 1 or 2 address stages.
The necessary network data must be configured when used in rigid networks.
(default : empty string)
AT1-4
MOD
MO1-4
Data transfer modi for transmit channels (H for handshake, R for refresh, S for select
or M for multiple).
(default : R)
LT1-4
EN
QTS
Block output QTS is used to indicate whether the block is operating correctly
(QTS = 1) or after a communications error message has been entered, has become
inactive (QTS = 0).
(default : 0)
YEV
4-5
Communication blocks
Configuringdata
4-6
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
185,9
61,4
30,7
Can be configured in
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
GV
S
S
BO
R
CTS
AR
MOD
EN
TMX
CRR
QTS
QT
YEV
YTS
GV
BO
BO
W
W
Brief description
Mode of operation
4-7
Communication blocks
Receiving (i.e. the actual data transfer) can be interrupted at any time
(input EN = 0).
Data receive does not start with the first cycle in the standard mode, but
only after the data interface, on the module configured at input CTS, has
been enabled, and the existence of the appropriate coupling partner has
been determined (refer to output YEV).
The computation time of the CRV is essentially dependent on the number
of bytes to be copied (the basic computation time is approx. 50 s).
5 s for each 4 bytes can be used as basis.
The computation time specified in the technical data must be
appropriately interpreted.
Time monitoring
I/O
CTS
Initialization input to specify the configured name of the module, via whose data interface
data is to be received.
AR
MOD
EN
TMX
CRR
QTS
Block output QTS is used to display as to whether the block is operating error-free
(QTS = 1) or, after a communications error message was entered, became inactive
(QTS = 0).
(default : 0)
QT
Time overrun. The output goes to 1, if an existing communications link (connection) does
not provide new or no valid data for a time greater than TMX. QT=0 when communications
is re-established.
YEV
Status display; for an explanation, refer to the "User Manual Communications", Chapter
"Communications Utility
Process Data.
(default : 16#0000)
YTS
Detailed status display; for values at YTS, refer to: D7-SYS online help
"Help on events". (press key F1 in the CFC and call-up the topic
"Help on events" under "CFC for SIMADYN D")
(default : 0)
4-8
Communication blocks
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
71,7
23,7
11,9
4-9
Communication blocks
GV
S
S
BO
CTS
AT
MOD
EN
CRT
QTS
YEV
YTS
GV
BO
W
W
Brief description
Mode of operation
The function block only senses and transmits block output values from
function blocks of the CPU on which it is configured. A virtual connection
(consisting of virtual connection name and four-digit sequence number)
must be configured at the block output values to be transmitted.
The virtual connection name must correspond to the name at the CRT
output.
The configuring engineer defines the sequence in which the values to be
transmitted are output onto the channel using a sequence number. All
1 byte-, 2 byte-, 4 byte-, and float I/O formats can be numbered in any
sequence (e.g. BO, I, R). Strings cannot be transferred (S I/O type)!
It is not permitted to assign sequence numbers twice to a virtual
connection name (transmitting), as this would lead to an error message in
the CFC compiler. Gaps in the number, for example for reserves, are
permitted.
The transmit block checks as far as the data consistency is concerned,
the following information to ensure that it coincides on the receiving side:
total data
sequence of the different data formats
number of data per data format
If several pieces of data with the same data format are transferred, then
neither the CFC compiler nor the transmit block can determine whether
the receiver is also reading the data in the same sequence.
The configuring engineer is solely responsible in ensuring that this
coincides.
If an irreparable error is identified, the function block makes an entry into
the communications error field and becomes inactive.
Data transmission (i.e. the actual data transfer) can be interrupted at any
time (input EN = 0).
Data transmission does not start with the first cycle in the standard mode,
but only after the data interface on the module configured at input CTS
was enabled and the existence of the appropriate coupling partner has
been identified (refer to output YEV).
4-10
Communication blocks
Initialization input to specify the configured module name, via whose data interface data
transmission is to be realized.
AT
MOD
EN
CRT
QTS
Block output QTS is used to display as to whether the block is operating error-free (QTS =
1) or, after a communications error message has been entered, became inactive (QTS =
0).
(default : 0)
YEV
YTS
Detailed status display; for values at YTS, refer to: D7-SYS online help
"Help on events". (press key F1 in the CFC and call-up the topic
"Help on events" under "CFC for SIMADYN D")
(default : 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
66,9
22,1
11,1
4-11
Communication blocks
4.2
Brief description
GV
S
I
CMS
CMT
NOM
BO
I
BO
SAV
RP
MUN
QTS
BO block status
Mode of operation
Using the message system, messages which occur locally on the CPU
can be sensed and administered.
Initialization input SAV specifies as to whether the message buffer is to
be set-up in the local non-buffered RAM (SAV = 0) or in the batterybuffered RAM (SAV = 1).
If the message buffer is located in the battery-buffered RAM, the central
block re-synchronizes itself to the message buffer after the system runsup. In this case, existing messages are kept.
If the message buffer cannot be set-up at system start-up, the central
block flags this by making an entry in the communications error field.
The size of the message buffer corresponds to the data at the NOM block
input.
4-12
Communication blocks
If the message buffer was set-up once in the SAVE area, the size of the
message buffer cannot be subsequently varied in the SAVE area:
For SAV=1 after a system reset, the information at input NOM is no
longer evaluated, if SAV was equal to 1 at one of the earlier system runups.
A message consists of a text, a two-stage number (prefix and suffix), a
type and optionally a measured value.
The two stage numbering (prefix, suffix) is used to be able to sub-divide
the messages into two classes (e.g. upper- and lower class).
A differentiation is made between the following message types:
S
System error message (allocated by the system): after a system
crash, the central block enters a system error message into the
message buffer when the system runs-up again. The cause of the
crash is entered as suffix, and as prefix, the value of block input RP is
entered. This is message type S.
System message is entered as message text; the message text
cannot be changed.
C
Communications error message (allocated by the system): When an
irreparable error is identified, the communications function blocks
enter the error cause into the communications error field.
The central block cyclically evaluates this error field. The cause of the
error is entered as suffix, and as prefix, the value of block input RP is
entered.
As soon as the central block identifies that more communication
errors have occurred than can actually be accepted in the error field,
the @MSC enters a last C message. In this case, the negative
number of communication errors which were not acquired, is entered
as suffix.
These messages are all type C messages.
The configured text is entered at initialization input CMT as message
text.
F
Error message (allocated by the configuring engineer): Using this
type, messages are identified which represent significant errors for the
message system. This message type is assigned when configuring
the message entry function blocks.
W
Alarm message (warning message) (allocated by the configuring
engineer): This type of message identifies errors which are not so
critical for the message system. This message type is assigned when
configuring the message entry function blocks.
The central block @MSC initializes the message system administers and
monitors it. The number of messages, which the message buffer can
accommodate, is specified at block input NOM. If a number less than 15
is entered, a message buffer is automatically initialized for 15 entries.
4-13
Communication blocks
The message system can be inhibited for additional entries via block
input MUN (MUN = 0). This means that messages cannot be overwritten
before they have been read-out. The maximum number is limited to
32767.
I/O
CMS
Initialization input to specify the name of the message system. The name is not
checked. A maximum of 6 characters can be entered.
CMT
The text, which is to be specified when communication errors are output, is configured
at this initialization input. If an entry is not made, then only the numbe of the error
entry is output together with "C" message type.
(default : empty string)
NOM
The number of entries which can be saved in the message buffer is specified at this
initialization input. The minimum number of entries is 15 (even if the entered number
is lower; the maximum number is limited to 32767.
(default : 15)
SAV
RP
The message prefix is entered here. For communication error messages, which are
evaluated by the central block @MSC, this number is used as prefix. The suffix
represents the actual error cause.
Value range: 0 <= RP <= 32767. The entered value is limited to 0 if a negative
number is entered.
(default : 0)
MUN
Enables the message buffer for message entries (MUN = 1). For MUN = 0,
no messages can be acquired. This is practical, if messages which are not read,
are not to be overwritten by new messages (e.g. when many messages are received
at the same time).
(default : 0)
QTS
Output QTS indicates whether the block could be correctly initialized (QTS = 1),
or, after entering a communications error message, became inactive.
(default : 0)
Configuringdata
4-14
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
8,1
2,7
1,4
--
Can be configured in
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
Brief description
GV
GV
S
I
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
CMS
CTS
AT
RP
SNV
STM
STC
SSF
EN
QBO
QTS
YTS
the message output block MSI outputs the messages, entered in the
message buffer, at the data interface configured at the appropriate
CTS input.
when using this function block, the central block of the message
system should be configured (@MSC).
function block MSI can be configured a multiple number of times. The
messages which are entered can therefore be output via various data
interfaces.
Mode of operation
4-15
Communication blocks
Initialization input to specify the name of the message system. The name is not checked.
A maximum of 6 characters can be specified.
CTS
Initialization input for the configured coupling module name; Module name (and optionally
of connector X01, X02 or X03), via which messages are to be output.
AT
RP
If MSI identifies that the message buffer has an overflow condition, the MSI
generates an overflow message with the prefix specified here. If an overflow no longer
occurs for 10 seconds, an end of overflow message is output with RP+1 as prefix.
Value range: 0 <= RP <= 32767. The entered value is limited to 0 if a negative entry is
made.
(initialization input, default : 0)
SNV
STM
STC
Initialization input to define whether the message text is output with a constant
length (60 characters). If the message text is shorter than the maximum length or is
not available, then it is filled with blanks. If STC = 0, the actual length of the message
text is used for output.
(default : 0)
SSF
EN
The input EN enables message output. If message output is not enabled (EN=0), the
function block is passive (default)
(default : 0)
QBO
Indicates a message buffer overflow condition. If this is the case (QBO = 1),
the MSI function block generates and outputs an overflow message.
(default : 0)
4-16
Communication blocks
QTS
Indicates whether the function block is faulted. The function block is faulted (QTS = 0),
if either the communications channel was not correctly initialized or is faulted or if the
message system cannot be correctly initialized (e.g. no memory for the message buffer)
(default : 0)
YTS
Block output YTS indicates the block status of MSI during normal operation.
If the function block has become inactive after an entry in the communications error field,
the appropriate error number is output at block output YTS.
For values at YTS, refer to: D7-SYS online help
"Help on events". (press key F1 in the CFC and call-up the topic
"Help on events" under "CFC for SIMADYN D")
(default : 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
13,0
4,3
2,2
Can be configured in
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
4-17
Communication blocks
Brief description
GV
GV
S
CMS
CTS
AT
I
BO
RP
EN
QBO
QTS
YTS
Mode of operation
4-18
Communication blocks
I/O
CMS
Initialization input to specify the name of the message system. The name is not
checked. A maximum of 6 characters can be specified.
(default : 0)
CTS
Initialization input for the configured communications port; name of the module (and
optionally the connector X01, X02 or X03), via which messages are to be output.
(default : 0)
AT
RP
If MSIPRI identifies that the message buffer has an overflow condition, MSIPRI
generates an overflow message with the prefix specified here. If an overflow no longer
occurs for 10 seconds, an end of overflow message is output with RP+1 as prefix.
Value range: 0 <= RP <= 32767. The value entered is limited to 0 if a negative entry is
made.
(initialization input, default : 0)
EN
The input EN enables message output. If message output is not enabled (EN=0),
the function block is passive.
(default : 0)
QBO
Indicates a message buffer overflow condition. If this is the case (QBO = 1), then the
MSIPRI function block generates and outputs an overflow message.
(default : 0)
QTS
Indicates whether the function block is faulted. The function block is faulted
(QTS = 0), if either the communication channel was not correctly initialized or is
faulted or if the message system cannot be correctly intialized (e.g. no memory for
the message buffer
(default : 0)
YTS
Block output YTS indicates the block status of MSIPRI during normal operation.
If the function block has become inactive after an entry in the communications error
field, the appropriate error number is output at block YTS.
For values at YTS, refer to: D7-SYS online help
"Help on events". (press key F1 in the CFC and call-up the topic
"Help on events" under "CFC for SIMADYN D")
(default : 0)
4-19
Communication blocks
Configuringdata
4-20
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
22,4
7,4
3,7
Can be configured in
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
Brief description
Mode of operation
NOTE
GV
BO
I
I
BO
W
BO
CMS
MT
RP
RS
EN
IS1
SM
QN
QS1
QTS
BO message entered
W message received
BO block status
4-21
Communication blocks
I/O
CMS
Initialization input to specify the message system name. The name is not checked.
A maximum of 6 characters can be entered.
(default : 0)
MT
Initialization input to classify messages. Using the MT input, messages are either classified
as error (MT = 1) or alarm (MT = 0).
(default : 0)
RP
Message prefix.
Value range: 0 <= RP <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is entered.
(default : 0)
RS
Message suffix. The specified suffix is the basis value to which the bit position of
the generated message is added (example: for a message signal 0x0002, a 1 is
added to the suffix, as 1st bit is set).
Value range: 0 <= RS <= 32767. The value T is limited to 0 if a negative value is
entered.
(default : 0)
EN
Block enable. For EN = 0, the function block does not output a message.
(default : 0)
IS1
Input for a message which has been received. When a bit of IS1 changes from 0 to
1, a message is output (prerequisite: the appropriate bit of Q1 = 0 and EN = 1).
(default : 16#0000)
SM
QS1
Displays whether the appropriate bit IS1 = 0 has changed from 0 to 1. If a bit of
QS=1, then a message has been received for this particular bit.
(default : 16#0000)
QN
QTS
Block output QTS indicates whether a block was able to be correctly initialized
(QTS = 1) or, after entering a communications error message, became inactive
(QTS = 0)
(default : 0)
Configuringdata
4-22
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
7,0
2,3
1,2
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
4.2.2.2 MER1 Message block for one activated message with text
Symbol
MER1
message system name
message text
message type
prefix
suffix
message enable
message trigger
save message
Brief description
GV
S
BO
I
I
BO
BO
BO
CMS
T1
MT
RP
RS
EN
I1
SM
Q1
QTS
BO message received
BO block status
Mode of operation
NOTE
The message numbers are sub-divided into two stages using the RPand RS inputs. The prefix is configured at the RP input and the suffix at
the RS input.
The configuring engineer is responsible in allocating unique numbers for
the prefix and suffix to differentiate between the messages.
The message system does not check that unique numbers have been
allocated!
4-23
Communication blocks
I/O
CMS
T1
Initialization input for the message text of a message. The message text may be
up to 60 characters long.
(empty string: 0 )
MT
Initialization input to classify the messages. Using the MT input, messages are either
classified as error (MT = 1) or alarm (MT = 0).
(default : 0)
RP
RS
EN
Block enable. For EN = 0 the function block does not output a message.
(default : 0)
I1
Input for a message which has been received. A message is output when I1 = 0
changes to I1 = 1 (prerequisite: Q1 = 0 and EN = 1).
(default : 0)
SM
A message can be inhibited from being output again using the SM input
(for SM = 1).
(default : 0)
Q1
Displays whether I1 has changed from 0 to 1. A message has been entered for
Q1 = 1.
(default : 0)
QTS
Block output QTS indicates whether the block was able to be correctly initialized
(QTS=1) or after entering a communications error message, became inactive
(QTS = 0).
(default : 0)
Configuringdata
4-24
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
4,0
1,3
0,7
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
Symbol
message system name
1st message text
2nd message text
3rd message text
4th message text
5thmessage text
6th message text
7th message text
8th message text
9th message text
10th message text
11th message text
12th message text
13th message text
14th message text
15th message text
16th message text
message type
prefix
suffix
message enable
message trigger
save message
Brief description
GV
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
BO
I
I
BO
W
BO
CMS
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
T13
T14
T15
T16
MT
RP
RS
EN
IS1
SM
QN
QS1
QTS
BO message entered
W message received
BO block status
Mode of operation
NOTE
The message numbers are sub-divided into two stages (classified) using
the RP- and RS input. The prefix is configured at the RP input; the suffix
at the RS input.
The configuring engineer is responsible in allocating unique numbers for
prefix and suffix to differentiate between the messages.
The message system does not check that unique numbers have been
allocated!
A message is inhibited from being output with block input EN = 0.
A message is output when a bit, at block input IS1 changes from 0 to 1,
the appropriate bit is set in the checkback vector QS1, and the block
output QN is set to 1.
Block output QS1 is reset if a 0 is entered at block input SM for at least
one sampling period.
As long as the appropriate bit of the block output QS1 is set, the
message is not re-output. Thus, a message can be suppressed from
4-25
Communication blocks
Initialization input to specify the message system name. The name is not checked.
A maximum of 6 characters can be entered.
(default : 0)
T1-T16
Initialization inputs for the message texts. Message bit i is assigned to message
text Ti+1.
(default : empty string)
MT
Initialization input for classifying messages. Using the MT input, messages are
either classified as error (MT = 1) or alarm (MT = 0).
(default : 0)
RP
Message prefix.
Value range: 0 <= RP <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is
entered.
(default : 0)
RS
Message suffix. The specified suffix is the basis value to which the bit position of
the generated message is added (example: for a message signal 0x0002, a 1 is
added to the suffix, as the 1st bit is set).
Value range: 0 <= RS <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is
entered.
(default : 0)
EN
Block enable. For EN = 0, the function block does not output a message.
(default : 0)
IS1
Input for a message which has been received. When a bit of IS1 changes from 0 to 1,
a message is output (prerequisite: the appropriate bit of QS1 = 0 and EN = 1).
(default : 16#0000)
SM
QS1
QTS
Block output QTS indicates whether a block was able to be correctly initialized
(QTS = 1), or, after entering a communications error message, became inactive
(QTS = 0)
(default : 0)
4-26
Communication blocks
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
13,1
4,3
2,2
4-27
Communication blocks
Brief description
GV
S
BO
I
I
BO
BO
BO
R
CMS
T1
MT
RP
RS
EN
I1
SM
X
Q1
QTS
BO message received
BO block status
this function block outputs a message with value (REAL type) and
units into the message system, initiated by a rising edge of a binary
quantity.
when using this function block, the central block of the message
system (@MSC) and at least one message output block (MSI) must
be configured.
function blocks MER_I, MER_D and MER have identical functions.
They are only differentiated by the data type of the measured value
input X:
MER:
REAL
MER_I:
INT
MER_D:
DINT
Mode of operation
NOTE
The message numbers are sub-divided into two stages using the RPand RS input. The prefix is configured at the RP input; the suffix at the
RS input.
The configuring engineer is responsible in assigning unique numbers for
the prefix and suffix to differentiate between the messages.
The message system does not check that numbers are uniquely
assigned!
Message output is inhibited with block input EN = 0.
A message is output and block output Q1 is set to 1 after block input I1
changes from a 0 to 1.
Block output Q1 is reset if the block input SM is made 0 for at least one
sampling time.
A new message output is inhibited as long as block output Q1 is set.
Thus, multiple message output can be inhibited via block input SM = 1.
Block output Q1 is always updated independent of block input EN.
4-28
Communication blocks
Initialization input to specify the message system name. The name is not checked.
A maximum of 6 characters can be entered.
(default : 0)
T1
Initialize input for the message text. The message text may be up to 60 characters long.
(default : empty string)
MT
Initialization input to classify messages. Using the MT input, messages are either
classified as error (MT=1) or alarm (MT=0).
(default : 0)
RP
Message prefix.
Value range: 0 <= RP <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is entered.
(default : 0)
RS
Message suffix.
Value range: 0 <= RS <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is entered.
(default : 0)
EN
Block enable. For EN = 0, the function block does not output a message.
(default : 0)
I1
Input for a message which has been received. When I1 changes from 0 to 1, a message is
output (prerequisite: Q1 = 0 and EN = 1)
(default : 0)
SM
Q1
Displays whether I1 has changed from 0 to 1. A message has been entered for Q1 = 1
(default : 0)
QTS
Block output QTS indicates whether a block was able to be correctly initialized (QTS = 1),
or after entering a communications error message, became inactive(QTS = 0)
(default : 0)
4-29
Communication blocks
Configuringdata
4-30
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
8,1
2,7
7,8
2,6
9,6
3,2
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
Brief description
GV
BO
I
I
I
BO
W
BO
CMS
MT
RP
RS1
RS2
EN
I1
SM
QN
QS1
QS2
QTS
BO
W
W
BO
message entered
activated messages received
de-actevated messages received
block status
Mode of operation
NOTE
The message numbers are sub-divided into two stages (classified) using
the RP-, RS1- and RS2 inputs. The prefix is configured at input RP, the
suffix for activated messages at input RS1 and the suffix for de-activated
messages at input RS2.
The configuring engineer is responsible in allocating unique numbers for
prefix and suffix to differentiate between the messages.
The message system does not check that unique numbers have been
allocated!
A message is output with prefix RP and the suffix from input RS1 when a
bit of IS1 changes from 0 to 1; the bit position is added to the suffix.
A message is output with prefix RP and the suffix from input RS2 when a
bit of IS1 changes from 1 to 0; the bit position is added to the suffix.
Messages are inhibited from being output with block input EN = 0.
When a bit of IS1 changes from 0 to 1, the appropriate bit at output QS1
is set to 1, and in addition, output QN is set. The appropriate bit of QS2 is
set to 1 at a transition from 1 to 0.
Block outputs QS1 and QS2 are reset in the following sampling time if
SM=0. As long as SM=1, the associated message is inhibited from being
re-output.
Block outputs QS1, QS2 and QN are always updated independent of
block output EN. For EN = 1, SM = 1, i-th bit from QS1 = 0 and when the
i-th bit of IS1 changes from 0 to 1, an activated message is entered and
the i-th bit of QS1 is set to 1. The corresponding is also valid for Q2.
4-31
Communication blocks
I/O
CMS
Initialization input to specify the message system name. The name is not checked.
A maximum of 6 characters can be entered.
(default : 0)
MT
Initialization input to classify messages. Using the MT input, messages are either
classified as error (MT = 1) or alarm (MT = 0).
(default : 0)
RP
Message prefix.
Value range: 0 <= RP <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is entered
(default : 0)
RS1
Suffix for activated messages. The bit position of the message signal is added to the
suffix (example: if the message signal has value 0x0040, 6 is added to the
suffix, as the 6th bit is set.
Value range: 0 <= RS1 <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is entered.
(default : 0)
RS2
Suffix for de-activated messages. The bit position of the message signal is added to
the suffix.
Value range: 0 <= RS2 <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is entered.
(default : 0)
EN
Block enable. For EN = 0 the function block does not output a message.
(default : 0)
IS1
Input to initiate a message. At the transition of a bit from 0 to 1, a message with the
prefix RP and the suffix from input RS1 is output (prerequisite: appropriate bit
QS1 = 0 and EN = 1).
At the transition of a bit from 1 to 0, a message is output with prefix RP and the
suffix from input RS2 (prerequisite: appropriate bit QS2 = 0 and EN = 1).
(default : 16#0000)
SM
QN
QS1
Display for activated messages. If bit QS1 is set to 1, an activated message has
been entered; the appropriate bit of IS1 changed from 0 to 1.
(default : 16#0000)
QS2
QTS
Block output QTS indicates whether a block was able to be correctly initialized
(QTS = 1) or, after entering a communications error message, became inactive (QTS = 0).
(default : 0)
Configuringdata
4-32
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
18,0
5,9
3,0
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
Brief description
GV
S
S
BO
I
I
I
BO
BO
BO
CMS
T1
T2
MT
RP
RS1
RS2
EN
I1
SM
Q1
Q2
QTS
Mode of operation
NOTE
The message numbers are sub-divided into two stages (classified) using
the RP-, RS1- and RS2 inputs. The prefix is configured at the RP input,
the suffix for the activated message at the RS1 input, and the suffix for
the de-activated message at RS2 input.
The configuring engineer is responsible in allocating unique numbers for
prefix and suffix to differentiate between the messages.
The message system does not check that unique numbers have been
allocated!
A message is output with the message text from input T1 and the suffix
from input RS1 when I1 changes from 0 to 1.
A message is output with the message text from input T2 and the suffix
from input RS2 when I1 changes from 1 to 0.
Messages are inhibited from being output with block input EN = 0.
Block output Q1 is set to 1 when I1 changes from 0 to 1. Q2 is set to 1
when it changes from 1 to 0.
Block outputs Q1 and Q2 are reset in the following sampling time if
SM = 0. As long as SM = 1, a message can be inhibited from being reoutput.
Block outputs Q1 and Q2 are always updated, independent of block input
EN.
For EN = 1, SM = 1, Q1 = 0, when I1 changes from 0 to 1, an activated
message is entered and Q1 is set to 1.
The same is essentially valid for Q2.
4-33
Communication blocks
I/O
CMS
Initialization input to specify the message system name. The name is not checked.
A maximum of 6 characters can be entered.
(default : 0)
T1
Initialization input for the message text for the activated message. The message
text may be a maximum of 60 characters long.
(default : empty string)
T2
Initialization input for the message text for the de-activated message. The message
text may be a maximum of 60 characters long.
(default : empty string)
MT
Initialization input to classify messages. Using the MT input, messages are either
classified as error (MT = 1) or alarm (MT = 0).
(default : 0)
RP
Message prefix.
Value range: 0 <= RP <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is entered.
(default : 0)
RS1
RS2
EN
Block enable. For EN = 0, the function block does not output any message.
(default : 0)
I1
Block input to initiate a message. At the transition from 0 to 1, a message is output with
the message text from T1 and the suffix from input RS1 (Prerequisite: Q1 = 0 and EN =
1).
At the transition from 1 to 0, a message text is output with the message text from
input T2 and the suffix from input RS2 (prerequisite: Q2 = 0 and EN = 1).
(default : 0)
SM
Q1
Q2
QTS
Block output QTS indicates whether a block was able to be correctly initialized (QTS = 1),
or after entering a communications error message, became inactive (QTS = 0).
(default : 0)
Configuringdata
4-34
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
10,1
3,3
1,7
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
4.4.2.3 MERF16 Message block for 16 activated and de-activated messages with text
Symbol
MERF 16
message system
message text, 1st activated message
message text, 1st de-activated message
message text, 2nd activated message
message text, 2nd de-activated message
message text, 3rd activated message
message text, 3rd de-activated message
message text, 4th activated message
message text, 4th de-activated message
message text, 5th activated message
message text, 5th de-activated message
message text, 6th activated message
message text, 6th de-activated message
message text, 7th activated message
message text, 7th de-activated message
message text, 8th activated message
message text, 7th de-activated message
message text, 9th activated message
message text, 9th de-activated message
message text, 10th activated message
message text, 10th de-activated message
message text, 11th activated message
message text, 11th de-activated message
message text, 12th activated message
message text, 12th de-activated message
message text, 13th activated message
message text, 13th de-activated message
message text, 14th activated message
message text, 14th de-activated message
message text, 15th activated message
message text, 15th de-activated message
message text, 16th activated message
message text, 16th de-activated message
message type
prefix
suffix, activated message
suffix, de-activated message
message enable
message trigger
save message
GV
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
BO
I
I
I
BO
W
BO
CMS
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
T13
T14
T15
T16
T17
T18
T19
T20
T21
T22
T23
T24
T25
T26
T27
T28
T29
T30
T31
T32
MT
RP
RS1
RS2
EN
IS1
SM
QN
QS1
QS2
QTS
BO
W
W
BO
message entered
activated message received
de-activated message received
block status
4-35
Communication blocks
Brief description
Mode of operation
NOTE
The message numbers are sub-divided into two stages (classified) using
the RP-, RS1- and RS2 inputs. The prefix is configured at the RP input,
the suffix for the activated messages at the RS1 input and the suffix for
the de-activated messages at the RS2 input.
The configuring engineer is responsible in allocating unique numbers for
the prefix and suffix to differentiate between the messages.
The message system does not check that unique numbers have been
allocated!
A message with prefix RP, and the suffix from input RS1 is output when
the i-th bit of IS1 changes from 0 to 1; the bit position is added to the
suffix. T: 2(i+1)-1 is entered in the message as message text.
A message with the prefix RP and the suffix from input RS2 is output
when the i-th bit IS1 changes from 1 to 0; the bit position is added to the
suffix. T: 2(i+1) is entered in the message as message text.
Messages are inhibited from being output with block input EN=0.
When bit IS1 changes from 0 to 1, the appropriate bit at output QS1 is set
to 1, and output QN is set. At the transition from 1 to 0, the appropriate bit
of QS2 is set to 1.
Block outputs QS1 and QS2 are reset in the following sampling times, if
SM = 0. As long as SM = 1, the associated message is inhibited from
being re-output.
Block outputs QS1, QS2 and QN are always updated independent of
block input EN.
For EN = 1, SM = 1, the i-th bit QS1 = 0, when the i-th bit of IS1 changes
from 0 to 1, an activated message is entered and the i-th bit QS1 is set to
1.
The corresponding is also valid for Q2.
4-36
Communication blocks
I/O
CMS
Initialization input to specify the message system name. The name is not checked.
A maximum of 6 characters can be entered.
(default : 0)
T1-T32
Initialization inputs for the message texts. The texts with uneven numbers are used
for activated messages; texts with even numbers are used for de-activated messages
(default : empty string)
MT
Initialization input to classify messages. Using the MT input, messages are either
classified as error (MT = 1) or alarm (MT = 0).
(default : 0)
RP
Message prefix.
Value range: 0 <= RP <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is entered.
(default : 0)
RS1
Suffix for activated messages. The bit position of the message signal is added to the
suffix (example: if message signal is 0x0040, the value 6 is added to the suffix, as
the 6th bit is set).
Value range: 0 <= RS1 <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is entered.
(default : 0)
RS2
Suffix for de-activated messages. The bit position of the message signal is added to
the suffix.
Value range: 0 <= RS2 <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is entered.
(default : 0)
EN
Block enable. For EN=0, the function block does not output a message.
(default : 0)
IS1
SM
QN
QS1
Display for activated messages. If bit QS1 is set to 1, an activated message has
been entered; the appropriate bit of IS1 changed from 0 to 1
(default : 16#0000)
QS2
QTS
Block output QTS indicates whether a block was able to be correctly initialized (QTS = 1),
or, after entering a communications error message, became inactive (QTS = 0).
(default : 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
17,2
5,7
2,9
4-37
Communication blocks
4.2.5 Message block for activates and de-activated messages with value
4.5.2.1 MERF, MERF_I, MERF_D Message block for an activated and a de-activated
message with measured value
Symbol
MERF
message system name
message text, activated message
message text, de-activated
message type
prefix
suffix, activated message
suffix, de-activated message
message enable
message trigger
save message
measured value
Brief description
GV
S
S
BO
I
I
I
BO
BO
BO
R
CMS
T1
T2
MT
RP
RS1
RS2
EN
I1
SM
X
Q1
Q2
QTS
this function block enters two messages in the message system, each
with a value (Real type); these are initiated by a rising or falling edge
of a binary quantity.
when using this function block, the central block of the message
system (@MSC) and at least one message output block (MSI) must
be configured.
function blocks MERF, MERF_I and MERF_D are identical as far as
the functionality is concerned. They only differ by the data type of
measured value input X:
MERF:
REAL
MERF_I:
INT
MERF_D:
DINT
Mode of operation
NOTE
The message numbers are sub-divided into two stages (classified) using
the RP-, RS1- and RS2 inputs. The prefix is configured at input RP, the
suffix for the activated message at input RS1 and the suffix for the deactivated message at input RS2.
The configuring engineer is responsible in allocating unique numbers for
prefix and suffix to differentiate between the messages.
The message system does not check that unique numbers have been
allocated!
A message with the message text from input T1 and the suffix from input
RSI is output when I1 changes from 0 to 1. At the transition from I1 = 1 to
I1 = 0, a message, with the message text from input T2 and the suffix
from RS2 is output.
Messages are inhibited from the output with block input EN=0.
4-38
Communication blocks
Initialization input to specify the message system name. The name is not checked.
A maximum of 6 characters can be entered.
(default : 0)
T1
Initialization input for the message text for the activated message. The message text
may be a maximum of 60 characters.
(default : empty string)
T2
Initialization input for the message text for the de-activated message. The message
text may be a maximum of 60 characters.
(default : empty string)
MT
Initialization input to classify messages. Using the MT input, messages are either
classified as error (MT = 1) or alarm (MT = 0).
(default : 0)
RP
Message prefix.
Value range: 0 <= RP <= 32767. Value is limited to 0 if a negative value is entered.
(default : 0)
RS1
RS2
EN
Block enable. For EN = 0, the function block does not output a message.
(default : 0)
I1
Block input to initiate a message. A message is output with the message text from
input T1 and the suffix from input RS1 when I1 changes from 0 to 1 (prerequisite:
Q1 = 0 and EN = 1).
A message with the message text from input T2 and the suffix from input RS2 is
output when I1 changes from 1 to 0 (prerequisite: Q2 = 0 and EN = 1).
(default : 0)
SM
Q1
Display for an activated message. For Q1 = 1, an activated message has been entered; I1
changed from 0 to 1.
(default : 0)
4-39
Communication blocks
Q2
Display for a de-activated message. For Q2=1, a de-activated message has been entered;
I1 changed from 1 to 0.
(default : 0)
QTS
Block output QTS indicates whether a block was able to be correctly initialized (QTS=1),
or, after entering a communications error message, became inactive (QTS=0)
(default : 0)
Configuringdata
4-40
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
10,5
3,5
7,6
2,5
11,1
3,7
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
4.3
this central block is used to process the PKW interface of SIMOREGand SIMOVERT drive converters.
PROFIBUS DP or USS can be used to realize the coupling between
SIMADYN D and the drive converters.
a net data structure (PPO type) with a PKW component of 3 or 4
words must be set in the drive converter. This setting must coincide
with the information at input PHL at the PKW central block @DPH.
for PHL=0, a three-word PKW interface is processed. In this case, I/O
XWL, YWL and SPL are not processed (the data entry at XWL can
then be configured as required).
For PHL=1, a 4-word PKW interface is processed. In this case, I/O
XWS, YWS and SPS are not processed (the data entry at XWS can
then be configured as required).
a central block must be configured for each drive, where the PKW
interface is to be evaluated.
using this function block, drive converter parameters can be handled
with parameter values in the word- and double-word formats (no text,
index value 255 is not permissible).
the name configured at the PHS input may not be configured at an
additional PKW central block. Multiple assignment is checked when
the system runs-up and results in an entry in the communications
error field, if the name was already assigned.
the parameter tasks for the PKW interface to the drive converters are
formulated using these function blocks; and the responses from the
drive converters are also accepted here.
the function block can only be used in conjunction with the PKW
central block @DPH.
function block DPI can process 2- and 4 byte parameter values.
Depending on the task and response (I/O PR and PRR) either I/O XS,
YS, XL or YL are processed.
4-41
Communication blocks
4.4
Brief description
I
BO
I
I
I
R
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
TBL
SAV
TDC
CNX
CNY
X
RW
EN
R
SSE
SSS
Y
QTS
YTS
the function block records (traces) an input variable and saves its
characteristic.
the TRCC, TRCC_I and TRCC_D blocks are identical with the
exception of the data type of the trace value input and output:
TRCC:
REAL
TRCC_I:
INT
TRCC_D:
DINT
Mode of operation
4-42
Communication blocks
4-43
Communication blocks
I/O
TBL
The number of trace values which can be acquired is specified at initialization input TBL.
Value range: 0 <= TBL <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative entry is made.
(default : 0)
SAV
Initialization input SAV is used to define as to whether the trace buffer should be set-up in
the battery-buffered RAM (SAV = 1) or in the local RAM (SAV = 0).
(default : 0)
TDC
Post event counter. This defines the number of operating cycles where values are still
acquired after the trace has been aborted. Value range: 0 <= TDC <= 32767.
The value is limited to zero if a negative value is entered.
(default : 1)
CNX
Scan factor for tracing. This specifies in which operating cycle a value should be
recorded in the trace mode. For CNX = 0, a trace is not made.
Value range: 0 <= CNX <= 32767.
(default : 0)
CNY
Reduction factor for output. This specifies in which operating cycle a value should
be output in the output mode. For CNY = 0, no output is made.
Value range: 0 <= CNY <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is entered
(default : 0)
RW
For RW = 0, the system is in the trace mode; for RW = 1, it is in the output mode.
(default : 0)
EN
For EN = 0, the system is neither tracing nor is data being output; for EN = 1,
the block operates according to its other block inputs.
After the trace buffer has been completely output, it can be re-output
using EN = 0 followed by EN = 1.
(default : 0)
For R = 1 the block is in the RESET status (the trace buffer is formatted). It is neither
possible to output nor trace. Values which have already been traced can no
longer be output.
(default : 0)
SSE
SSS
Single-step trigger (only effective for SSE = 1). After it has been identified that this
signal has changed from 0 to 1 at this block input (i.e. in one operating cycle,
SSS = 0 and in the next operating cycle, SSS = 1), the block is executed according
to the other block inputs.
(default : 0)
YTS
Block output YTS indicates, during normal operation, the actual block status TRCC2
(TRCC4, TRCCF). If a communications error is identified, the communications error
number is available at output YTS.
For values at YTS, refer to: D7-SYS online help
"Help on events". (press key F1 in the CFC and call-up the topic
"Help on events" under "CFC for SIMADYN D")
(default : 0)
QTS
4-44
Communication blocks
Configuringdata
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
50,0
16,5
18,0
5,9
4-45
Communication blocks
Brief description
GV
GV
S
BO
BO
BO
BO
I
I
BO
BO
BO
I
I
TRC
CTS
AT
MOD
SAV
SSF
OUT
CHA
TBL
STA
TBR
R
CID
TDC
QTS
YTS
BO block status
I status
this central block @TCP for a single trace controls trace value
acquisition as well as trace value output.
if a @TCP is configured, then at least one allocated acquisition block
TRP, TRP_B, TRP_I, or TRP_D must be configured (the acquisition
blocks are assigned to the central block via the entry made at the
TRC input). In addition, a TRHI header block can also be configured.
as many @TCP blocks can be configured as required on a CPU, as
long as different TRC input data is used. If the same TRC input is
configured a multiple number of times, the appropriate @TCP
becomes inactive.
Mode of operation
4-46
Communication blocks
4-47
Communication blocks
CTS
The name of the configured module, on which the data interface is located and the output
channel set-up, is specified at initialization connection CTS.
AT
MOD
SAV
Initialization input SAV is used to define as to whether the trace buffer should be
set-up in the battery-buffered RAM (SAV = 1) or in the local RAM (SAV = 0).
(default : 0)
SSF
The format, in which the trace values are to be output, is specified at initialization
input SSF (0 = binary-, 1= standard format)
(default : 0)
OUT
Initialization input OUT is used to specify as to whether the values should be output
as group telegram (OUT = 1) or as single telegram (OUT = 0)
(default : 0.0)
CHA
TBL
The buffer length, which is used to save recorded trace values is specified at
initialization input TBL (interpretted as 32-bit word)
Value range: 0 <= TBL <= 32767. The value is limited to zero if a negative value is
entered.
(default : 0)
4-48
Communication blocks
STA
TBR
(default : 0)
R
The single trace is reset by setting input R to 1. Already recorded trace values are
lost and the trace buffer is re-formatted.
Resetting remains active, until R is again set to 0.
(default : 0)
CID
TDC
The number of function block calls by which the trace value sensing end should be
delayed is specified at this input (number of cycles after stop).
Value range: 0 <= TDC <= 32767. The value is limited to zero if a negative value is
entered.
(default : 0)
QTS
Block output QTS indicates as to whether the block became operational, error-free
(QTS=1), or, after entering a communications error messages, became inactive
(QTS=0).
(default : 0)
YTS
Block output YTS indicates, during normal operation, the actual block status of
@TCP.
The appropriate error number is output at YTS if the function block has become
inactive after having made an entry in the communications error field.
For values at YTS, refer to: D7-SYS online help
"Help on events". (press key F1 in the CFC and call-up the topic
"Help on events" under "CFC for SIMADYN D")
(default : 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
50,0
16,5
8,3
4-49
Communication blocks
Brief description
GV
I
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
TRC
HIA
HI0
HI1
HI2
HI3
HI4
HI5
HI6
HI7
HI8
HI9
QTS
YTS
BO block status
I status
Mode of operation
TRHI provides the @TCP the parameters available at its I/O. The number
of valid parameters is specified at input HIA. If input HIA has, for
example, the value 2, then parameters HIO and HI1 are valid. If @TCP
generates a group telegram, then the valid parameters are transferred
into the header of the group telegram.
This block is used to transfer user information into a group telegram. It
should be observed that the number of parameters themselves do not
appear in the group telegram. Thus, to interpret a group telegram, it is
necessary to know the precise number of parameters in the group
telegram.
4-50
Communication blocks
I/O
TRC
HIA
HI0-HI9
QTS
YTS
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
0,2
0,1
0,1
4-51
Communication blocks
Brief description
TRC
CID
X
QTS
YTS
BO block status
I status
Mode of operation
The TRP is controlled from the associated monitoring block @TCP. The
@TCP flags the TRP as to whether it should read-in its block input X and
copy in the trace buffer.
Trace value X is assigned a code number via block input CID, which is
relevant for the output (refer to monitoring block @TCP). This number
must be unique; it is checked as to whether the code number is
configured a multiple number of times. For multiple configuring, the TRP
becomes inactive.
I/O
TRC
CID
QTS
YTS
Block output YTS indicates, during normal operation, the actual block status of TRP.
If a communications error is identified, the communications error number is available
at output YTP and TRP becomes inactive.
For values at YTS, refer to: D7-SYS online help
"Help on events". (press key F1 in the CFC and call-up the topic
"Help on events" under "CFC for SIMADYN D")
(default : 0)
4-52
Communication blocks
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
5,0
1,7
0,9
4-53
Communication blocks
Brief description
GV
GV
S
BO
BO
I
I
I
TRC
CTS
US
MOD
SAV
CHA
TBL
NTV
QTS
YTS
BO block status
I status
central block @TCI for the system trace controls and monitors trace
value acquisition as well as trace value output.
if a @TCI monitoring block is configured, then at least one acquisition
@TRI must be configured (the acquisition blocks are assigned to the
monitoring block by the data entry at input TRC).
as many monitoring blocks @TCI as required can be configured on a
CPU, as long as they have different data entries at the TRC input.
Otherwise, the system trace will not be set-up with an already
assigned TRC data input
Mode of operation
4-54
Communication blocks
LOAD task:
The inputs to be traced are conditioned for format, address etc. and
assigned to the configured acquisition blocks @TRI. The number of
connections specified in the telegram may not exceed the maximum
possible number of connections which can be acquired (input NTV).
START task:
Trace value acquisition is initiated by the @TRI acquisition block. This
is only possible if a load task was successfully processed prior to this.
END task:
Trace value acquisition is terminated by the acquisition block @TRI (if
required, with delay).
DATA task:
The recorded trace data are requested.
RESET task:
The system trace is reset. If trace value acquisition was already
started it is immediately terminated. Trace values which have been
recorded are lost by a RESET task.
Unknown, invalid or erroneous tasks are rejected by the monitoring
module which issues a corresponding response.
All connection types with formats 1 byte, 2 bytes, 4 bytes and float can be
traced. Strings cannot be acquired. The total number of connection
values which can be acquired in parallel is specified at block input NTV.
To output trace values, the response channel size can be freely selected
(block input CHA).
If not all of the acquired trace values fit at once into a response, then the
output can be sub-divided into blocks.
Each block flags how many blocks are missing until the output has been
completed.
Each block must be explicitly requested with a DATA task; the blocks are
not automatically output.
4-55
Communication blocks
I/O
TRC
The system trace ID is specified, which is associated with the acquisition block, at
initialization input TRC.
CTS
The configured name of the module, on which the data interface is set-up, and where
the task- and response channel are located, is specified at initialization input CTS.
US
The address for the task- and response channel is specified at initialization input US.
The data entry consists of a channel name, and, depending on the
coupling type (e.g. DUST1 or SINEC H1), also of 1 or 2 address stages.
(default : empty string)
MOD
SAV
Initialization input SAV is used to define whether the administration structures of the
@TCI are to be set-up in the buffered RAM (SAV = 1) or in the non-buffered RAM
(SAV = 0)
(default : 0)
CHA
The size of the response channel is selected at initialization input CHA. The size is
specified in bytes and may not exceed 200.
(default : 200)
TBL
The length of the buffer, which is used to save the recorded trace values, is specified
at initialization input TBL (interpretted as 32-bit words).
Value range: 0 <= TBL <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is
entered.
(default : 0)
NTV
Initialization input to specify the total number of connections (inputs) which can be
recorded for the values
Value range: 0 <= NTV <= 32767. The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is
entered.
(default : 0)
QTS
Block output QTS indicates as to whether the block is operational (QTS = 1) or, after
entering a communications error message, has become inactive
(QTS = 0).
(default : 0)
YTS
Block output YTS indicates, during normal operation, the actual status of the @TCI block.
If the function block became inactive after an entry into the communications error field,
then the appropriate error number is output at YTS.
For values at YTS, refer to: D7-SYS online help
"Help on events". (press key F1 in the CFC and call-up the topic
"Help on events" under "CFC for SIMADYN D")
(default : 0)
Configuringdata
4-56
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
50,0
16,5
8,3
--
Can be configured in
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
Brief description
Mode of operation
TRC
QTS
YTS
BO block status
I status
I/O
TRC
The system trace ID, with which the acquisition block is associated, is specified at
initialization input TRC.
QTS
YTS
Block output YTS indicates, during the operation, the actual block status of @TRI.
If a communications error is identified, the communications error number is output at
YTS and the function block becomes inactive.
For values at YTS, refer to: D7-SYS online help
"Help on events". (press key F1 in the CFC and call-up the topic
"Help on events" under "CFC for D7-SYS")
(default : 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
16,0
5,3
2,7
4-57
Communication blocks
4.5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
year
month
day
hour
minutes
seconds
milliseconds
Brief description
This function block outputs the system time as date (year, month, day)
and time of day (hours, minutes, seconds, milliseconds).
Mode of operation
The function block reads the actual time from the system, converts it and
outputs it as date (YYR, YMO, YDA) and time of day (YHR, YMI, YSE,
YMS).
I/O
YYR, YMO,
YDA
YHR, YMI,
YSE, YMS
The actual time of day is output as hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds
(default : 0)
Configuringdata
4-58
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
7,0
2,3
1,2
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
Brief description
Mode of operation
I/O
CSH and
CSL
CSM
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
5,0
1,7
0,9
4-59
Communication blocks
4.6
Brief description
BO
GV
S
I
I
EN
CTS
US
NOS
TLF
ENO
BO enable output
S7OS
QTS
BO block status
YTS
I status display
Mode of operation
4-60
Communication blocks
I/O
EN
Enables block processing. For EN=1, the block is processed, for EN=0, block processing is
inhibited.
(default value: 1)
CTS
Initialization input for configured coupling module names. Designates the module (and
optionally, connectors X01, X02 or X03), to which the OP is connected.
(default value: -)
US
Initialization input for addressed data. The information consists of a channel name,
comprising 6 characters and depending on the coupling type also 1 or 2 address stages.
(default value: empty string)
NOS
Initialization input for the number of display devices, which access the CPU.
(default value: 1)
TLF
Telegram format; the net data size (PDU length) of a telegram can be defined here:
TLF = 0 the longest possible PDU is automatically set
TLF = 1 PDU length = 112 bytes
TLF = 2 PDU length= 240 bytes
TLF = 3 PDU length= 480 bytes
TLF = 4 PDU length= 960 bytes
(Default: 0)
ENO
Output which displays the enable status. For ENO=1, the block was processed error-free in
the last cycle. For ENO=0, block processing is inhibited, or the function block has identified
an error condition.
(default value: 0)
QTS
Output to display the correct block initialization (QTS=1). For QTS=0, the block became
inactive after a communications error message was entered.
(default value: 0)
YTS
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
40,0
13,2
6,6
4-61
Communication blocks
S7IA
enable
user data area
synchr. time interval
OP clock setting
use summer time
time correction value in minutes
Brief description
BO
GV
I
BO
BO
I
S7IA
EN
XDB
XMI
SET
UST
TCV
ENO
QTS
YTS
YDB
QLB
QOM
BO
BO
I
I
BO
BO
enable output
block status
status display
DB No.
life bit
OP operating mode
The S7IA function block is used to set the SIMATIC OP clock from
SIMADYN D.
The function block includes a user data area with 16 words for the
interface area.
It is only practical to have a maximum of one S7IA for each connected
OP, as only one interface area can be defined for each CPU in
ProTool/Lite.
Mode of operation
The function block emulates a SIMATIC data block (DB) as user data
area for 16 word (16 bit) control tasks. This user data area is required to
synchronize the clock time.
The data block receives the number, which was specified at input XDB
when generating a "connection, global operand" (margin connection) in
addition to a symbol name. Addressing when configuring the OP can be
realized using these symbol names (with ProTool/Lite).
Cyclic FB processing can be enabled using input EN.
When the connected OP restarts, the OP clock is automatically
synchronized with the current SIMADYN D system time. When the OP
restarts, this is identified via the interface area.
The OP clock can be automatically synchronized with the SIMADYN D
system time at periodic intervals, via input XMI.
The OP clock is synchronized with the CPU system time with a positive
edge at input SET.
Inputs UST and TCV can be used to add a correction value in minutes to
the time transferred at OP (e.g. summer/winter time correction).
4-62
Communication blocks
I/O
EN
Enables cyclic block processing. For EN=1, the block is processed. For EN=0, block
processing is inhibited.
(default value: 1)
XDB
Initialization input to specify the symbol name and number of the "virtual" SIMATIC DBs
for the user data area to the set-up for control tasks (interface area).
(default value: -)
XMI
Input to define the time intervals in which the OP clock is resynchronized with the actual
SIMADYN D system time, i.e. time synchroniziation. The time interval is specified in
minutes. One minute is the smallest time interval for synchronization.
Cyclic time synchronization is deactivated when a "0" is entered at this input (or less
than "0") ; this does not influence the time synchronization which occurs once when the
OP runs-up.
The OP clock is set for XMI0.
(default value: 60)
SET
This input is used to immediately set the OP clock using a positive edge.
In order not to overload the OP, there should be a minimum of 5 seconds between two
setting operations.
(default value: 0)
UST
For UST=1, the correction value, which is specified at connection TCV, is added to the
system time and sent to the connected OP.
(default: 0)
TCV
Enters the time correction value in minutes. This time correction value is added to the
system time depending on connection UST and sent to the connected OP.
(default: 0)
ENO
Output to display the enable status. For ENO=1, the block was processed, error-free in
the last cycle. For ENO=0, block processing is inhibited, or the function block has
identified an error condition.
(default value: 0)
QTS
This output displays that the block has been correctly initialized (QTS=1). For QTS=0,
the block became inactive after a communications error signal.
(default value: 0)
YTS
This output displays the error number when an error or fault condition occurs or for
status display.
For values at YTS, refer to: D7-SYS online help
"Help on events". (press key F1 in the CFC and call-up the topic
"Help on events" under "CFC for SIMADYN D")
(default value: 0)
YDB
QLB
This output provides the life bit from the interface area. The OP inverts the life bit every
second. Thus, it can be immediately identified in the SIMADYN D software whether
there is still a connection to the OP (provided EN = 1).
(default value: 0)
QOM
This output provides the "OP mode" bit from the interface area. OP sets the bit to "1", if
the operator places the OP into the "offline" mode.
(default value: 1)
4-63
Communication blocks
Configuringdata
4-64
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
6,1
2,0
1,0
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
Brief description
BO
GV
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
EN
XDB
E0
E2
E4
E6
E8
E10
E12
E14
S7EMA
ENO
QTS
YTS
BO enable output
BO block status
I status display
This function block is used to prepare and condition event messages for
a SIMATIC OP.
The function block includes a user data area with 8 words.
By connecting a type B_W function block in front of it, binary messages
can be entered into the appropriate event message word.
Mode of operation
This function block emulates a SIMATIC data block (DB) as user data
area for event messages. It is 8 words long (16 bit).
The data block receives the number, which was specified, in addition to a
symbol name at input XDB when generating a "connection, global
operand" (margin connection). Addressing when configuring the OP (with
ProTool/Lite) can be realized using these symbol names.
Cyclic function block processing can be enabled using input EN. If
processing is not enabled, the user data area is not updated with the
value of the event message words (inputs).
As many function blocks of this type can be configured as required,
however SIMATIC OPs only support a limited number of operating
messages. For an OP7, the total operating message area can be a
maximum of 32 words, distributed over a total of 4 user data areas.
The computation time required in cyclic operation is minimum, as the
input quantities are only copied-over into the associated user data area
when actually required (i.e. when an OP read accesses the user data
area).
4-65
Communication blocks
I/O
EN
Enables cyclic block processing. For EN=1, the block is processed. For EN=0, block
processing is inhibited.
(default value: 1)
XDB
Initialization input to specify symbol names and number of the "virtual" SIMATIC DBs for
the user data area to be set-up for operating messages.
(default value: -)
Ex (with x = Input for the operating message word x. These operating message words directly supply
0, 2, 4.., 14) the associated user data area with values.
The following assignment is valid (from the perspective of ProTool/Lite):
input E0 -> DBW 0
input E2 -> DBW 2
input E4 -> DBW 4
...
input E14 -> DBW 14
(default value: 0)
ENO
This output displays the enable status. For ENO=1, the block was processed, error-free in
the last cycle. For ENO=0, block processing was inhibited, or the function block has
identified an error/fault condition.
(default value: 0)
QTS
This output displays the correct block initialization (QTS=1). For QTS=0, the block became
inactive after a communications error message.
(default value: 0)
YTS
This output displays the error number when an error/fault condition occurs.
For values at YTS, refer to: D7-SYS online help
"Help on events". (press key F1 in the CFC and call-up the topic
"Help on events" under "CFC for SIMADYN D")
(default value: 0)
Configuringdata
4-66
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
0,8
0,3
0,2
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
Brief description
BO
GV
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
EN
XDB
A0
A2
A4
A6
A8
A10
A12
A14
S16
S18
S20
S22
S24
S26
S28
S30
S7AMA
ENO
QTS
YTS
Y32
Y34
Y36
Y38
Y40
Y42
Y44
Y46
BO
BO
I
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
enable status
block status
status display
OP acknow.word 1 (DBW 32)
OP acknow.word 2 (DBW 34)
OP acknow.word 3 (DBW 36)
OP acknow.word 4 (DBW 38)
OP acknow.word 5 (DBW 40)
OP acknow.word 6 (DBW 42)
OP acknow.word 7 (DBW 44)
OP acknow.word 8 (DBW 46)
Initial address
Length
Alarm messages
DBW 0
8 words
Acknowledge PLC
DBW 16
8 words
Acknowledge OP
DBW 32
8 words
4-67
Communication blocks
Mode of operation
The S7AMA emulates a SIMATIC data block as user data area for
fault/error messages, PLC fault acknowledgments and OP fault
acknowledgments. The length is 3*8 = 24 words (16 bit).
The DB receives the number, which was specified, in addition to a
symbol name, at input XDB when generating a "connection, global
operand" (margin connection). Addressing when configuring the OP (with
ProTool/Lite) can be realized using these symbol names.
Cyclic function block processing can be enabled using input EN.
The user data area for fault/error messages is updated cyclically with the
fault/error message word values (inputs).
A fault is signaled by a set bit in one of the fault message words. If a new
fault occurs, i.e. when a bit changes from "0" to "1", the associated
acknowledge bit in the user data area "acknowledge OP" is reset. When
a fault is removed, i.e. when a bit changes from "1" to "0", the associated
acknowledge bit is reset in the user data area "acknowledge PLC".
This behavior is clearly shown in the following diagram:
4-68
Communication blocks
I/O
EN
Enables the block processing. For EN=1, the block is processed. For EN=0, block
processing is inhibited.
(default value: 1)
XDB
Initialization input to specify symbol names and number of the "virtual" SIMATIC-DBs for
the user data area to be set-up for operating messages.
(default value: -)
Ax
(with x = 0,
2, 4.., 14)
Input for fault message word x. These fault message words supply the associated user
data area directly with the values.
The following assignment is valid (from the perspective of ProTool/Lite):
connection Ax -> DBW x
(default value: 0)
Input for the PLC acknowledge word x. The associated fault message is acknowledged by
Sx
(with x = 16, the CPU (i.e. from the software) with the positive edge of a bit.
18,.., 30)
The following assignment is valid (from the perspective of ProTool/Lite):
connection Sx -> DBW x
(default value: 0)
ENO
Output to display the enable status. For ENO=1, the block was processed, error-free in the
last cycle. For ENO=0, block processing is inhibited, or the function block has identified an
error.
(default value: 0)
QTS
Output to display the correct block initialization (QTS=1). For QTS=0, the block became
inactive after a communications error message.
(default value: 0)
YTS
Output for OP acknowledge word x. A set bit signifies that the OP has acknowledged the
Yx
(with x = 32, associated fault message.
34,.., 46)
The following assignment is valid (from the perspective of ProTool/Lite):
connection Yx -> DBW x
(default value: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
11,0
3,6
1,8
4-69
Communication blocks
F S7FKA
EN
XDB
CLR
ENO
QTS
YTS
BO
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
KCB
BO
BO
I
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
enable output
block status
status display
key bit 0
key bit 1
key bit 2
key bit 3
key bit 4
key bit 5
key bit 6
key bit 7
key bit 8
key bit 9
key bit 10
key bit 11
key bit 12
key bit 13
key bit 14
keyboard communication bit
Brief description
Mode of operation
This function block emulates a SIMATIC data block (DB) as user data
area for the "function keyboard image". A user data area is one word long
(16 bits).
The data block receives the number, which, in addition to a symbol
name, was specified at input XDB when generating a "connection, global
operand" (margin connection). Addressing when configuring the OP (with
ProTool/Lite) can be realized using these symbol names
Cyclic function block processing can be enabled using input EN.
The keyboard communication bit (output KCB) can be reset via input
CLR.
As many function blocks of this type can be configured as required,
however SIMATIC OPs only support a limited size of a function keyboard
image. For an OP7, the function keyboard image can be, in total, a
maximum of 4 words, distributed over a maximum of 4 user data areas.
4-70
Communication blocks
I/O
EN
Enables cyclic block processing. For EN=1, the block is processed, for EN=0, block
processing is inhibited.
(default value: 1)
XDB
Initialization input to specify symbol names and number of the "virtual" SIMATIC DBs for
the "function keyboard image" user data area to be set-up.
(default value: -)
CLR
Input to reset output KCB (keyboard communication bit). The output is set to "0" with a
positive edge at this input.
(default value: 0)
ENO
Output to display the enable status. For ENO=1, the block was processed, error-free in the
last cycle. For ENO=0, block processing is inhibited, or the function block has identified an
error condition.
(default value: 0)
QTS
Output to display the correct initialization of the block (QTS=1). For QTS=0, the block
became inactive after a communications error message was entered.
(default value: 0)
YTS
This output displays the error number when an error/fault condition occurs.
For values at YTS, refer to: D7-SYS online help
"Help on events". (press key F1 in the CFC and call-up the topic
"Help on events" under "CFC for SIMADYN D")
(default value: 0)
Bx
(with x =
0...14)
Output for the appropriate keyboard bit. The assignment of the keyboard bit to the function
key is realized when the OP is configured using ProTool/Lite.
(default value: 0)
KCB
Output, keyboard communication bit. This bit is set each time the keyboard image is
transferred from the OP to the CPU.
(default value: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
7,5
2,5
1,3
4-71
Communication blocks
4.7
PROFIBUS DP coupling
Brief description
GV
I
I
I
CTS
ST1
ST2
SEL
OK
D01
D02
D03
D04
D05
D06
D07
D08
QTS
YTS
BO
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
BO
I
Mode of operation
4-72
Communication blocks
A detailed description of the I/O SEL and D01 to D08 is provided in the
Configuring Instructions Communications, Chapter "PROFIBUS DP
coupling".
I/O
CTS
CS7 module name and slot in which the SS52 module is inserted.
(initialization input)
ST1, ST2
PROFIBUS address range for slave stations for which diagnostics data is to be output.
If the address range is restricted, this saves valuable memory resources.
The following must be valid:
3 <= ST1 <= ST2 <= 123
(initialization input)
(default : 3, 123)
SEL
OK
D01...D08
QTS
YTS
Outputs errors, which involve the block itself or the current diagnostics channel.
YTS = 0 : no error.
YTS = 1 : illegal data entry at connection SEL.
For values at YTS, refer to: D7-SYS online help
"Help on events". (press key F1 in the CFC and call-up the topic
"Help on events" under "CFC for SIMADYN D")
(default : 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
30,5
10,1
5,1
4-73
Communication blocks
Brief description
GV
I
BO
BO
I
BO
CTS
SEL
SYN
FRE
CNX
EN
SOK
QTS
YTS
BO SYNC/FREEZE completed
BO block status
I status
Mode of operation
The command is initiated by the basic clock cycle or in the system mode
of the function block. If the block is configured in sampling time T1, and
T1=T0 is selected, then the command is initiated with the basic clock
cycle; in all other cases, the command is initiated in the block system
mode.
Output SOK is used to support the consistency check:
If only SYNC commands (FRE = 0) are configured, then output SOK is
only set to "0" in the sampling time after the SYNC command has been
initiated. SYNPRO must be configured before the transmit blocks to be
inhibited.
If FREEZE commands are also configured, (FRE = 1 and CNX > 1),
output SOK is already set to "0" one sampling time before the command
is initiated. SYNPRO must be configured after all of the receive- and
transmit blocks to be inhibited.
4-74
Communication blocks
I/O
CTS
Module name and slot in which the SS52 module is inserted or connector X3 of the
FM458-1 DP.
(initialization input)
SEL
Selects the slave group to which the SYNC/FREEZE command is transmitted. Slave
groups are configured using COM PROFIBUS (CS7 with SS52, CP50M0) and HWKonfig
(FM458-1 DP). Only one group may be specified.
(initialization input)
(default : 1)
SYN
Specifies whether SYNC commands are transmitted to the slaves. SYNC commands are
transmitted for SYN=1.
(initialization input)
(default : 0)
FRE
CNX
EN
For EN=0, the configured SYNC/FREEZE commands are transmitted to the slaves.
For EN=0, the SYNC/FREEZE functionality is disabled; data transfer is then
unsynchronized.
(default : 0)
SOK
QTS
YTS
4-75
Communication blocks
Configuringdata
4-76
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
10,0
3,3
1,7
Can be configured in
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
System mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
4.8
4-77
Communication blocks
4.9
Pointer-based communications
PT1
OF1
PT2
OF2
LEN
EN
QF
YF
BO Error-Status Block
W StatusInfo Block
Brief description
Mode of operation
The block copies bytes from a source buffer into a target buffer.
To do this, it uses the pointer interface from the source and target buffer.
Using offset data, the memory area, which is to be copied, can be
selected within the larger buffer.
Associated blocks
I/O
Default:
PT1
PtrSourceBuffer
Pointer to the source telegram/data buffer from which data is to be copied.
16#00000000
OffsSourceBuffer
Offset to address the start of the buffer area, which is to be copied.
PtrDestinBuffer
Pointer to the destination telegram/data buffer into which data is to be copied.
16#00000000
OffsDestinBuffer
Offset to address the start of the buffer area in which data is to be deposited.
EN
Enable/copy command
Enables the block The specified data bytes are copied at each call.
4-78
Communication blocks
QF
YF
Configuring data
0
16#0000
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / CPU551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
9,0
3,0
1,5
4-79
Communication blocks
Brief description
CTS
AR
MOD
EN
TMX
NBY
PTR
QTS
QT
YEV
YTS
DW PtrBuffer
BO OK-Status Block
BO TimeOverrun (no Tlg.in TMX)
W TlgStatus, Coupling Status
W InfoTlgStatus, additional Info
This block receives a telegram and provides the data to the write blocks
(DRD..., CPY_P) via the pointer interface.
The function and mode of operation corresponds, with the exception of
the pointer interface, to that of block CRV.
Mode of operation
After a telegram has been received from a serial or parallel interface, the
block outputs the address of the associated alternating buffer and
updates its status displays.
In so doing, the selected buffer length must match the telegram length.
If the block detects (configuring) errors, then it disables itself and enters a
communications error into the diagnostics buffer.
Receive operation starts after the interface, on the module, configured at
connection CTS, has been enabled and the existence of the appropriate
coupling partner determined (refer to diagnostics output YEV). This can
take several sampling times.
When PROFIBUS-DP stations or SIMATIC-CPU are connected, a byte or
word rotation is principally not made. A rotation which may be required is
set using the SWP connection of the read/write blocks.
The computation time essentially depends on the telegram length and
the hardware platform. A base computation time of 20 s can be
considered as nominal value for the FM458 / PM6 as well
as approx. 0,05 s/byte.
The computation time, specified in the technical data, should be
appropriately interpreted!
Time monitoring: If no new/valid data is received within the telegram
After
failure time, specified at output TMX, output QT is set to 1.
switch-on, the time monitoring is initially active and QT = 0. It is only
activated after the communications have been commissioned, i.e. after
several telegrams have been received.
Associated blocks
4-80
Communication blocks
I/O
Default:
CTS
AR
AdrName.Number
Any, unique name can be specified as well as a channel number. The number
establishes the required connection (reference) between the sender and
receiver;
For additional details, refer to the Manual "System- and communication
configuring D7-SYS ", Kapitel "Communications utility process data".
"empty string"
Mode Receive
"R" = Refresh:
Received data, for relatively slow evaluation, can be overwritten; is the typical
setting
'R'
"H" = Handshake: As long as received data has still not been read-out, no new
telegram is accepted.
Initialization connection: Changes are only accepted after a new start!
EN
Enable
Enables the block. The block is not processed for EN=0.
TMX
Monitor-Time
A new telegram must have been received within the specified time. If a
telegram has not been received with this time: QT=1; YEV=fault code
NBY
PTR
PtrBuffer
Pointer to the telegram buffer and monitoring information.
The output is connected with PTR inputs of other pointer-based
communication blocks, which read-out received data.
QTS
OK-Status block
Status display about incorrect initialization and processing of the block.
QTS=0: The block does not process data; a communications-error was
entered in the diagnostics buffer (as well as, for example, the display of "CF"
LED, flashing "C")
QTS=1: The block is operating error-free
QT
YEV
1
1000 ms
16#00000000
16#0000
4-81
Communication blocks
YTS
Configuring data
4-82
16#0000
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / CPU551
No
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
Brief description
CTS
AT
MOD
EN
NBY
PTR
QTS
YEV
YTS
DW
BO
W
W
PtrBuffer
OK-Status Block
TlgStatus, Coupling Status
InfoTlgStatus, additional Info
Mode of operation
Initially, the telegram alternating buffer is filled with the write blocks and
using the pointer to the free alternating buffer. At the next of the sampling
time, this buffer is sent as telegram via the specified serial or parallel
interface.
In so doing, the selected buffer length must match the telegram length.
If the block detects (configuring) errors, then it disables itself and enters a
communications error into the diagnostics buffer.
Send operation starts after the interface, on the module, configured at
connection CTS, has been released and the existence of the appropriate
coupling partner determined (refer to diagnostics output YEV). This can
take several sampling times.
When PROFIBUS-DP stations or SIMATIC-CPU are connected, bytes or
words are principally not swapped. A rotation which may be required is
set using the SWP connection of the read/write blocks.
The computation time essentially depends on the telegram length and
the hardware platform. A base computation time of 35 s can be
considered as nominal value for the FM458 / PM6 as
well as approx. 1 s/byte.
The computation time, specified in the technical data, should be
appropriately interpreted!
Associated blocks
4-83
Communication blocks
I/O
Default:
CTS
AT
AdrName.Number
Any, unique name can be specified as well as a channel number. The number
establishes the required connection (reference) between the sender and
receiver;
For additional details, refer to the refer to the Manual "System- and
communication configuring D7-SYS ", Kapitel "Communications utility process
data".
The address depends on the interface type (protocol). Generally, the channel
number of the sender and receiver must match.
"empty string"
Mode Transmit
"R" = Refresh:
For relatively slow execution, data to be sent #(transmitted)# can be
overwritten; this is the typical setting.
'R'
"H" = Handshake:
No new transmitted data is accepted as long as data has still not been sent.
Initialization connection: Changes are only accepted after a new start!
EN
Enable
Enables the block. For EN=0, no data is transmitted
NBY
PTR
PtrBuffer
Pointer to the telegram buffer and monitoring information.
The output is connected to PTR inputs of other pointer-based communication
blocks, which enter data to be sent, in the send buffer.
QTS
OK-Status block
Status display about incorrect initialization and processing of the block.
QTS=0: The block does not process data; a communications-error was entered
in the diagnostics buffer (as well as, for example, the display of "CF" LED,
flashing "C")
QTS=1: The block is operating error-free
YEV
16#00000000
16#0000
4-84
16#0000
Communication blocks
Configuring data
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / CPU551
No
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
4-85
Communication blocks
Brief description
LEN
NBF
BSL
PTR
QF
YF
DW PtrBuffer
BO Error-Status Block
W StatusInfo Block
This is a data memory which can be universally used and which can be
accessed via the pointer interface with a write, read or copy block.
The type of saved data is defined by the read/write blocks.
Data is only saved in the volatile memory (RAM). This means that they
are lost when the system is powered-down or at a new start!
The data block, defined with a DB_P, can contain several (similar) buffers
which can be selected in operation using an appropriate input. The
available buffer size depends on the working memory, i.e. the RAM
expansion of the particular module as well as on the configuring. This
means, for example, how much RAM the program requires.
Mode of operation
Associated blocks
4-86
Communication blocks
I/O
Default:
LEN
BufLength,Size Buffer,Bytes
Length of the data buffer in bytes;
initialization value! The modified value is only accepted after a new start!
NBF
BufNumber
Number of data buffers;
initialization value! The modified value is only accepted after a new start!
BSL
Select Buffer
Selects a buffer; a 1 selects the first buffer;
It is always possible to change over to another buffer in every sampling time.
PTR
16#00000000
PtrBuffer
Pointer to the telegram/data buffer; to connect with the same connection type of
other pointer-based communication blocks. The CFC connection can be
changed online.
The connection also includes monitoring information to ensure correct
configuring.
QF
YF
StatusInfo block
as for the DRD block!
Configuring data
0
16#0000
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / CPU551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
3,9
1,3
0,7
4-87
Communication blocks
PTR
OF1
OF2
SWP
Y
QF
YF
R DataOut Buffer
BO Error-Status Block
W StatusInfo Block
Brief description
Mode of operation
At the start of the sampling time, the telegram block, Receive CRV_P
supplies, to the read blocks, a pointer to its receive buffer (CFC
connection via PTR connections). This means that together with the
offset data, the read blocks can read one or several values from the
buffer and place these values at its output.
Data from a data memory with pointer interface (DB_P) can also be read
using these blocks.
Associated blocks
I/O
Default:
PTR
16#00000000
PtrBuffer
Pointer to the telegram/data buffer; to connect with the same connection type of
other pointer-based communication blocks. The CFC connection can be
changed online. The connection also includes monitoring information to ensure
correct configuring.
OF1
Off1 Buffer
Offset in Bytes to address individual values relative to the start of the buffer;
There are 2 identical offset inputs available which can be used to easily
configure indexed accesses.
Offset = OF1 + OF2;
This means, for example, OF1 can receive a constant value and the OF2connections of all read blocks controlled using a common CFC connection in
order to read-out several similar data packages (e.g. also with CFC chart
blocks).
4-88
Off2 Buffer
Refer to the description of OF1!
Communication blocks
SWP
DataOut Buffer
Received value; If an error has occurred (e.g. as the result of an incorrect
offset; refer to the data at QF, YF), then the last value, which was read errorfree, is output. For REAL types, a check is made for the correct REAL type!
QF
YF
StatusInfo Block
If an error has occurred, the last value, which was read error-free, is output.
0.0
0
16#0000
0001
There is not sufficient memory space for the buffer;
Remedy: Reduce the buffer length or reduce the configured software.
0002
No value buffer pointer at the PTR connection;
There is possibly no link to the PTR connection; for DB_P: The data at
connection BSL is 0 or does not match the number of buffers which have been
set-up
Remedy: Check the CFC links at the PTR connections; check buffer select for
DB_P.
0003
The block, connected through PTR, does not have the same sampling
time.
Remedy: All of the pointer-based communication blocks, linked through a PTRCFC connection, must have the same sampling time.
0004
Incompatible block combination regarding read/write direction (e.g.
read block DRD at the send block CTV_P)
Remedy: Ensure that there are only read blocks at CRV_P, write blocks only at
CTV_P as well as the correct assignment of source and destination pointers for
the CPY_P copy block.
0005
Offsets, greater than the buffer length
Remedy: The offset must lie within the buffer length.
0006
Invalid REAL value (this is not a number, de-normalized)
Remedy: Check for a correct offset (value limit). Check that REAL types were
transferred/saved.
0007
No data available;
Remedy: Check whether the telegram blocks CRV_P/CTV_P were initialized
and operate correctly and data is transferred.
0008
Invalid length
Remedy: Check whether the LEN data is greater than the length of the
connected buffer or whether the offset contains a negative value
0009
Incompatible module
Remedy: Check all of the modules being used together with the hardware
platform: Blocks S7RD_P/S7WR_P can only be configured on FM458!
000A
4-89
Communication blocks
Configuring data
4-90
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/CPU551 0,6
3,6
1,2
DRD_8
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/CPU551 1,9
11,4
3,8
DRD_8D
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/CPU551 5,0
30,0
10,0
DRD_8I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/CPU551 2,3
13,8
4,6
DRD_BY
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/CPU551 0,8
3,0
1,5
Yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Communication blocks
Brief description
PTR
OF1
OF2
SWP
X
QF
YF
BO StatusInfo Baustein
W StatusInfo Block
Using these write blocks, individual data is written into a send buffer
(CTV_P) or a data block (DB_P) using a pointer interface.
Using the offset data to be set, the location in the telegram or the buffer
are defined for the value to be written. It is very important to ensure that
the offset is correctly selected so that values which were not previously
saved (partially) are not overwritten.
There are associated blocks for every data type (BYTE, INT, DINT,
REAL). Further, there are blocks which write 1 or 8 values.
Mode of operation
Using a pointer and their offset data, write blocks fill the telegram buffer
which is sent using the block CTV_P assigned using the CFC pointer
connection.
Using these blocks, data can also be written into a data memory with
pointer interface (DB_P).
Associated blocks
I/O
Default:
PTR
PtrBuffer
Pointer to the telegram/data buffer; to connect with the same connection
type of other pointer-based communication blocks.
The CFC connection can be changed online.
The connection also includes monitoring information to ensure correct
configuring.
OF1
Off1 Buffer
Offset in Bytes to address individual values relative to the start of the buffer;
There are 2 identical offset inputs available which can be used to easily
configure indexed accesses.
Offset = OF1 + OF2;
This means, for example, OF1 can receive a constant value and the OF2connections of all write blocks controlled using a common CFC connection
in order to write into several similar data packages
(e.g. also with CFC chart blocks).
16#00000000
4-91
Communication blocks
OF2
Off2 Buffer
Refer to the description of OF1!
SWP
DataIn Buffer
Value to be sent;
QF
YF
StatusInfo Block
as for the DRD block!
Configuring data
4-92
0.0
0
16#0000
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/CPU551 0,6
3,6
1,2
DWR_8
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/CPU551 2,0
12,0
4,0
DWR_8D
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/CPU551 5,0
30,0
10,0
DWR_8I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/CPU551 4,3
25,8
8,6
DWR_BY
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/CPU551 0,9
5,4
1,8
Yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
5 Conversion modules
5.1 Type, converter
5.1.1 B_W Converter, 16 binary quantities into a status word
Brief description
NOTE
5.1.2 B_DW Conversion, 32 binary quantities into a double word (32 bit)
Brief description
NOTE
5-1
Conversion modules
I output variable
Brief description
Mode of operation
Conversion
schematic
Input
0101
0000
1111
0110
0000
1111
0110
1101
0011
1010
0000
Output
0101
I/O
X
(default: 0)
Output quantity
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
5-2
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
1,3
0,4
0,2
Conversion modules
5.1.6 DW_B Conversion double word (32 bit) into 32 binary quantities
Brief description
NOTE
5.1.7 DW_W Conversion 32 bit double word into two 16 bit words
Brief description
NOTE
5-3
Conversion modules
DI output quantity
Brief description
Mode of operation
Conversion
schematic
Input
0101 0000
1111
0110
1111
0110
Output
0101
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0)
Output quantity
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in:
Normal mode
Special features
1,6
0,5
0,3
5-4
Conversion modules
X
NF
R output quantity
Brief description
Converts a 16 bit fixed point quantity into a REAL quantity. For the case,
X = 16384 (corresponds to 100%), output Y assumes the value at input
NF.
Mode of operation
X NF
16384
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default value: 0)
NF
Normalization factor
Output quantity
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
2,0
0,7
0,4
5-5
Conversion modules
X
NF
R output quantity
Brief description
Converts a 32 bit fixed point quantity into a REAL quantity. Output Y has
the value at input NF, for the case X = 1073741824 (corresponds to
100%).
Mode of operation
X NF
1073741824
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default value: 0)
NF
Normalization factor
Output quantity
Configuringdata
5-6
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
2,0
0,7
0,4
Conversion modules
5-7
Conversion modules
X
NF
Y
Q
I output quantity
BO overflow
Brief description
Converts a REAL quantity into a 16 bit fixed point quantity. For X = NF,
output Y has the value 16384 (corresponds to 100%).
Mode of operation
Y=
X 16384
(result in round figures)
NF
I/O
X
Input quantity
NF
Normalization factor
Output quantity
(default value: 0 )
Overflow. The input is set to 1, if X cannot be represented at Y due to the fact that the
value range has been exceeded, or if NF was set to 0.
Configuringdata
5-8
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
2,0
0,7
0,4
Conversion modules
Brief description
X
NF
Y
Q
DI output quantity
BO overflow
Mode of operation
Y=
X 1073741824
(result in round figures)
NF
or
-2147483648 Y 2147483648
(decimal)
16#8000000 Y 16#7FFFFFF
(hexadecimal)
Input quantity
NF
Normalization factor
Output quantity
(default value: 0 )
Overflow. The input is set to 1, if X, was not able to be represented at Y due to the fact
that the value range was exceeded or if NF was set to 0.
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
2,0
0,7
0,4
5-9
Conversion modules
5.1.18 W_DW Conversion from two 16 bit words into a 32 bit double word
Brief description
NOTE
5-10
Conversion modules
STZ
NF
Y
Q0
BCD
Q1
sign BO
VZ
Q2
EE
Q3
EZ
Q4
EV
EA
DU
EN
QW
BO
BO
BO
BO
Brief description
Mode of operation
to 10
16 to 16 for binary coding, are cyclically selected one after the other
by setting the relevant binary output Q1 to Q4 to 1. After selecting a
switch position, this is read-in as for 4-byte number via the 4 binary inputs
EE, EZ, EV and EA into the function block. The thumbwheel switch value,
cyclically determined from the individual thumbwheel switch positions, is
then transferred at a rising edge at binary input DU, i.e. data is
transferred, taking into account normalization factor NF, to output Y.
Y=
5-11
Conversion modules
Error messages
Thumbwheel switch
value: 3225
1
BIQ8
=5
0
1
Pos. 1
0
0
BNR
BII8
4
5000
1
0
STZ
NF
BCD
VZ
EE
EZ
EV
EA
DU
EN
=2
Y
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
QW
1
0
Pos. 2
0
0
=2
1
0
Pos. 3
0
1
=3
Pushbutton
1
0
Pos. 4
5-12
Conversion modules
Example:
STZ = 4
Y=
3225
100% = 64.5%
5000
I/O
STZ
Number of positions
NF
Normalization factor
(default: 1)
BCD
(default: 0)
VZ
Sign
(default: 0)
EE
Input 20
(default: 0)
EZ
(default: 0)
(default: 0)
EV
Input 2
Input 2
EA
Input 2
(default: 0)
DU
Data transfer
(default: 0)
EN
Enable
(default: 0)
Q0
Q1
Control, position
10
or
16
(default: 0.0)
(default: 0)
10
Control position
10
or
16
Q3
Control position
10 3
or
16 3
(default: 0)
Q4
Control position
10 4
or
16 4
(default: 0)
QW
Error
Q2
Control position
Configuringdata
or
16
(default: 0)
(default: 0)
(default: 0)
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
6,6
2,2
1,1
5-13
Conversion modules
I
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
XN
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
output 1
output 2
output 3
output 4
output 5
output 6
output 7
output 8
Brief description
Mode of operation
The function block reverses (interchanges) the high- and low word of the
double words at inputs X1 to X8 (and simultaneously reverses the high
and low bytes within the word), and outputs the result at Y1 to Y8 (refer
to the conversion schematic):
the low word of the double word at input Xn becomes the high word of
the double word at output Yn. The high and low byte of the low word
are simultaneously reversed.
The high word of the double word at input Xn becomes the low word of
the double word at output Yn. The high and low bytes of the high word
are simultaneously interchanged.
The number of inputs to be processed (1 to 8) is specified at input Xn.
This value influences the computation time of the function block.
If input XN = 0, all block outputs are set to 0. For XN >= 9 the function
block calculates with XN = 8.
Conversion
schematic
Input X
High byte 2
Low byte 2
High byte 1
Low byte 1
High word
Low word
High word
Low word
Output Y
Low byte 1
5-14
High byte 1
Low byte 2
High byte 2
Conversion modules
I/O
XN
Number of X inputs
X1-X8
Input 1-8
Y1-Y8
Output 1-8
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
1,6
0,5
0,3
5-15
Conversion modules
I
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
XN
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
output 1
output 2
output 3
output 4
output 5
output 6
output 7
output 8
Brief description
Mode of operation
The function reverses (interchanges) the high and low bytes of the words
at inputs X1 to X8 and outputs the result of this reversal at Y1 to Y8 (refer
to the conversion schematic):
the low byte of the word at input Xn becomes the high byte of the
word at output Yn.
the high byte of the word at input Xn becomes the low byte of the
word at output Yn.
The number of inputs to be processed (1 to 8) is specified at input Xn.
This value influences the computation time of the function block.
if input XN = 0, all of the block outputs are set to 0. For XN >= 9, the
function block calculates with XN = 8.
Conversion
schematic
Input X
High byte
Low byte
High byte
Low byte
Output Y
I/O
XN
No. of X inputs
X1-X8
Input 1-8
(default: 0)
Y1-Y8
Output 1-8
(default: 0)
5-16
Conversion modules
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
1,5
0,5
0,3
5-17
Conversion modules
Application
information
I
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
XN
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
output 1
output 2
output 3
output 4
output 5
output 6
output 7
output 8
Mode of operation
The function block reverses the high and low word of the double words at
inputs X1 to X8 (and simultaneously reverses the high and low bytes
within the word) and outputs the result at outputs Y1 to Y8 (refer to the
conversion schematic):
the low word of the double word at input Xn becomes the high word of
the double word at output Yn. The high and low byte of the low word
are simultaneously reversed.
the high Word of the double Word at input Xn becomes the low Word
of the double Word at output Yn. The high- and low byte of the high
Word are simultaneously reversed.
The number of inputs to be processed (1 to 8) is specified at initialization
input Xn. This value influences the computation time of the function
block.
if input XN = 0, all block outputs are set to 0. For XN >= 9, the function
block calculates with XN = 8.
Conversion
schematic
Input X
High byte 2
Low byte 2
High byte 1
Low byte 1
High word
Low word
High word
Low word
Output Y
Low byte 1
5-18
High byte 1
Low byte 2
High byte 2
Conversion modules
I/O
XN
Number of X inputs
X1-X8
Input 1-8
Y1-Y8
Output 1-8
(default: 0.0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
1,5
0,5
0,3
5-19
Conversion modules
SWBO
number of X inputs
input 1
input 2
input 3
input 4
input 5
input 6
input 7
input 8
Brief description
I
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
XN
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
output 1
output 2
output 3
output 4
output 5
output 6
output 7
output 8
Mode of operation
The function block reverses (interchanges) the high and low word of the
double words at inputs X1 to X8 (and simultaneously reverses the high
and low bytes within the word), and outputs the result at outputs Y1 to Y8
(refer to the conversion schematic):
the low word of the double word at input Xn becomes the high word of
the double word at output Yn. The highw and low byte of the low word
are simultaneously reversed.
the high word of the double word at input Xn becomes the low word of
the double word at output Yn. The high and low byte of the high word
are simultaneously reversed.
The number of inputs to be processed (1 to 8) is specified at initialization
input Xn. This value influences the computation time of the function
block.
if input XN = 0, all block outputs are set to zero. For XN >= 9, the
function block calculates with XN = 8.
Conversion
schematic
Input X
High byte 2
Low byte 2
High byte 1
Low byte 1
High word
Low word
High word
Low word
Output Y
Low byte 1
5-20
High byte 1
Low byte 2
High byte 2
Conversion modules
I/O
XN
No. of X inputs
X1-X8
Input 1-8
(default: 0.0)
Y1-Y8
Output 1-8
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
1,5
0,5
0,3
5-21
Logic blocks
6.1
Gates
Brief description
IS
AND function block for a status word with a WORD type input
the block can be used for test operations
Mode of operation
6-1
Logic blocks
Truth table
Status word IS
Output
Q
Bit
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
*
*
*
*
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * 0
* * 0 *
* 0 * *
0 * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* 0
0 *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 4 3 2 1
*
*
*
*
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * * 0
* * 0 *
* 0 * *
0 * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 1 1 1 1
* = any
I/O
IS
Status word
(default: 16#0000)
Configuringdata
6-2
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
1,5
0,5
0,3
Logic blocks
QS
Q
Brief description
Mode of operation
Status diagram
(for 3 inputs)
Status word 01
I01
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
&
Status word 02
I02
0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
&
Status word 03
I03
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
I/O
I01
(default: 16#FFFF)
I...
...
(default: 16#FFFF)
Inn
(default: 16#FFFF)
QS
(default: 16#FFFF)
Binary quantity
(default: 1)
6-3
Logic blocks
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
4,2
1,7
0,9
yes
Generic FB
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
I is a generic input
Brief description
IS
QS
Mode of operation
QSk = ISk
6-4
Logic blocks
Generating the
complement
IS
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
QS
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
I/O
IS
Status word
(default: 16#0000)
QS
(default: 16#FFFF)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
1,6
0,5
0,3
IS
BO
binary quantity OR
Brief description
Mode of operation
The function block logically ORs the binary quantities at generic inputs I,
inverts the result and outputs it at Q.
6-5
Logic blocks
Binary quantity 1
(default: 0)
I...
...
(default: 0)
Inn
Binary quantity nn
(default: 0)
(default: 1)
Truth table
Input
Output Q
I01
I02
I03
I04
I05
Inn
*
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
* = any
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
1,5
0,5
0,3
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
I is a generic input
QS
Q
W status word OR
BO binary quantity
Brief description
Mode of operation
6-6
Logic blocks
I01
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
or
Status word 02
I02
0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
Status word OR
QS
1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0
I/O
I..
(default: 16#0000)
QS
Status word OR
(default: 16#0000)
Binary quantity
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Generic FB
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
3,9
1,3
0,7
6-7
Logic blocks
QS
Q
Brief description
Mode of operation
I01
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Status word 02
I02
xor
0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
QS
1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
I/O
I..
(default: 16#0000)
QS
(default: 16#0000)
Binary quantity
(default: 0)
6-8
Logic blocks
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Generic FB
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
3,9
1,3
0,7
6-9
Logic blocks
6.2
Timers
Brief description
I
T
BO output pulse
Mode of operation
The rising edge of a pulse at input I sets output Q to 1 for pulse duration
T.
The pulse generator cannot be post triggered.
Initialization
The initialization defines the initial status for the first cyclic execution.
If input I receives the value 1 from the previous block output at
initialization, then the function block cannot identify a rising edge at the
first cyclic execution.
If output Q has the default value 1 after initialization output Q is set to 1
for pulse duration T.
Block diagram
Timing diagram
1
0
1
0
6-10
Logic blocks
I/O
I
Input pulse
(default: 0)
Pulse duration
(default: 0 ms)
Output pulse
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
3,8
1,3
0,7
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
I
T
BO output pulse
Brief description
Mode of operation
Initialization
Initialization defines the initial status for the first cyclic execution.
If input I receives the value 1 from the previous block output at
initialization, the function block cannot identify a rising edge at the first
cyclic execution.
If output Q has default value 1, after initialization output Q is set to 1 for
pulse duration T .
Block diagram
6-11
Logic blocks
Timing diagram
1
0
I/O
I
Input pulse
(default: 0)
Pulse duration
(default: 0 ms)
Output pulse
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
2,1
0,7
0,4
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
I
T
BO output pulse
Brief description
Mode of operation
The rising edge of a pulse at block input I sets output Q to 1 after the
pulse delay time T.
Output Q is 0, if I = 0.
Q remains 0 if the duration of the input pulse I is shorter than the pulse
delay time T.
If time T is so high that the maximum value that can be represented
internally (T/ta as 32-bit value, with ta = sampling time) is exceeded, then
this is limited to the maximum value (e.g. for ta=1 ms approx. 50 days).
Initialization
6-12
Initialization defines the initial status for the first cyclic execution.
If input I receives the value 1 from the previous block output at
initialization, the function block cannot identify the rising edge at the first
cyclic execution.
If output Q has the value 1 at initialization, after initialization it is
immediately set to 1 if I = 1.
Logic blocks
Block diagram
Q
T 0
Timing diagram
1
0
I/O
I
Input pulse
(default: 0)
(default: 0 ms)
Output pulse
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
2,2
0,7
0,4
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Brief description
I
T
BO output pulse
6-13
Logic blocks
Mode of operation
The falling edge of a pulse at block input I sets output Q to 0 after the
pulse extension time T.
Output Q is 1, if I = 1.
Output Q is 0, if the input pulse I = 0 and the switch off delay time T has
expired.
The output Q remains at 1 if input I is again set to 1 before time T has
expired.
Initialization
Initialization defines the initial status for the first cyclic execution.
If input I receives the value 1 from the previous block output at
initialization, the function block cannot identify a negative edge at the 1st
cyclic execution.
If output Q is 1 at initialization, after initialization it is set to 1 for pulse
extension time T.
Block diagram
I
0 T
Timing diagram
1
0
I/O
I
Input pulse
(default: 0)
(default: 0 ms)
Output pulse
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
6-14
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
4,0
1,3
0,7
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Logic blocks
I
R
T
BO output pulse
Brief description
Mode of operation
Initialization
The initialization defines the initial status for the first cyclic execution.
If input I receives the value 1 from the previous block output at
initialization, the function block cannot identify a rising edge at the first
cyclic execution.
If output Q has the value 1, after initialization it is set to 1 for pulse
duration T.
Block diagram
T
Q
Timing diagram
1
0
1
0
6-15
Logic blocks
I/O
I
Input pulse
(default: 0)
Reset input
(default: 0)
Pulse duration
(default: 0 ms)
Output pulse
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
6-16
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
4,4
1,5
0,8
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Logic blocks
6.3
Counters
Brief description
BO
BO
BO
BO
I
I
I
IU
ID
R
S
SV
LU
LL
Y
QU
Q0
QL
I
BO
BO
BO
counter status
counter at the upper limit
counter status zero
counter at the lower limit
Function block for up/down counting with the following counter functions:
set counter to zero
hold counter at zero (inhibit)
set counter to initial value
The upper and lower counter limits can be individually set.
Mode of operation
Block diagram
LL LU
IU
ID
SV
6-17
Logic blocks
Truth table
Binary command
Counter status Y
Y is kept
Y=0
Y = SV (setting value)
Y=0
Initialization
I/O
IU
Up pulse
(default: 0)
ID
Down pulse
(default: 0)
Resetting
(default: 0)
Setting
(default: 0)
SV
Setting value
(default: 0)
LU
(default: 0)
LL
(default: 0)
Counter status
(default: 0)
QU
(default: 0)
Q0
Counter status 0
(default: 0)
QL
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
6-18
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
6,3
2,1
1,1
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Logic blocks
Brief description
I1
I2
QU
QL
QF
BO up count direction
BO down count direction
BO error
Mode of operation
Initialization
The initialization defines the initial status for the first cyclic execution.
If block input I1 or I2 receives the value 1 from the previous block output
at initialization, the function block cannot identify a rising edge at the first
cyclic execution. The block identifies a rising edge at the first cyclic
execution. Values for I1 and I2 are buffered in the INIT mode.
Block diagram
I1
I2
QU
QL
QF
6-19
Logic blocks
Timing diagram
I1
I2
1
0
1
0
QU
QL
1
0
1
0
I/O
I1
Pulse sequence 1
(default: 0)
I2
Pulse sequence 2
(default: 0)
QU
Up direction
(default: 0)
QL
Down direction
(default: 0)
QF
Error
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
6-20
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
4,4
1,5
0,8
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Logic blocks
6.4
Comparators
6-21
Logic blocks
6.5
Switches
Y
QTS
R output quantity
BO operational status
Brief description
Mode of operation
The function block is only active if the operating status output QTS = 1.
The generic input (from X01 to Xnn), whose value changed over the
previous value in the current sampling interval is output at Y.
If several generic inputs change their value in the current sampling
interface, then the value of the input with the lowest number is switchedthrough to output Y. The following inputs are then ignored.
Example:
Assuming that, of the generic inputs X01 to X09, inputs X01 and X02
haven't changed. X03 is the first input, whose value has changed; it is
output at Y. The values of inputs X04 to X09 are not interrogated.
Operating status INIT
In the INIT operating status, memory is reserved to accept values of
generic input quantities. If this is not possible (e.g. due to lack of
memory), operating status QTS is set to 0, and 0 is output.
If the required memory can be reserved, then:
the current values of all generic input quantities are saved
the value of input quantity X01 is transferred to output Y
operating status QTS is set to 1
I/O
X..
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
QTS
Operating status
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
6-22
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
4,8
1,6
0,8
yes
Generic FB
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Logic blocks
Y
QTS
I output quantity
BO operational state
Brief description
Mode of operation
The function block is only active if the operating status output QTS = 1.
The generic input (from X01 to Xnn), whose value has changed over the
previous value in the current sampling interval, is output at Y.
If several generic inputs change values in the current sampling interval,
then the value of the input, with the lowest number, is transferred to
output Y. The subsequent inputs are ignored.
Example:
Assuming that, of the generic inputs X01 to X09, inputs X01 and X02
haven't changed. X03 is the first input, whose value has changed; it is
output at Y. The values of inputs X04 to X09 are not interrogated.
Operating status INIT
In the INIT operating status, memory is reserved to accept values of
generic input quantities. If this is not possible (e.g. due to lack of
memory), operating status QTS is set to 0, and 0 is output.
If the required memory can be reserved, then:
the current values of all generic input quantities are saved
the value of input quantity X01 is transferred to output Y
operating status QTS is set to 1
I/O
X..
Input quantity
(default: 0)
Output quantity
(default: 0)
QTS
Operating status
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Generic FB
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
4,5
1,5
0,8
6-23
Logic blocks
The INTEGER type function block switches one of two binary input
quantities to the output
Additional information, e.g. symbol, mode of operation, I/O and
technical data are provided in the corresponding online help.
The function block switches one of two numerical input quantities (REAL
type) to the output.
Additional information, e.g. symbol, mode of operation, I/O and
technical data are provided in the corresponding online help.
The function block switches one of two numerical input quantities to the
output (DOUBLE-INTEGER type).
Additional information, e.g. symbol, mode of operation, I/O and
technical data are provided in the corresponding online help.
6-24
Logic blocks
6.6
Multiplexer
Brief description
R
I
BO
BO
BO
X
XS
MS
E
ENC
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
YS
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I
output quantity 1
output quantity 2
output quantity 3
output quantity 4
output quantity 5
output quantity 6
output quantity 7
output quantity 8
control output
Mode of operation
The function block switches its input X to one of the 8 selectable outputs
Y1 to Y8, depending on inputs ENC, R, MS and XS = 1 to 8. (example:
XS = 3 signifies Y3 = X).
For XS = 0 or XS >= 9, none of the block outputs Y1 to Y8 are selected.
Non-selected outputs are either set to 0 or retain their previous value up
to the next change.
For the control inputs, the priority is as follows: ENC before R before MS
For ENC = 0, all outputs Y1 to Y8 remain unchanged, independent of R
and MS,
for ENC = 1, outputs Y1 to Y8 are enabled for change.
For R = 1 all outputs Y1 to Y8 have the value 0 independent of MS.
For MS = 0 (non-latching operation), all of the outputs Y1 to Y8, not
selected by XS, have the value 0.
For MS = 1 (latching operation), all of the outputs, not selected by XS,
remain unchanged.
6-25
Logic blocks
Truth table
ENC
MS
XS
Outputs Y1 to Y8
Y1 to Y8 = 0
1 <= XS <= 8
Selected output = X
Non-selected output = 0
XS = 0 or
Y1 to Y8 = 0
XS >= 9
1
1 <= XS <= 8
Selected output = X
Non-selected outputs remain unchanged
XS = 0 or
XS >= 9
For XS = 0 to 8, YS = 0
For XS > 8, the following is valid: YS = XS-8
(Used when cascading).
Block output YS should be connected to block input XS of the following
function block.
Cascading
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
XS
Control input
(default: 0)
MS
Save mode
(default: 0)
Reset
(default: 0)
ENC
Enable change
(default: 0)
Y1
Output quantity 1
(default: 0.0)
...
...
Y8
Output quantity 8
(default: 0.0)
YS
Control output
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
6-26
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
4,3
1,4
0,7
Logic blocks
Brief description
I
I
BO
BO
BO
X
XS
MS
R
ENC
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
YS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
output quantity 1
output quantity 2
output quantity 3
output quantity 4
output quantity 5
output quantity 6
output quantity 7
output quantity 8
control output
Mode of operation
The function block switches its input X to one of the 8 selectable outputs
Y1 to Y8, depending on inputs ENC, R, MS and XS = 1 to 8. (example:
XS = 3, signifies Y3 = X).
For XS = 0 or XS >= 9, none of the block outputs Y1 to Y8 are selected.
Non-selected outputs are either set to 0, or retain their previous value up
to the next change..
For the control inputs, the priority rating is as follows: ENC before R
before MS
For ENC = 0, all outputs Y1 to Y8, remain unchanged, independent of R
and MS.
For ENC = 1, outputs Y1 to Y8 are enabled for change.
For R = 1 all outputs Y1 to Y8 have the value 0 independent of MS.
For MS = 0 (non-latching operation), all of the outputs Y1 to Y8, not
selected by XS, have the value 0.
For MS=1 (latching operation), all of the outputs, not selected by XS,
remain unchanged.
6-27
Logic blocks
Truth table
ENC
MS
XS
Outputs Y1 to Y8
Y1 to Y8 = 0
1 <= XS <= 8
Selected output = X
Non-selected output = 0
XS = 0 or
Y1 to Y8 = 0
XS >= 9
1
Selected output = X
1 <= XS <= 8
XS = 0 or
XS >= 9
* = any
For XS = 0 to 8, YS = 0.
For XS > 8, the following is valid: YS = XS-8
(used when cascading)
Block output YS should be connected to block input XS of the following
function block.
Cascading
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0)
XS
Control input
(default: 0)
MS
Save mode
(default: 0)
Reset
(default: 0)
ENC
Enable change
(default: 0)
Y1
Output quantity 1
(default: 0)
...
...
Y8
Output quantity 8
(default: 0)
YS
Control output
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
6-28
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
4,2
1,4
0,7
Logic blocks
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I
BO
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
CCI
XCS
EN
Y
CCS
QF
R output quantity
I cascading control word
BO error message
Brief description
REAL type function block for 8 x multiplex operation. The block can be
cascaded.
Mode of operation
Block diagram
XCS
EN
X1.
..
X8
CCI
MUX
Y
CCS
QF
6-29
Logic blocks
Truth table
EN
XCS
CSS
QF
any
CCI
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
>8
XCS-8
Cascading
MUX8
Qty. 1 Qty. 2 Qty. 3 Qty. 4 Qty. 5 Qty. 6 Qty. 7 Qty. 8 Casc. Cntrl. Enab. -
MUX8
X1 Y
Qty. 9 - R
R
Qty. 10 X2 CCS I
X3 QF BO
Qty. 11 X4
Qty. 12 X5
Qty. 13 Qty. 14 X6
X7
Qty. 15 Qty. 16 X8
R
R
X1 Y
X2 CCS I
BO
X3 QF
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
CCI
I
XCS
BO EN
I
BO
- Output
- Casc.
- Error
CCI
XCS
EN
I/O
X1
Input quantity 1
(default: 0.0)
...
...
...
X8
Input quantity 8
(default: 0.0)
CCI
Cascading input
(default: 0.0)
XCS
(default: 0)
Enable
(default: 0)
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
CCS
(default: 0)
QF
Error message
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
6-30
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
4,6
1,5
0,8
Logic blocks
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BO
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
CCI
XCS
EN
Y
CCS
QF
I output quantity
I cascading control word
BO error message
Brief description
INTEGER type function block for 8 x multiplex operation. The block can
be cascaded.
Mode of operation
Block diagram
XCS
X1
..
.
X8
CCI
EN
Y
CCS
MUX
QF
6-31
Logic blocks
Truth table
EN
XCS
CSS
QF
any
CCI
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
>8
XCS-8
Cascading
MUX8_I
Qty. 1 - I
I
X1 Y
Qty. 2 X2 CCS I
Qty. 3 X3 QF BO
Qty. 4 X4
Qty. 5 X5
Qty. 6 X6
Qty. 7 X7
Qty. 8 X8
Casc. CCI
Cntrl. XCS
Enab. - BO EN
MUX8_I
Qty. 9 - I
Qty. 10 Qty. 11 Qty. 12 Qty. 13 Qty. 14 Qty. 15 Qty. 16 -
BO
- Outp.
X1 Y
I
- Casc.
X2 CCS
X3 QF
BO - Error
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
CCI
XCS
EN
I/O
X1
Input quantity 1
(default: 0)
...
...
...
X8
Input quantity 8
(default: 0)
CCI
Cascading input
(default: 0)
XCS
(default: 0)
Enable
(default: 0)
Output quantity
(default: 0)
CCS
(default: 0)
QF
Error message
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
6-32
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
3,4
1,1
0,6
Logic blocks
6.7
Memory
input quantity 1
input quantity 2
save input quantity 1
save input quantity 2
Brief description
R
R
BO
BO
X1
X2
I1
I2
Mode of operation
Initialization
Block diagram
X1
I1
I2
X2
6-33
Logic blocks
Truth table
Input
I1
I2
Yn = Yn-1
0 -> 1
Yn = X2n
0 -> 1
Yn = X1n
0 -> 1
0 -> 1
Yn = X1n
*
: no rising edge
0 -> 1 : rising edge
I/O
X1
Input quantity 1
X2
Input quantity 2
(default: 0.0)
I1
(default: 0)
I2
(default: 0)
(default: 0.0)
Configuringdata
(default: 0.0)
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
2,9
1,0
0,5
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
input quantity 1
input quantity 2
save, input quantity 1
save, input quantity 2
Brief description
DI
DI
BO
BO
X1
X2
I1
I2
6-34
Logic blocks
Mode of operation
Initialization
Block diagram
X1
I1
I2
X2
Truth table
Input
I1
I2
Yn = Yn-1
0 -> 1
Yn = X2n
0 -> 1
Yn = X1n
0 -> 1
0 -> 1
Yn = X1n
*
: no rising edge
0 -> 1 : rising edge
I/O
X1
Input quantity 1
(default: 0)
X2
Input quantity 2
(default: 0)
I1
(default: 0)
I2
(default: 0)
(default: 0)
6-35
Logic blocks
Configuringdata
6-36
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
2,9
1,0
0,5
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Logic blocks
input quantity 1
input quantity 2
save, input quantity 1
save, input quantity 2
Brief description
I
I
BO
BO
X1
X2
I1
I2
Mode of operation
Initialization
Block diagram
X1
I1
I2
X2
6-37
Logic blocks
Truth table
Input
I1
I2
Yn = Yn-1
0 -> 1
Yn = X2n
0 -> 1
Yn = X1n
0 -> 1
0 -> 1
Yn = X1n
*
: No rising edge
0 -> 1 : Rising edge
I/O
X1
Input quantity 1
X2
Input quantity 2
(default: 0)
I1
(default: 0)
I2
(default: 0)
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
(default: 0)
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
2,6
0,9
0,5
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
trigger input
D input
setting
resetting
BO
BO
BO
BO
I
D
S
R
Q
QN
BO binary quantity
BO inverted binary quantity
Brief description
Mode of operation
If both inputs S and R are 0, for a rising edge at trigger input I, the D input
information is switched through to output Q. Output QN always has the
inverse value of output Q. Output Q is set to 1 for a 1 at input S. If input R
is set to 1, output Q is set to 0. If both inputs are 0, then Q does not
change. On the other hand, if both inputs S and R are 1, Q is 0, as the
reset input dominates.
Initialization
6-38
Logic blocks
Block diagram
S
Q
D
I
QN
R
Truth table
D
Binary command
QN
0 -> 1
0 -> 1
1 -> 0
Qn-1
Qn-1
Timing diagram
with D and I
I
D
Q
QN
Output statuses
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Trigger input
(default: 0)
D input
(default: 0)
Setting
(default: 0)
Resetting
(default: 0)
Binary quantity
(default: 0)
QN
(default: 1)
6-39
Logic blocks
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
6,0
2,0
1,0
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
D input
trigger input
setting
resetting
W
BO
BO
BO
IS
I
S
R
QS
QSN
W output quantity
W inverted output quantity
Brief description
Mode of operation
Initialization
Block diagram
S
QS
IS
I
QSN
6-40
Logic blocks
Truth table
I
Binary command
Output statuses
QS
QSN
0 -> 1
IS
IS inverted
* = any
Timing diagram
with I and IS
1
0
1
ISn
0
1
QSn
0
QSNn 1
0
I
D input
(default: 16#0000)
Trigger input
(default: 0)
Setting
(default: 0)
Resetting
(default: 0)
QS
Output quantity
(default: 16#0000)
QSN
(default: 16#FFFF)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
4,3
1,4
0,7
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
setting BO
resetting BO
Brief description
S
R
Q
QN
BO binary quantity
BO inverse binary quantity
6-41
Logic blocks
Mode of operation
Block diagram
QN
Truth table
Binary command
Output status Q
Q=0
Q=1
Q=0
I/O
S
Setting
(default: 0)
Resetting
(default: 0)
Binary quantity
(default: 0)
QN
(default: 1)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
3,5
1,2
0,6
setting BO
resetting BO
6-42
S
R
Q
QN
BO binary quantity
BO inverse binary quantity
Logic blocks
Brief description
BOOL type function block which is used as static binary value memory
Mode of operation
Block diagram
QN
Truth table
Binary command
Output status Q
Q=0
Q=1
Q=1
I/O
S
Setting
(default: 0)
Resetting
(default: 0)
Binary quantity
(default: 0)
QN
(default: 1)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
3,5
1,2
0,6
6-43
Logic blocks
6.8
Buffers
I
BO
R
I
BO
BO
TBL
SAV
X
ADR
RW
EN
Y
ADV
QTS
R output quantity
I address outout
BO operationing status
enable
Brief description
The function block saves a REAL type input quantity at a specific location
in a data memory or it retrieves from there.
Mode of operation
The block is only active, if both input EN=1 (block enabled) and output
QTS=1 (data memory available). In this case, input RW defines the block
mode (trace/output).
For both modi, the memory location offset (referred to the start of the
data memory) should be specified as address input, in which the input
quantity is entered, or from which the output quantity is to be read. The
following is valid 0 <= ADR <= (TBL-1). If the ADR value is too high, then
it is limited to (TBL-1). The following operating modi are possible:
Trace mode (EN = 1, QTS = 1, RW = 0):
The input quantity X is entered in the memory location addressed by
ADR.
Address output ADV is set to 0.
Outputs Y and QTS remain unchanged.
Output mode (EN = 1, QTS = 1, RW = 1):
The contents of the memory location, addressed by ADR, are read
and output as output quantity Y.
Value ADR is output as address output (output ADV).
Output QTS remains unchanged. If the value ADR is too high, then it
is limited to (TBL-1).
All outputs remain unchanged for EN=0 and/or QTS=0.
Initialization
6-44
Logic blocks
The number of values which can be saved is specified at initialization input TBL.
The value at the input is limited to 0 when a negative value is entered. Value range:
0 <= TBL <= 32767
(default: 0)
SAV
Initialization input SAV is used to define whether the data memory is set-up in the
battery-buffered RAM (SAV = 1) or in the local RAM (SAV = 0).
(default: 0)
RW
For RW = 0, the block is in the trace mode; for RW = 1, in the output mode.
(default: 0)
EN
For EN=0, the block is neither tracing nor is it in the output mode; for EN=1, the block
is operating in accordance with the signal at RW.
(default: 0)
Output quantity.
(default: 0.0)
QTS
Block output QTS indicates whether the block is operational (QTS = 1).
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
2,8
0,9
0,5
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
TBL
X
ADR
Y
QTS
R output quantity
BO operating status
Brief description
Mode of operation
If the operating status QTS=1, then the function block has a delay
memory, with size TBL. The input quantity, entered at input X, is output
as output quantity Y after a delay. The delay is defined by the integer
multiple ADR of sampling steps. For operating status QTS=0, the delay
memory is not activated. In this case, the input quantity, entered at input
X, is immediately output as output quantity Y.
6-45
Logic blocks
Initialization
NOTE
I/O
TBL
Number of values which can be saved, value range: 0 <= TBL <= 32767
The value is limited to 0 if a negative value is entered.
(default: 0)
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
ADR
(default: 0)
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
QTS
Operating status
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
2,6
0,9
0,5
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
input quantity R
oper. mode BO
Brief description
X
M
Y
QF
R output quantity
BO no available memory
Mode of operation
The function block is a read write memory for a 4 byte input quantity. The
quantity to be saved, for example, it must be available after a power
failure, is connected at input X.
The following block modes are set at input M.
Write mode (M = 1):
Input quantity X is available at Y. Further, X is entered into the batterybuffered memory area of the CPU module. The previous value is then
overwritten.
6-46
Logic blocks
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
Mode
(default: 0)
Output quantity
(default: 0.0)
QF
No free memory
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
4,1
1,4
0,7
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
binary value BO
oper. mode BO
Brief description
I
M
Q
QF
BO binary value
BO no available memory
BOOL type function block to save a binary quantity in the batterybuffered area of the RAM on a CPU module.
function blocks SAV_I, SAV_B, SAV_D and SAV fulfill the same
function. They only differ by the data type used.
Mode of operation
The function block is a read write memory for one binary quantity.
The quantity to be saved, for example, it must be available after a power
failure, is connected at input I.
The following block modes are set at input M.
Write mode (M = 1):
Binary quantity I is available at Q. Further, I is entered into the battery
buffered memory area of the CPU module. The previous value is then
overwritten.
Read mode (M = 0):
The last binary quantity saved in the write mode is available at output
Q. If there is an error in the battery-buffered memory area, then the
block changes-over into the write mode.
6-47
Logic blocks
I/O
I
Binary value
(default: 0)
Mode
(default: 0)
Binary value
(default: 0)
QF
No free memory
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
4,0
1,3
0,7
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
input quantity D
operating mode BO
Brief description
X
M
Y
QF
D output quantity
BO no available memory
Mode of operation
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0)
Mode
(default: 0)
Output quantity
(default: 0)
QF
No free memory
(default: 0)
6-48
Logic blocks
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
3,8
1,3
0,7
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
input quantity I
operating mode BO
Brief description
X
M
Y
QF
I output quantity
BO no available memory
Mode of operation
The function block is a read write memory for one word. The quantity to
be saved, for example, it must be available after a power failure, is
connected at input X.
The following block modes are set at input M:
Write mode (M = 1):
Input quantity X is available at Y. Further, X is entered into the batterybuffered memory area of the CPU module. The previous value is then
overwritten.
Read mode (M = 0):
The last quantity saved in the write mode is available at output Y. If
there is an error in the battery buffered memory area, then the block
changes over into the write mode.
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0)
Mode
(default: 0)
Output quantity
(default: 0)
QF
No free memory
(default: 0)
6-49
Logic blocks
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
3,5
1,2
0,6
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Input value R
Operating mode BO
Brief description
X
M
Y
VTM
FTM
MTM
QF
R Output value
BO Valid TSAVE memory
DI Free TSAVE memory
DI Max. TSAVE memory
BO No free memory
This function block is used to save a value in the area that is backedup using a battery (TSAVE) of the working memory on a CPU module.
The value that has been saved is also kept even after the user
program is downloaded again - as long as the battery buffers the
memory or the delete ID is explicitly set when loading the user
program.
The blocks TSAV, TSAV_B, TSAV_I and TSAV_D fulfill the same
function. They only differ by the data type that is used at connections
X and Y.
Mode of operation
6-50
Logic blocks
I/O
default
X
Input value
Mode
Output value
A 1 at the VTM indicates that the last value saved in the TSAVE memory, has been
again found and is valid.
A 0 at the VTM indicates that the TSAVE memory no longer contains a saved value.
0.0 is output at Q as replacement value.
FTM Free TSAVE memory
FTM indicates the number of bytes that are still free in the TSAVE memory. It should be
noted that every
TSAV block requires a specific amount of the memory for administration purposes.
MT
M
QF
No free memory
MTM indicates the size of the TSAVE memory in bytes. This corresponds to the data in
HW Config (CPU Properties/addresses/ size of the TSAVE area) minus the
component of the memory required for administration purposes.
Configuring data
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Can be configured in
Alarm tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
4.0
2,4
0,3
6-51
Logic blocks
6.9
Special functions
flash duration TS
enable BO
Brief description
T
EN
BO flash output
Mode of operation
The function block sets its output alternatively to 1 and 0 in the rhythm of
period T if input EN = 1.
Output Q = 0 if the enable input EN = 0.
T is the on and off period.
Block diagram
EN
Timing diagram
EN
1
0
1
0
Flash duration
(default: 0ms)
EN
Enable
(default: 0)
Flash output
(default: 0)
6-52
Logic blocks
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
3,2
1,1
0,6
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
status word W
flash duration TS
IS
T
QS
Brief description
Mode of operation
The function block sets all of the bits of the input status word IS, which
have the value 1, alternatively to 1 and 0 in the output status word QS in
the rhythm of period T.
T is the on and off period.
Block diagram
IS
QS
I/O
IS
Status Word
(default: 16#0000)
Flash duration
(default: 0ms)
QS
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
6,8
2,2
1,1
6-53
Logic blocks
delay time in ms TS
activate delay time BO
synchronizing BO
Brief description
DT
ISE
ISY
QF
The BOOL type function block is used to change the delay time and to restart the synchronization, configured in HWConfig, after it has failed. It
only acts on synchronized CPU modules.
The delay time is limited to min. 0.01 ms.
Mode of operation
Delay time:
The function block attempts to change, the delay time specified by
HWConfig, to the value specified at block input DT, if the input at ISE
changes from a 0 to a 1.
If the delay time, requested at DT, is the same or longer than the basic
sampling time, configured with HWConfig minus 0.01 ms, then the delay
time is not changed to the requested value. In this case, block output QF
is set to 1 to indicate the error.
If input ISY changes from 0 to 1, an attempt is made to take the basic
clock again from the source configured in HWConfig (if required, with the
configured delay time).
Synchronization:
If synchronization cannot be restarted, because the source is still faulted,
then there is no cyclic processing for four basic sampling times; after this,
"emergency operation" with the internal basic clock cycle, is used.
The function block may only be configured once per CPU module. It can
be configured in any sampling time. A long sampling time is
recommended due to its low update potential.
I/O
DT
Delay time in ms
(default: 0.01ms)
ISE
(default: 0)
ISY
Re-activate synchronization
(default: 0)
QF
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
6-54
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
5,3
1,8
0,9
Logic blocks
input pulse BO
QP
QN
BO output pulse
BO output pulse
Brief description
Edge evaluator
Mode of operation
The function block identifies a signal change at input I. For a rising edge
(01) at input I, output QP is set to 1 for sampling time TA.
For a falling edge (10) at input I, output QN is set to 1 for one sampling
time TA.
Initialization
Initialization defines the initial status for the first cyclic execution.
If input I receives the value 1 from a previous block, then the function
block cannot identify a rising edge at the first cyclic execution.
If input I receives the value 0 from a previous block at initialization, then
the function block cannot identify a falling edge at the first cyclic
execution.
Block diagram
QP
I
Timing diagram
QN
QP
1
0
TA
TA
1
0
TA
QN
1
0
6-55
Logic blocks
I/O
I
Input pulse
(default: 0)
QP
Output pulse
(default: 0)
QN
Output pulse
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
3,0
1,0
0,5
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
IS
EN
QN
Brief description
Mode of operation
The function block sets, at output QS, the bits, which after the block was
enabled (EN=1), first changed at IS.
All of the bits at output QS are at 0 as long as EN=0.
The status diagram illustrates a case, where the enable signal was
provided at an instant at which status Word ISn-1 is present.
Status diagram
ISn-1
1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
QSn-1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Enable = 1
ISn
QSn
1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
Monitored status word (16 bits)
6-56
Logic blocks
I/O
IS
(default: 16#0000)
EN
Enable
(default: 0)
QS
(default: 16#0000)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
2,5
0,8
0,4
6.9.6 LVM Limit value monitor with hysteresis, 2 directions (BOOL type)
Symbol
LVM
input quantity
average interval value
interval limit
hysteresis
Brief description
R
R
R
R
X
M
L
HY
QU
QM
QL
Mode of operation
Block diagram
HY
QU
QM
QL
6-57
Logic blocks
Transfer
characteristic
1
QU
0
1
QM
0
1
QL
0
M-L
HY
M+L
HY
I/O
X
Input quantity
(default: 0.0)
(default: 0.0)
Interval limit
(default: 0.0)
HY
Hysteresis
(default: 0.0)
QU
(default: 0)
QM
(default: 0)
QL
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
4,9
1,6
0,8
6-58
REAL type function block which is used as dummy block (No Operation).
Additional information, e.g. symbol, mode of operation, I/O and
technical data are provided in the corresponding online help.
Logic blocks
Real type function block which is used as dummy block (No Operation).
Additional information, e.g. symbol, mode of operation, I/O and
technical data are provided in the corresponding online help.
6-59
Logic blocks
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
EN
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
Brief description
Mode of operation
For block inputs I1 to I8, which have binary value 1, for EN=1, the input
with the highest priority is switched through to the appropriate output Q1
to Q8. The priority rating is specified by the number of inputs I1 to I8. I1
has the highest priority and I8 the lowest priority.
If an enable signal is present, and if all inputs are 0, then output Q is set
to 1.
EN and Q can be used to cascade the priority evaluation blocks.
Cascading example
a.)
b.)
EN
EN
Q1
.
.
.
.
Q8
I1
.
.
.
.
I8
EN
I1
.
.
.
.
I8
Q
Q1
.
.
.
.
Q8
Q1
.
.
.
.
Q8
I1
.
.
.
.
I8
EN
I1
.
.
.
.
I8
Q1
.
.
.
.
Q8
Q
Example a.) shows how an 8 bit priority evaluator has been extended to
become a 16 bit priority evaluator. The next priority evaluator is only
enabled, if inputs I1 to I8 of the previous priority evaluator are 0. This
circuit is suitable to evaluate the priority of a status Word.
6-60
Logic blocks
Output = 1
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
EN
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
I/O
I1
...
...
I8
(default: 0)
EN
Enable
(default: 0)
Q1
(default: 0)
...
...
Q8
(default: 0)
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
(default: 0)
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
13,7
4,5
2,3
6-61
Logic blocks
SH
status word W
shift number I
IS
XD
QS
QC
QZ
W output quantity
BO last shifted bit
BO IXDI > 15
Brief description
The Word type function block shifts a status Word, bitwise to the left or
right.
Mode of operation
The function block shifts the status word, available at input IS, bitwise by
a number of positions, specified at input XD.
When shifting newly created positions, in the output quantity, QS, zeros
are added, independent of the shift direction.
The last bit shifted-out is output at QC.
For XD = 0, QC is always 0.
For |XD| > 15 is always QC = 0, QS = 0, QZ = 1.
Shifting the left
Example:
XD = 2; IS = 15
-> QS = 60; QC = 0
0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 1 1 1 1 0 0
XD = -2; IS = 15
-> QS = 3 (remainder dropped); QC = 1
0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 1 1
XD positions are
lost
6-62
Logic blocks
I/O
IS
Status word
(default:16#0000)
XD
(default: 0)
QS
Output quantity
(default: 16#0000)
QC
(default: 0)
QZ
XD>15
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
3,7
1,2
0,6
6-63
Logic blocks
Brief description
BO
BO
BO
BO
TS
TMB
STA
CON
RTM
LU
AI
Y
GV interrupt ID
TS runtime
Mode of operation
The function block uses one of two hardware timers to initiate processor
interrupts. The timer and the processor interrupt processing is defined by
specifying interrupt ID C1 or C2.
The processor interrupt processing is started in an interrupt control task,
if the time, set at block input LU, has expired.
The function block differentiates between two operating modes, edge and
level triggering, which are configured using input TMB. The timer is reset
and started:
if TMB is 0, if a signal at input STA changes from 0 to 1 (edge
triggering) or,
if TMB is 1, if a 1 is available at input STA (signal level triggering).
For signal level triggering, the characteristics of the block are influenced
by the status of input RTM (retrigger mode):
if RTM is 0, the timer is only re-started, if it is not already running. This
therefore guarantees that a run time which is already started, will also
be reached.
if RTM is 1, the timer is also started, if it is already running. If the
sampling time, in which the block is configured, is shorter than the
time set at LU, then the run time is never reached.
The run time is held when the signal at input STA changes from 1 to 0.
6-64
Logic blocks
Depending on the binary quantity at input CON when the timer is started,
there are two operating modes:
Modes
for CON equals 1 after the run limit value LU is reached, a processor
interrupt is generated and the timer is re-started.
for CON equals 0, after the run time limit value LU has been reached,
a processor interrupt is generated. The timer is not re-started.
The run time ( 0.0 <= Y <= LU) is always available at output Y.
I/O
TMB
STA
Start/stop
(default: 0)
CON
Operating mode
(default: 0)
RTM
(default: 0)
LU
(default: 0ms)
AI
Interrupt ID
(no default)
Run time
(default: 0ms)
Configuringdata
(default: 0)
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
4,0
1,3
0,7
6-65
Logic blocks
Brief description
BO
BO
BO
BO
INV
POS
NEG
INI
AI
Q
GV interrupt ID
BO output quantity
Mode of operation
Initialization
6-66
Logic blocks
I/O
INV
(default: 0)
POS
(default: 0)
NEG
INI
Initialization
(default: 0)
AI
Interrupt ID
(no default)
Output quantity
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
5,0
1,7
0,9
6-67
Logic blocks
initiate interrupt BO
trigger mode, both edges BO
I
TMB
AI
GV interrupt ID
Brief description
Mode of operation
The function block immediately starts a process interrupt in an interruptcontrolled task of the CPU.
This process interrupt processing is defined by the interrupt ID at output
AI. One of eight interrupt IDs S1 to S8 are possible.
Processing is started as a function of input TMB:
for TMB = 0, if input I changes from 0 to 1 or.
for TMB = 1, if any change takes place at input I.
I/O
I
Initiate interrupt
TMB
AI
Interrupt identification
Configuringdata
6-68
(default: 0)
(no default)
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
4,0
1,3
0,7
Service-/diagnostic blocks
7.1
Symbol
ASI
Q
Brief description
NOTE
Mode of operation
BO Acknowledge Output
The BOOL type function block is integrated in the @SIMD1 and @SIMD2
system charts.
This function block is only to be used for diagnostic purposes and should
not be used in the user program.
As long as the acknowledge button on the CPU module is depressed,
acknowledge output Q = 1.
I/O
Q
Acknowledge output
Configuringdata
(default: 0)
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Systemmode
Normal mode
Special features
4,2
1,4
0,7
7-1
Service-/diagnostic blocks
7.2
Symbol
EPE
key value I
erase BO
KEY
ERA
EPE
BO EEPROM is empty
Brief description
Mode of operation
The function block deletes the change memory of the module on which it
is configured.
The change memory is deleted, if
deletion is requested with a signal change from 0 to 1 at input ERA,
while
code 165 is available at the KEY input.
Thus, in the sampling time before initiating a delete, the input
combination KEY = 165 and ERA = 0 must be set-up.
At each sampling time, even if a delete has not been requested, it is
checked as to whether the change memory is deleted (still or already). If
this is the case, a 1 at output EPE indicates: the change memory is
empty.
If the change memory was not able to be (completely) deleted in the
sampling time, in which delete was requested, then delete is
automatically repeated in the following sampling times. EPE = 1 indicates
that the change memory was actually completely deleted.
In the INIT operating mode of the function block, if the input combination
KEY = 165 and ERA = 0, are present, this is ignored. Thus, in the
subsequent RUN operating mode, at first KEY must be set up to be 165,
ERA = 0, an then immediately afterwards, KEY = 165, ERA = 1, to delete
the change memory.
INIT operating
mode
I/O
KEY
Code
(Default: 0)
ERA
Delete
(Default: 0)
EPE
(Default: 1)
Configuringdata
7-2
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
6,7
2,2
1,1
yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Service-/diagnostic blocks
7.3
Symbol
PNO
Y
Brief description
NOTE
Mode of operation
I processor number
I/O
Y
CPU number
Configuringdata
(default: 1)
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
5,0
1,7
0,9
7-3
Service-/diagnostic blocks
7.4
Symbol
PSL
simulated comput. load T1
simulated comput. load T2
simulated comput. load T3
simulated comput. load T4
simulated comput. load T5
TS
TS
TS
TS
TS
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
QW
R
R
R
R
R
BO
meas. value:utilization T1
meas. value:utilization T2
meas. value:utilization T3
meas. value:utilization T4
meas. value:utilization T5
Alarm: simulated comput. time
Brief description
The REAL type function block is used to measure the utilization of five
cyclic tasks. There is also the possibility to simulate the effect of
additional computation load in the tasks.
Mode of operation
The function block determines the time between the start and end of a
cyclic task (run time). This run time is divided by the sampling time,
configured for the particular task in order to compute the utilization level
T1 to T5.
The utilization levels are output at Y1 to Y5. Values of less than 1 at
these outputs indicate that the particular task can be computed in the
sampling time configured.
If the output values Y1 to Y5 are greater than 1, this indicates that the
associated task is too large to be computed within one sampling cycle.
For example, an output is 1.3 which means that the associated task
would only be completed after approximately 30% of the second
sampling cycle after it was originally started. Thus, the task can only be
re-started at each second sampling cycle, i.e. sampling time failures
occur.
In this case, the task sampling time should be increased or the scope of
the task reduced; i.e. by shifting several blocks from this task into a
slower one.
NOTE
7-4
Service-/diagnostic blocks
I/O
T1-T5
(default: 0ms)
Y1-Y5
(default: 0.0)
QW
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
36,6
12,1
6,1
7-5
Service-/diagnostic blocks
7.5
Symbol
RFG
amplitude
change per samling time
run-up time
on-button
R
R
TS
BO
X
A
T
I
R ramp function
Brief description
Mode of operation
Yn = Yn-1 + A
Block diagram
7-6
Service-/diagnostic blocks
Timing diagram
Y
X
T(X) > T
Fig. 1
T
T(X)
Y
X
Yn-Yn-1
Fig. 2
T(X) = T
TA
T = T(X)
Y
X
T(X) < T
Fig. 3
T(X)T
Y(T) = X: T(X) = T
X Yn - Yn-1
A
=
=
T
TA
TA
In this case, TA is the sampling time. With as the number of sampling
intervals, then
T = TA =
X
TA
A
7-7
Service-/diagnostic blocks
I/O
X
Amplitude
(default: 0.0)
(default: 0.0)
Ramp-up time
(default: 0ms)
On button
(default: 0)
Ramp function
(default: 0.0)
Configuringdata
7-8
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
2,7
0,9
0,5
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Service-/diagnostic blocks
7.6
Symbol
SER
Coupling module name
Address parameter
No. of PG
No. of OS
Telegram ormat
Brief description
GV
S
I
I
I
CTS
US
NPG
NOS
TLF
QTS
YTS
BO Block status
I Status display
Function block for start up, service and diagnostics, e.g. using the CFC in
the test mode.
The SER block is not required to connect CFC to the local CPU
interface. This functionality is included in the system and does not have
to be configured!
Function block to control and monitor I/O on the CPU using display
devices (e.g. SIMATIC OPs, WinCC etc.), which were provided within the
scope of the configuring.
The function block processes and responds to the tasks sent from the
display devices. If permanently defined response times are required for
these tasks, then default value 0 should be kept at input NOS, and, in
addition, function block S7OS should be configured (as it is not possible
to assign a channel to a display device, this means that the response
time is not guaranteed).
Mode of operation
7-9
Service-/diagnostic blocks
I/O
CTS
Initialization input for configured coupling module names. Module designator (and
optionally, connectors X01, X02 or X03), to which the coupling partner is connected.
(Default: -)
US
Initialization input for address data. The data (entry) consists of a channel name,
comprising max. 6 characters, and depending on the coupling time, of one or two address
stages.
(Default: Empty string)
NOS
Initialization input for the number of displayed devices, which access to the CPU.
(Default: 0)
NPG
Initialization input for the number of CFC PCs, which access the CPU.
(Default: 2)
TLF
Telegram form: The net data size (PDU length) of a telegram can be defined here:
TLF = 0 the largest possible PDU length is automatically set
TLF = 1 PDU length = 112 byte
TLF = 2 PDU length = 240 byte
TLF = 3 PDU length = 480 byte
TLF = 4 PDU length = 960 byte
(Default: 0)
QTS
Output to display the correct block initialization (QTS=1). For QTS=0, the block becomes
inactive after a communications error signal has been entered.
(Default: 0)
YTS
Output to display all temporary faults, irreparable errors and channel initialization errors of
the data interface. For values at YTS, refer to:
D7-SYS online help "Dialog box, general". (press key F1 in the CFC and call-up the topic
"Dialog box, general" under "CFC for SIMADYN D")
(Default: 0)
Configuringdata
7-10
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
2,0
0,7
0,4
--
Can be configured in
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Service-/diagnostic blocks
7.7
Symbol
SQG
amplitude
off period
on period
on button
Brief description
R
TS
TS
BO
X
T1
T2
I
R square-wave pulses
REAL type function block to generate square wave pulses with adjustable
amplitude,
period,
pulse/period (mark-to-space ratio - or on/off times).
Mode of operation
Block diagram
T1
T2
Timing diagram
1
0
T2
T2
X
In %
Y
In %
T1
T1
7-11
Service-/diagnostic blocks
I/O
X
Amplitude
(default: 0.0)
T1
Off period
(default: 0ms)
T2
On period
(default: 0ms)
On button
(default: 0)
Square-wave pulses
(default: 0.0)
Configuringdata
7-12
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
2,2
0,7
0,4
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Service-/diagnostic blocks
7.8
Symbol
SQGB
off-period TS
on period TS
on button BO
T1
T2
I
BO square-wave pulses
Brief description
BOOL type function block to generate a pulse sequence (pulse train) with
adjustable period and pause duration.
Mode of operation
Block diagram
T1
T2
Timing diagram
1
0
T2
1
0
T2
T1
T1
7-13
Service-/diagnostic blocks
I/O
T1
Off period
(default: 0ms)
T2
On period
(default: 0ms)
On button
(default: 0)
Square-wave pulses
(default: 0)
Configuringdata
7-14
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
3,1
1,0
0,5
--
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in:
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Service-/diagnostic blocks
7.9
Symbol
SSD
input value W
Brief description
NOTE
Mode of operation
IS
This WORD type function block is integrated in the @SIMD system FP.
This function block should only be used for diagnostic purposes and
should not be used in the user program.
The function block outputs the least-significant 7-bits of the input value on
the 7-segment display of the CPU module.
I/O
IS
Input value
Configuringdata
(default: 16#0000)
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Systemmode
Normal mode
Special features
4,6
1,5
0,8
7-15
Service-/diagnostic blocks
Brief description
X
T
I
R step function
REAL type function block to generate test functions (step function) with
adjustable
amplitude
delay time
Mode of operation
Block diagram
Timing diagram
1
0
X
In %
Y
In %
I/O
X
Amplitude
Delay time
(default: 0ms)
On button
(default: 0)
Step function
(default: 0.0)
7-16
(default: 0.0)
Service-/diagnostic blocks
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
2,7
0,9
0,5
7-17
Service-/diagnostic blocks
Brief description
NO
IAC
Y
QF
Mode of operation
Assignment table
Number NO
First error
1 word
1 word
Initialization error
1 word
1 word
4 words
HW monitoring
4 words
User error
1 word
1 word
1 word
4 words
10
4 words
11
4 words
12
4 words
13
4 words
14
4 words
15
4 words
16
4 words
17
4 words
18
Reserved
7-18
Service-/diagnostic blocks
19
Reserved
20
Reserved
21
Reserved
22
Reserved
23
Reserved
24
1 word
25
1 word
26
1 word
27
1 word
28
1 word
29
1 word
30
1 word
31
1 word
32
1 word
33
1 word
34
1 word
35
1 word
36
1 word
37
1 word
38
1 word
39
1 word
40
1 word
41
1 word
42
1 word
43
1 word
44
1 word
45
1 word
46
1 word
47
1 word
48
1 word
I/O
NO
(default: 0)
IAC
Acknowledge signal
(default: 0)
(default: 16#0000)
QF
(default: 0)
7-19
Service-/diagnostic blocks
Configuringdata
7-20
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
5,3
1,8
0,9
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Service-/diagnostic blocks
Brief description
NO
IAC
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
QF
W
W
W
W
BO
Mode of operation
Assignment table
Number NO
First error
1 word
1 word
Initialization error
1 word
1 word
4 words
HW monitoring
4 words
User error
1 word
1 word
1 word
4 words
10
4 words
11
4 words
12
4 words
13
4 words
7-21
Service-/diagnostic blocks
14
4 words
15
4 words
16
4 words
17
4 words
18
Reserved
19
Reserved
20
Reserved
21
Reserved
22
Reserved
23
Reserved
24
1 word
25
1 word
26
1 word
27
1 word
28
1 word
29
1 word
30
1 word
31
1 word
32
1 word
33
1 word
34
1 word
35
1 word
36
1 word
37
1 word
38
1 word
39
1 word
40
1 word
41
1 word
42
1 word
43
1 word
44
1 word
45
1 word
46
1 word
47
1 word
48
1 word
I/O
NO
(default: 0)
IAC
Acknowledge signal
(default: 0)
Y1-Y4
(default: 16#0000)
QF
(default: 0)
7-22
Service-/diagnostic blocks
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
8,2
2,7
1,4
7-23
Service-/diagnostic blocks
IS
Brief description
WORD type function block to save user defined error statuses in the
system error field.
Mode of operation
This function block reads the "user error field", "ORs" it with input ES and
writes the result of this operation back into the user error field.
The user error field is integrated in the system error field and can be
read-out and reset using function blocks SYF1 and SYF4.
When a user defined error status occurs for the first time, then bit 11 of
the first error field is set to 1 by this function block, if, previously no bit of
the first error field was set.
I/O
IS
Configuringdata
7-24
(default: 16#0000)
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
--
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
2,0
0,7
0,4
SFC blocks
8.1
Control block
Symbol
SFC
SFC name S
Block enable BO
Enable manual changeover BO
Changeover, automatic BO
Start SFC chart BO
Stop SFC chart BO
Hold SFC chart BO
Re-start SFC chart BO
Switching mode transition BO
Reset SFC chart BO
Command output BO
Cyclic operation BO
Time monitoring BO
Step error acknowledgment BO
Operator acknowledgment BO
Brief description
SFC
EN
EMO
AO
RUN
STP
BRE
RES
SMT
RST
SOT
CYC
TMC
SFQ
TOQ
QTS
QFA
QMO
QCT
QRC
QRU
QAB
QHT
QTM
QID
QSM
QSF
QTO
SRT
RRT
BO
I
BO
I
I
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
I
BO
BO
DI
DI
Block active
Error word
Actual mode
Number of chart runs
Number of proc. ops. in the actual chart run
Chart status active
Chart status abort
Chart status hold
Chart status end
Chart status off
Switching mode
Step error
Request transition condition
Step run time in ms
Remaining step runtime in ms
An SFC chart is checked and controlled using the CFC control block.
This allows a SFC chart to be influenced by CFC charts. The status of an
SFC chart can be interrogated and its run properties influenced using the
SFC control block. The SFC control block is inserted in the CFC chart
from the block catalog and inter-connected and parameterized.
The SFC control block can, just like other function blocks of the CFC
chart, be used in the properties dialog box of the steps and transitions of
the SFC chart. This means, that other SFC charts can also be controlled
using the SFC control block of an SFC chart.
The SFC control block is not a control block in the sense of S7, but
instead, is an SFC function block which must be configured for
every SFC chart.
The SFC control block carries the SFC functionality. Using the name,
configured at input SFC, it searches for the associated SFC chart and
interprets this as program. This means, that for the run position of the
SFC chart, only the block position in the task is decisive.
In order to avoid confusion regarding the run-time properties of the SFC
chart, you should
8-1
SFC blocks
In the initialization phase, the SFC control block defines the SFC chart
assigned via input SFC. If the SFC chart cannot be defined, or if an
additional error occurs in the chart initialization, output QTS is set to 0.
The error word is simultaneously set at output QFA.
An SFC chart can be used in the Manual or Automatic modes (also refer
to SFC online help under "Operating modes"). In the Automatic mode, the
SFC control block is responsible in controlling the SFC chart, and in the
Manual mode, the operator control and visualization system (HMI). In the
Manual mode, several inputs of the SFC control block are not evaluated
(also refer under I/O).
The SFC chart is processed in the normal mode. An SFC chart can also
be in the "Active", "Abort", "Hold", "Term" or "Idle" statuses (also refer to
the SFC online help under "Operating statuses"). Appropriate state
transitions can be made in the Automatic mode using the RUN, STP,
BRE, RES and RST inputs.
If the chart state is "Active", then the steps are processed. One state
transition of the chart is evaluated and initiated, or if required the
transition to the next steps, per sampling cycle. This means, the transition
belonging to the active steps. The then active steps are only re-evaluated
in the next sampling cycle.
I/O
SFC
(Default: Empty
string)
EN
Process block
(Default: 1)
(Default: 1)
(Default: 0)
Automatic mode
With a rising edge, the SFC chart goes into the Automatic mode. It can
only be set back to Manual via the operator control and visualization
system.
RUN
(Default: 0)
8-2
SFC blocks
STP
(Default: 0)
For a rising edge, the chart goes into the "Abort" state (this is only
checked in the "Active" state).
This connection is only evaluated in the Automatic mode.
BRE
(Default: 0)
For a rising edge, the chart goes into the "Hold" state (this is only
checked in the "Active" state).
This connection is only evaluated in the Automatic mode.
RES
(Default: 0)
For a rising edge, the chart goes into the "Active" state and starts to
process the starting step (this is only checked in the "Hold" state).
This connection is only evaluated in the Automatic mode.
SMT
(Default: 1)
If this input is 1, then the block operates in the automatic mode with
switching mode transition (T).
If SMT=0, the block operates with switching mode control with a stepspecific acknowledgment by the operator (T/T and B).
This connection is only evaluated in the Automatic mode.
RST
(Default: 0)
For a rising edge, the chart goes into the "Idle" state (this is only checked
in the "Hold", "Abort" and "Term" states).
This input is only evaluated in the Automatic mode.
SOT
Command output
(Default: 1)
Cyclic mode
(Default: 1)
Time monitoring
(Default: 0)
(Default: 0)
Operator acknowledgment
(Default: 0)
Block active
QTS=0: Block not active
QTS=1: Block active
8-3
SFC blocks
QFA
QMO
No error
No memory
Program too large Reduce the program size
2-14
15
16
17
18-31
32
33
Actual mode
QMO=0: Automatic
QMO=1: Manual
QCT
QRC
QRU
QAB
QHT
QTM
QID
QSM
Switching mode
0: Step control with transition (SSMT)
1: Step control with transition or operator control (SSMTOB)
2: Step control with transition and operator control (SSMTUB)
3: Step control with operator intervention (SSMB)
4: Step group control (SGS)
8-4
SFC blocks
QSF
Step error
QSF=0: No step error
QSF=1: Step error
QTO
Operator request
QTO=0: No operator request
QTO=1: Operator request
SRT
RRT
Note
The commands are assigned a priority regarding their I/O position. If two
commands are simultaneously present, then the command with the
higher priority applies.
The following table indicates with which priority the I/O are checked, if the
chart is in a specific state:
I/O Priority
Configuring data
Chart status
Active
Abort
Hold
Term
STP
RUN
RUN
RUN
BRE
RES
RES
RST
RST
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Generic FB
No
Yes
75
25
12,5
Can be configured in
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
8-5
SFC blocks
8.2
Symbol
SFCSI
SFC name S
Step name S
Step error acknowledgment BO
SFC
SN
SFQ
QF
YFC
ST
BO Group error
W Error display
I Step state
SGS
ZS
MIN
MAX
ACT
REM
IUx
ITx
IDx
ISx
ZUx
ZTx
ZDx
ZSx
EUx
ETx
EDx
ESx
BO
BO
TS
TS
TS
TS
BO
I
DI
DI
BO
I
DI
DI
BO
I
DI
DI
Acknowledgment
Target step
Min. run time
Max. run time
Actual run time
Run time up to the max. run time
Init: Assignment x configured
Init: Data type, assignment x
Init: Value, target assignment x
Init: Value source, assignment x
Cycl: Assignment x configured
Cycl: Data type, assignment x
Cycl: Value, target assignment x
Cycl: Value source, assignment x
End: Assignment x configured
End: Data type, assignment x
End: Value, target assignment x
End: Value source, assignment x
Mode of operation
In the initialization phase, the SFC control block defines the SFC chart
assigned via the SFC I/O. If the SFC chart cannot be defined, or if an
additional error occurs in the chart initialization, output QF is set to 1. The
error display at output YFC is simultaneously set.
If the block was correctly initialized (output QF to 0), then it switches the
actual step data to the outputs in each cycle.
8-6
SFC blocks
I/O
SFC
(Default: Empty
string)
SN
Step name
(Default: Empty
string)
SFQ
(Default: 0)
For a positive edge, a step error acknowledgment is set for the selected
step.
QF
Group error
QF=0: There is no block error present
QF=1: Block error present (error, refer to connection YFC)
YFC
ST
No error
No memory
Program too large Reduce the program size
2-14
15
16
17
18-31
32
33
Step state
The step state can assume the following values:
0
1
2
3
4
(Default: Empty
string)
SGS
Acknowledgment
(also refer to the SFC online help)
(Default: Empty
string)
ZS
Target step
(Default: 0)
8-7
SFC blocks
MIN
MAX
ACT
(Default: Empty
string)
REM
(Default: Empty
string)
IUx
(Default: 0)
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
81
ISx
ZUx
(Default: 0)
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
81
8-8
SFC blocks
ZDx
ZSx
EUx
(Default: 0)
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
81
ESx
8-9
SFC blocks
Configuring data
8.3
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
30
10
5,0
Generic FB
No
Yes
Can be configured in
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
Symbol
SFCTI
SFC name S
Transition name S
Operator acknowledgment BO
SFC
TN
BQ
QF
YFC
ACT
QTO
BE
TR
LR
FR
Ux
Dx
Cx
Lx
Rx
BO
W
BO
BO
I
DI
DI
DI
BO
I
I
DI
DI
Group error
Fault display
Transition active
Operator request
Logical combination of the comps.
Actual results
Results of the last cycle
Results for an error condition
Comparison x configured
Data type comparison x
Comparison type, comparison x
Left operand, comparison x
Right operand, comparison x
Brief description
Mode of operation
In the initialization phase, the SFC control block defines the SFC chart
assigned via input SFC. If the SFC chart cannot be defined, or if an
additional error occurs in the chart initialization, output QF is set to 1. The
error word is simultaneously set at output YFC.
If the block was correctly initialized (connection QF to 0), the block
switches the actual transition data to the outputs in each cycle.
I/O
8-10
SFC blocks
SFC
(Default: Empty
string)
TN
Transition name
(Default: Empty
string)
TOQ
Operator acknowledgment
(Default: 0)
Group error
QF=0: There is no block error
QF=1: Block error present, code referred to connection YFC
YFC
ACT
No error
No memory
Program too large Reduce the program size
2-14
15
16
17
18-31
32
33
Transition active
ACT=0: the transition is not active
ACT=1: the transition is active (is evaluated)
QTO
Operator request
QTO=0: the transition does not wait for an operator acknowledgment
QTO=1: the transition waits for an operation acknowledgment
BE
Boolean expressions
Structure of the Boolean expressions (logic operations):
8-11
SFC blocks
E1
E5
E2
E7
E3
E6
E4
There are a total of up to seven Boolean logic operations (E1 to E7) to
generate the overall interlocking result. Each Boolean logic operation can
assume the values AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each Boolean structure is
represented by a 2-bit value, in which the comparison value is coded as
follows:
0
1
2
3
AND
OR
NAND
NOR
The comparison types are combined, in turn, in a bit vector, which has
the following structure:
Bit 0,1 Logic operation E7
Bit 2,3 Logic operation E5
Bit 4,5 Logic operation E1
Bit 6,7 Logic operation E2
Bit 8,9 Logic operation E6
Bit 10,11
Logic operation E3
Bit 12,13
Logic operation E4
TR
8-12
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
SFC blocks
LR
Bit 15
Bit 16
Bit 17
Bit 18
Bit 19
Bit 20
Bit 21
Bit 22
FR
Ux
Dx
Cx
Less than
Less than equal to
No equal to
Equal to
Greater than
Greater than equal to
Rx
8-13
SFC blocks
Configuring data
8-14
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
30
10
5,0
Generic FB
No
Yes
Can be configured in
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
GMC blocks
9.1
9.1.1
Overview
Many machines, especially in the production and packaging areas, can
be classified according to typical drive-specific tasks, such as
Positioning
Referencing
Aligning
Catching-up/shutting-down
Cams
Engaging/disengaging
Gearing
The blocks are included in the FBSGMC library that, from Version V5.2
onwards, is part of the scope of supply of D7-SYS. This library must be
added into the CFC using the following menu item of the STEP7 project:
HW platform
9-1
GMC blocks
9.1.1.1
Master
value
generation
Setpoint conditioning for all slave axes. This involves all of the drives
whose position setpoint (position reference value) is derived from the
master setpoint (master reference value). In this case, it is not
necessary that the slave axis is continually in synchronism with the
master axis. It can be "coupled-in or coupled-out" at any time.
Position
Structure of the
"speed interface"
Speed setpoint 1
Speed
Position
sensing
1
Cl.-loop
position
control
1
Speed setpoint n
Position setpoint (position reference value) n
Structure of the
"position interface"
Fig. 9-1
Control n
Position
sensing
n
Cl.-loop
speed
control
1
Cl.-loop
speed
control
n
Cl.-loop
position
control
n
9-2
GMC blocks
9-3
GMC blocks
9.1.2
9.1.2.1
Basics
Position and speed characteristics
For motion control drive applications, a differentiation is made between
drives with a linear axis and drives with a rotary axis.
For a linear axis the position moves between two natural mechanical
limits (e.g.: A trolley for a crane, valve). Position overflows cannot occur.
A linear axis connected to motion control blocks is designated by an axis
cycle AZ = 0.
Linear axis
Rotary axis
For a rotary axis (modulo axis), at a constant speed, periodic position
overflow conditions occur - whereby the position value runs-up from 0 to
the axis cycle and then returns to 0. It needn't necessarily involve a
rotating system. For instance, if the position represents the position of a
product on a conveyor belt, then an axis cycle corresponds to the length
of a product. The position is a measure for how a current operating step
is progressing - for instance, a printing operation. If the position exceeds
the axis cycle, then the operation is repeated for the next product.
Most of the applications in the production or packaging area involve
rotary axis applications. This is because a continuous product flow must
be processed. In this case, continuous position steps occur due to the
axis cycle overflow. In order that these position steps are not transferred
to the closed-loop position control, the steps in the position setpoint
(position reference value) and position actual value must be
synchronized.
Negative speed
Positive speed
AC
Position
Setpoint
(reference
value)
Actual
value
Axis cycle
AC = COR
POV
t
NOV
t
Position
error
Fig. 9-2
The overflow signals POV (positive position overflow) and NOV (negative
position overflow) as well as the correction value COR - by which the
position has jumped - are used for synchronization.
9-4
GMC blocks
Setpoint generation
Position controller
Speed setpoint
Position setpoint
(ref. value)
To the speed
controller
COR
POV
Position sensing
NOV
Fig. 9-3
Caution: Loss of
POV, NOV
Position
encoder
The synchronism between the setpoint generation and the actual value
conditioning is just as important as the processing sequence. The
overflow signals POV and NOV are only present for the duration of a
processing cycle. If the position sensing is not processed in this cycle,
then the information about the position step is lost, and the drive
executes a (significant) mechanical equalization motion by one axis
cycle!
If a non-synchronous communications system is located between the
setpoint generation and the position sensing, then the position correction
must be conditioned in such a way that no corrections are lost. The
OVFHSK or DRVINT blocks handle this conditioning function.
9.1.2.2
9-5
GMC blocks
Example: When converting the decimal number 1.1 into a floating value,
then an error of 0.000000238 already occurs as a result of the resolution.
If a position value is to be consecutively increased by a value of 1.1, then
the errors are added and an offset is obtained between the required
position and the actual position.
In all of the cases where these types of rounding-off errors can occur,
type 32-bit integer connections are used.
Examples:
The following block connections have the same meaning for the motion
control blocks:
Connections
Connection Meaning
XP
YP
SV
NFX
Position normalization (this is valid for all position inputs and position outputs)
XV
XV
NFV
Position normalization (this is valid for all position inputs and outputs)
AZ
AZI
AZO
VMX
Maximum velocity for equalization operations. In this case, it generally involves a relative
velocity increase or decrease with respect to the master (leading) axis (XV)
AMX
JRK
FWD
Defines the forwards preferred direction for equalizing or positioning operations that
would otherwise be possible in both directions of rotation. FWD is dominant with respect to
BWD.
BWD
Defines the reverse preferred direction for equalizing or positioning operations that would
otherwise be possible in both directions of rotation. Not effective for FWD = 1.
EN
COR
Correction value by which the position actual value should be corrected. Generally, the
correction value corresponds to the axis cycle.
POV
Positive position overflow or step of the position setpoint (position reference value) by
COR. For POV = 01, the value COR is subtracted from the position actual value.
NOV
Negative position overflow or step of the position setpoint (position reference value) by
+COR. For NOV = 01, the value COR is added to the position actual value.
Table 9-1
9-6
GMC blocks
Position
normalization
Rotating systems:
Linear systems:
Speed
normalization
The speed value is specified in RPM (or velocity in [m/min]) at NFV - that
is then displayed as 1.0.
Required user units
Conversion
RPM
60
0.00254
3000
/s
inch
/min
Table 9-2
mm
/min
/s
NFV
480
1.5
rad
9.5493
9-7
GMC blocks
9.1.3
9.1.3.1
SIMOLINK interface
SIMOLINK is a communications system where the nodes are arranged in
a ring-type topology via fiber-optic cable. SIMOLINK transfers net (useful)
data and synchronizing information in extremely short cycle times to up to
200 nodes.
For motion control applications, the FM 458 module is used with the EXM
448-1 expansion module as SIMOLINK master. The setpoints for the
drive are centrally generated on the FM 458. The drives run, via
SIMOLINK, synchronized to the FM548. This measure ensures that the
drives receive the important control bits (POV, NOV) - even if they are
only present for the duration of a processing cycle.
9.1.3.2
HW Config
The basic sampling time T0 and the fastest cycle time T1 of the FM 458
should be set to the cycle time with which SIMOLINK is to be operated. In
the following example, T1 is set to 1.6 ms. This cycle time is practical
because the drive is operated with a pulse frequency of 5 kHz (factory
setting).
The "process I/O" option should be selected in the hardware
configuration of the EXM448-1 expansion module and the I/O addresses
should be pre-assigned names (I/O address 2 = EXM 448_Slot).
CFC, @SL
Connection Setting
Meaning
TAD
EXM 448_Slot
MOD
ASL
POW
EN
Enable
Table 9-3
9-8
GMC blocks
SLSVAV
Setting
Meaning
ASL
Address
NSV
NAV
XS0
Setpoint 1
XS1
Setpoint 2
XS2
Setpoint 3
Speed setpoint
XS3
Setpoint 4
Control words
Low word:
High word:
YA0
YA1
YA2
YA4
Table 9-4
9-9
GMC blocks
9.1.3.3
Bit
Control bit
POV
Use
Position actual value correction: Xact = Xact - COR
(edge active)
1
NOV
(edge active)
2
Enable measured
value memory
(edge active)
The measured value save function in the drive saves the actual position
when an external event occurs - e.g. when a pass mark is detected. As a
result of the measured value, an offset can be calculated in the FM458 and
corrected. To do this, the measured value is transferred to the FM458 as
actual value 2 (refer to the table above).
Enable referencing The drive must be referenced if the absolute position after power-up is
unknown (e.g. when incremental encoders are being used). When
(edge active)
referencing, the drive passes a proximity switch (BERO). The position of
the BERO is known and when the BERO is passed, this is transferred to
the position actual value.
After a positive signal edge at enable referencing", the referencing logic in
the drive is enabled for a referencing (homing) operation.
This signal can be used to set the position actual value in the position
sensing or to set the lowpass filter in the actual value channel of the
position controller.
This signal can be used to set the lowpass filter in the setpoint channel of
the position controller.
Inhibits the position This bit is used to control (closed-loop speed control) drive operation.
controller
When the position controller is inhibited, at the same time, the speed
controller setpoint is changed-over to the speed setpoint from the FM458.
Open-loop controlled operation is, for example, practical for a drive that
has not been referenced (not been homed).
Enables the speed The speed controller enable signal is connected to control word 2 bit 9
controller
(refer to the MASTERDRIVES MC documentation). It is a prerequisite for
torque to be established in the drive.
Opens the brake
9 ... 15
Table 9-5
9-10
Not assigned
GMC blocks
The drive signals the actual motion control status in the upper word of
actual value 4.
Bit
Status bit
POV feedback
Use
Feeds back the POV bit of the control word.
This bit is only required for the case where the FM458 and drive must be
operated in synchronism with one another (e.g. when establishing a coupling
through PROFIBUS). In this case, on the FM458 side, an POV pulse must
be extended until the bit that is being fed back is received.
NOV feedback
Measured value
valid
This bit indicates that after the measured value save function has been
enabled, a measured value was sensed. When enable measured value
memory" is withdrawn, the bit is set to 0.
Reference point
detected
This bit is set when the drive reaches the reference point. When the enable
referencing is withdrawn (refer to the motion control control word), the bit is
set to 0.
Position corrected
Feedback that the position actual value has been corrected. The bit is only
present for one sampling interval.
5 ...
15
Table 9-6
9.1.3.4
Feedback of the NOV bit of the control word. (refer to POV feedback)
Not assigned
Position sensing
SIMOLINK
Control words
Speed controller
9-11
GMC blocks
MASTERDRIVES MC
Speed setpoint
Position
controller
Following error
Speed controller
Torque
control
Position setpoint
Position actual value
Enable
Position
sensing
Enable
Speed
Control words
Control words
Status words
Fig. 9-4
Status word 1
Structure of the drive with position interface to the FM458 and SIMOLINK coupling
Param.
Value
P353
3000
P340
5.0 kHz
P740.1
Adr
P741
4.8 ms
P746.1
1.6 ms
P749.1
P749.2
P749.3
P749.4
Adr.0
Adr.1
Adr.2
Adr.3
U950.12
U960.12
P755
0x0100
P751.1
P751.2
120
120
P751.3
P751.4
122
122
P751.5
P751.6
130
130
P751.7
32
P751.8
431
P173
9-12
Meaning
Reference speed. Use the same value as for FM458
The cycle time T3 for SIMOLINK and the closed-loop position control are defined by
selecting the pulse frequency. (T3 = 8 1/ P340)
SIMOLINK address of the drive
Addresses for the 4 setpoint channels (receive data). Every slave reads the first 4
double words that are sent to its address.
GMC blocks
Param.
Value
Meaning
P174
7033
Retrieve the correction value of the position sensing from SIMOLINK (from word 3)
P175.1
7801
P175.2
7800
P177
7803
P179
7802
P190.1
7031
P193.1
7804
Set the position setpoint (reference value) (filter at the position controller input)
P197.1
7805
P209.1
7035
P210.1
P211.1
1
1
P212.1
7035
P213.1
7806
P220.1
131
Use the output of the position control as setpoint for the speed controller
P221.1
0.8 ms
P262.1
135
Accept the pre-control of the torque controller from the closed-loop position control
P554.1
7700
P555.1
7701
P558.1
7702
P561.1
7703
P562.1
7704
P563.1
7705
P564.1
7706
P565.1
7707
P568.1
7708
P569.1
7709
P571.1
7711
P572.1
7712
P575.1
7715
P585.1
7807
Filter time for the speed setpoint (the setpoint generation is slower as the speed
controller is processed 4x more frequently than the position controller)
U952.89
U076.1
7800
U076.2
7801
U076.3
212
U076.4
210
U076.5
211
Table 9-7
9-13
GMC blocks
The settings for the position sensing depend on the type of encoder
being used. Only the position normalization is discussed here (not the
encoder selection, power supply, etc.). In this particular example, one
revolution should be emulated as 36000 increments, i.e. AC = 36000.
Param.
Encoder
Resolver
Pulse
encoder
1024 pulses
Meaning
P171
20
12
10
P180.1
36000
36000
36000
P180.2
1048576
4096
1024
P183.1
0x10*1
0x10*1
0x10*1
P205
108000
108000
108000
P770
P771
5760
5760
5760
Table 9-8
Step
Param.
P235
P240
P773
Torque pre-control
Enable the position controller. Select the proportional gain P204 = 0.1. Enter speedvarying, periodic setpoints (e.g. engaging/disengaging operation). Increase P773
until the signal amplitude at the speed controller output (K0153) is at a minimum.
P204
Table 9-9
9-14
Controller optimization
GMC blocks
9.1.3.5
Poweringup/powering-down
a drive
DRVIF
Fig. 9-5
9-15
GMC blocks
Converting the
setpoint type
Setpoint
FM458
type
Drive converter
type
Block
Position
Float
Integer
Speed
Float
Referred to the
reference speed
Examples
FM458
MASTERDRIVES
R_I
12345.6
12345
R_N4
123.576 RPM
44186623 = 4.115 %
for reference speed
3000 RPM
1073741824 = 100%
Correction
value
Integer
Integer
36000
36000
Control bits
Byte
Bit
B_DW
Combined to form
a 32-bit control
word before being
transferred with
SIMOLINK
Evaluate SIMOLINK
receive words bitserially
Table 9-10
The DRVIF block has input RS for speed conversion (this corresponds to
input NF at block R_N4). Here, the speed is specified in the user
normalization that is sent to the drive converter as 100% (reference
speed).
Example:
The following data are applicable for a roller feed:
User speed normalization:
m
/min)
Reference speed of the drive:
conversion value:
NFV = 1.0
(1.0 corresponds to 1
200mm
Vmaterial
Feed
200mm
=
= 62.832mm
Motor revolution
10
3000 RPM = 188.496 m
min
1
10
Motor
nmotor
Fig. 9-6
9-16
GMC blocks
Initializing the
closed-loop
position controlled
mode
After a plant or system has been powered-up it must be assumed that the
position setpoint and actual value generally assume different values from
one another - more or less random. If, in this case, the drive closed-loop
position control is enabled, then the drive will execute a sudden
correction motion as it aligns itself to the setpoint. This behavior
represents potential hazards for both man and machine and is therefore
generally undesirable.
The MDCMP or MDCMP1 equalization blocks can help counter-measure
this effect. For different operating states or operating mode changes,
these blocks ensure that a defined and jerk-free (smooth) transition takes
place. They are always configured as the last block in the setpoint
generation chain - directly before DRVIF.
The equalization block function is effective when the closed-loop position
control is enabled. To do this, the following steps are to be executed:
1. The position actual value of the drive is connected to the setting input
SV of MDCMP(1) (it must first be converted into float!).
2. With the position controller inhibited, the setting function is activated
(S = 1). This means that the position actual value is accepted as
position setpoint YP (position reference value YP). At the same time a
check is made as to whether the position actual value lies within the
specified axis cycle; i.e. whether the drive was rotated/moved while
powered-down. If the position actual value lies outside the axis cycle
(i.e. SV < 0 or SV > AZ [AC]), then using an automatic correction by n
axis cycles (n is an integer number), the position actual value is set to
the appropriate value within the axis cycle.
3. The setpoint channel is disabled, i.e. the speed is zero and the
position is constant.
4. The closed-loop position control is enabled. Setpoint and actual value
are the same, i.e. the drive initially remains stationary.
5. There is an offset at block MDCMP(1) between the input setpoint
(reference) position XP and output YP. This is due to the setting
operation. In order to remove this offset, a positive signal edge must
be provided at input SOC. As a result, block MDCMP(1) YP executes
an equalization motion at XP. This means that the drive aligns itself to
position XP. This alignment is realized taking into consideration limit
values VMX, AMX and JRK and the direction inputs FWD and BWD
(Table 9-1). The MDCMP1 has the same effect at a transition from a
local operating mode (stopping, jogging, positioning, referencing
[homing]) to synchronous operation.
6. If the equalization operation at plant standstill is not possible or is not
desirable (e.g. in order not to cause a web break), then the system
can also be ramped-up with the initial offset. The equalization
operation can then be corrected while the system runs and therefore
slowly so that it is distributed over a number of products.
9-17
GMC blocks
AZ
XP
XP(t)
YP(t)
0
Alignment
SOC
S
Setting
Enable position
controller
Fig. 9-7
Virtual master
INT_MR
t
t
Fig. 9-8
RGE
The ramp-up and ramp-down times can be set separately at the rampfunction generator RGE. Data refers to the speed at the input NRM. In
the example in Fig. 8 this means that the drive accelerates to 1000 RPM
in 2 s (TU = 2000 ms) and brakes down to standstill from 1000 RPM in 5
s (TD = 5000 ms).
Fig. 8 involves a speed normalization in [RPM] (possibly also [m/min]). This
is because of the fact that NFV = 1.0 at the INT_MR (Virt_Master)
block.
9-18
GMC blocks
t
Acceleration
5
t
Position
YP
36000
20000
t
Fig. 9-9
9-19
GMC blocks
Inserting motion
control functions
Fig. 9-10
The setpoint generation chain starts with the virtual master and ends with
the equalization block MDCMP(1). Depending on the application, blocks
can be inserted in between that influence the setpoint (e.g. gear, cam,
engaging/disengaging).
When configuring/engineering the system, the processing sequence
should be carefully observed; this should be the same as the setpoint
flow.
9-20
GMC blocks
9.1.4
9.1.4.1
Direction of motion
5
1
2
dx >200 mm
Fig. 9-11
Direction of motion
70
mm
200 mm
dF = 60 mm 5 mm
Compartment position
YP (slave)
25 mm
9-21
GMC blocks
9.1.4.2
Belt drive
Motor
Gear
Roll
Belt
19
50 mm
1024
pulses/rev.
Fig. 9-12
Position normalization:
One revolution of the conveyor belt shaft corresponds to 50 mm * =
157.08 mm. For a motor without gear, the encoder rotates through 1024
4 = 4096 pulses (4x evaluation for incremental encoders with 2 encoder
tracks offset through 90). In order to achieve integer values, the number
of pulses for 100 revolutions of the shaft is taken into account in the
formula.
Converting an encoder pulse into a position value:
15708 3
in [mm]
409600 19
15708 3 15708
=
3 = 471.239mm
409600 19
100
NPN NM
NPD DN
Whereby the gear ratio effective between the encoder and distance
moved (belt) is specified using NM, DN. This is the reason that the
position normalization inputs should be set as follows:
9-22
GMC blocks
NPN
NPD
NM
DN
=
=
=
=
15708
409600
3
19
The belt position reference point is there where a product is detected for
the first time by the product detection function. The leading edge of the
signal "product detected" is used to set the position actual value to zero.
The signal is connected at the zero pulse input of the position sensing
function. (Caution: The edge evaluation depends on the module; if
required use an inverted signal!)
Zero position:
The following settings are required for synchronizing:
Input
Value
Meaning
MHW
0000 0xxx 00xx xxxx b Bit 6=0 synchronizing using the zero pulse
Bit 7=0 the edge depends on the direction of rotation (always at
the same position)
MSW
0000 x00x xxxx xxxx b Bits 10, 9 = 00 - when synchronizing, the position YP = SVS is
set.
SVS
0.0
SP
Table 9-11
Setting value for the position at the leading edge of the product
detection
Enables the setting mechanism with zero pulse
Referencing is not required for the belt drive as the position is resynchronized to each product.
Speed normalization:
The speed YV, calculated by block NAVMC, is obtained according to the
following formula:
NM
DN RS
RS =
19 RPM 3
= 6.3662 rev
m
m
0.47124
19
min
9-23
GMC blocks
Rated speed:
At the rated motor speed (3000 RPM) the conveyor belt feed is 74.41
m
/min or 1.24 mm/ms.
Drive for the
storage
compartments
M
1024
pulses/rev.
Fig. 9-13
NPN
NPD
NM
DN
=
=
=
=
Gear
10
1
31415
409600
1
10
Value
Meaning
MHW
0000 0xxx 00xx xxxx b Bit 6=0 synchronizing using the zero pulse
Bit 7=0 the edge depends on the direction of rotation (always at the
same position)
MSW
0000 x00x xxxx xxxx b Bits 10, 9 = 00 when referencing, position YP = SVS is set.
0000 x10x xxxx xxxx b 10 : In cyclic operation, only the offset is calculated!
SVS
35.0
SP
Table 9-12
Setting value for the position for the leading edge of the compartment
base detection
(dF 25 mm = 60 mm 25 mm)
Enables the setting mechanism with a zero pulse
RS =
9-24
10 RPM 1
= 3.18319 rev
m
0.31415 m
10
min
GMC blocks
Referencing the
compartment
bases
Setpoints
0
60.0
3
1
MDCMP1
YV
HLT
QRF
XHM
VRF
MDR
REF
SV
SYN
Speed setpoint
Enable position controller
PC
NAVMC
YP
1
35.0
SP
SVS
Position controller
Speed
setpoint for
the drive
Position
actual value
SS
Synchronizing pulse
Fig. 9-14
9-25
GMC blocks
The compartment bases repeat every 60 mm. This is the reason that for
the blocks, to generate a setpoint (e.g. MDCMP1), an axis cycle AZ = 60
is selected. This is the reason that the quiescent position XHM = 60
corresponds to the position XHM = 0.
VRF
60
Velocity
35
REF
Referencing
SYN
Synchronizing pulse
QRF
Fig. 9-15
Offset equalization
for the
compartment
bases
Setpoints
0
60
MDCMP1
YV
HLT
QRF
AZ
SV
SYN
DOC
OFS
Speed setpoint
Enable position controller = 1
PC
POV
NOV
COR
MSW
1
35.0
SP
SVS
YP
YDS
Speed
setpoint for
the drive
Position controller
Position actual value
Offset
SS
Synchronizing pulse
Fig. 9-16
9-26
GMC blocks
Offset:
The offset is the deviation of the actual value from the expected value. If
the base of the compartment is detected at position actual value 35 mm,
then the offset is zero. On the other hand, if the compartment base is
detected at a position actual value of 30 mm, then the offset is 5 mm.
This means that the position actual value must be corrected from 30 mm
to 35 mm.
Offset and synchronizing pulse SS are combined using the MDCMP1
block. This means that at every synchronizing pulse, an offset
equalization takes place. To do this, MDCMP1 first corrects the position
setpoint (position reference value) and actual value by the offset and then
transitions the setpoint to the actual position setpoint (position reference
value) according to the entered speed VMX, acceleration AMX and jerk
JRK. Normally, only small corrections are made when equalizing the
offset. This means that only acceleration (AMX) and jerk (JRK) are
effective from the dynamic data.
9.1.4.3
Setpoint generation
Positioning
Engager
Position
MDCMP1
Speed
Vset
Scaling factor
SF
Xset
Speed
constant
Cam
1500 RPM = 8 V
NAVMC
Xact
Fig. 9-17
Rough structure for the compartment base drive (without control signals)
Voltage =
X
1500 RPM
5V =
5V = 8V
SF
SF
SF = 937.5 RPM
Solution 1:
Positioning
When the product detection responds (Fig. 9-11), positioning starts and
advances the compartment bases by one compartment (60 mm). This is
a relative positioning operation. For absolute positioning to the position
60 mm, no motion would occur - this is because 60 mm corresponds to 0
mm for a rotary axis with an axis cycle of 60. This would mean that the
target and start positions would be the same.
9-27
GMC blocks
Speed
D
A
Analog output
XP
XPD
STR
Axis cycle
Position normalization
Speed normalization
Relative positioning
60
1000
1
0
AZ
NFX
NFV
ABS
Fig. 9-18
Solution 2:
Engaging function
POSMC
Actual position
(starting value)
Target
Starting
MDCMP1
YP
YV
Position
Speed
XP1
XV1
9-28
GMC blocks
NAVMC YP
YV
SS
Belt position
Belt velocity
Product detected
0
60
Coupling position
5
Insertion length 60
Mode: Insertion
1
Axis cycle
Fig. 9-19
XP
XV
SST
AZI
AZO
XCP
DXL
ED
MDCMP1
YP
YV
Position
Speed
XP1
XV1
Product
detection
200
Belt
position
XCP
60
Compartment
position
t
v_belt
v_compartme
nt
Velocity
Fig. 9-20
9-29
GMC blocks
NAVMC YP
YV
Fig. 9-21
Belt velocity
0
60
Absolute output 1
Axis cycle
SPLINE
X1, X2, ...
Y1, Y2, ...
G1, G2, ...
Belt position
FKT
Definition
XP
XV
MDCMP1
YP
YV
Position
Speed
XP1
XV1
AZI
AZO
ABS
FKT
Structure of the setpoint generation using a cam (SCX = SCY = SCV = 1.0)
The point along the cam i is specified using coordinates Xi and Yi.
Optionally, the gradient Gi of the cam can be specified in point i. In order
to activate the gradient input, the bit, belonging to point i of inputs GM1 or
GM2 is set to 1. Individual sections between two points can be
considered to be linear. Within a linear section, the master and slave
velocities are proportional to one another (refer to the block
documentation for SPLINE).
The cam can be defined at the SPLINE block, either when configuring in
the CFC or in the runtime in the CFC test mode or using the "Spline
Editor" tool. Cams that were downloaded into the module using the
Spline Editor are deleted as soon as the program is again downloaded
onto the module!
Defining cams using the Spline Editor:
The Spline Editor tool is available as program "p7sdspex.exe" in the path
"..\Step7\s7bin".
The compartment base position (Y axis) corresponds to the characteristic
in Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden.. In order to
define the engager function for the compartment bases, a cam with two
points is sufficient. A 3rd order cam is configured between the two points
(for Order Nos. = 0 and 3). This means that the velocity has a parabolic
characteristic with respect to time.
After a product has been detected, the master position jumps to zero.
The compartment position increases by one compartment while the
master advances by 100 mm. The compartment then stabilizes at this
position until the next product is detected. (Horizontal sections up to
are located to the left and right of the cam.)
9-30
GMC blocks
Fig. 9-22
The cam can be saved as text file. The file contains the values of all of
the relevant inputs of the SPLINE block. These values can be entered at
the block connections in the CFC. This ensures that after the project has
been compiled, the cam is kept.
Alternatively, the cam can be transferred to the module via the online
interface. To do this, the menu entry "SIMADYN D" "Transfer Data" is
selected.
The following options are available in the transfer dialog box:
1. To search the configured software for "SPLINE" type blocks
("Search")
2. The cam can be transferred to the selected block ("Transmit data")
3. A cam can be generated from the curve points transferred ("Validate
data")
4. The actual cam of the selected block can be read-out of the module
(Read back curve)
9-31
GMC blocks
Fig. 9-23
Write mode:
When transferring the cam to the module, the permanent write mode
should be selected. This means that the cam is kept even after the
module is re-started.
Scaling factor for
cams
1.0
Fig. 9-24
XP
9-32
GMC blocks
If, in this case, the scaling SCY is increased from 1.0 to 2.0, then the
compartment chain advances by 120 mm after each product detection i.e. it advances by two compartments.
The setpoint velocity for the compartment base is automatically and
correctly calculated also when cams are scaled (SCX, SCY). The scaling
factor for the derivation of SCV only has to be changed in exceptional
cases - for example, if different speed normalization is required at the
input (XV) and at the output (YV).
9-33
GMC blocks
9.1.5
Standard
telegram 5
Telegram 105
STW1
STW1
NSOLL_B
NSOLL_B
Speed setpoint
STW2
STW2
---
MomRed
G1_STW
G1_STW
XERR
XERR
KPC
KPC
Table 9-13
Words
Meaning
Standard
telegram 5
Telegram 105
Words
Meaning
ZSW1
ZSW1
NIST_B
NIST_B
ZSW2
ZSW2
---
MeldW
G1_ZSW
G1_ZSW
G1_XIST1
G1_XIST1
G1_XIST2
G1_XIST2
Table 9-14
9-34
GMC blocks
Faults acknowledged
9-35
GMC blocks
Fig. 9-25
References
9-36
/1/
/2/
/3/
GMC blocks
9.2
Symbol
MDCMP
Reference position
Reference velocity
Setting value, position
Dynamic position offset
Correction value for the position act. value
Relative velocity for compensation
Relative acceleration for compensation
Jerk
Position normalization
Velocity normalization
Axis cycle
Set position
Correct position actual value
Steady-state offset compensation
Dynamic offset compensation
Mode changeover
Compensation using forwards motion
Compensation using reverse motion
Brief description
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
XP
XV
XPS
OFS
XCP
VMX
AMX
JRK
NFX
NFV
AZ
SET
CP
SOC
DOC
MOC
FWD
BWD
YP
YV
COR
POV
NOV
DON
QF
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
Mode of operation
The first of three functions of the block is setting the position value. As
long as the input SET = 1 (SET command), an internal offset (refer to the
block diagram dXP) is added to the position reference value XP. Output
YP then assumes the value YP = XSP. Generally, a step appears at
output YP. This means that this setting mechanism is only practical for
operation with the drive inhibited.
Compensation operations which might not have been completed, are
cancelled using the SET command (block diagram: dx = dv = 0). The
internal offset is steady-state. It remains unchanged until a new setting
function is executed, or a steady-state offset compensation is made.
9-37
GMC blocks
YP
YP
dXP
SOC
SET
YP
DOC
MOC
Mode change
(MOC)
Mode changeover
9-38
GMC blocks
AZO
YP
POV
NOV
YV
XP
XV
dXP
YP
XPS
SET
Internal
steadystate
offset
x(t)
dXo
dv
v(t)
dVo
dAo
dx
SOC
OFS
DOC
MOC
FWD
BWD
NFV
Offset
compensation
VMX AMX
JRK
YP
YV
COR
Block diagram
Offset
compensation
(DOC)
The third mode is used to compensate the offset in the position actual
value channel. If an offset is recognized when sensing the position actual
value, the actual value isnt directly corrected, but instead via the setpoint
channel. This has the advantage that the setpoint and actual value
channels can be processed in different time sectors and the actual value
channel does not have to compute the offset compensation (computation
time).
Procedure: Initially, the offset is subtracted from the setpoint and from the
actual value as correction value. The setpoint is then transitioned to the
previous value (before the correction) using a compensation operation.
Direction of the
compensation
operation
XCP, CP
For applications with rotary axis (AZ > 0), there are three compensation
versions which can be selected for mode changeover (MOC) or steadystate offset compensation (SOC):
AZ
FWD
BWD
>0
>0
Backwards
>0
Forwards
Shortest distance
Shortest distance
9-39
GMC blocks
I/O
Pre-assign.
XP
Reference position
0.0
XV
Reference velocity
0.0
XPS
0.0
OFS
0.0
XCP
Correction value for the position actual value. With a rising edge at CP, the
position actual value is increased by XCP using corrective action (outputs
COR, POV, NOV).
0.0
VMX
100.0
AMX
100.0
JRK
Jerk = change in the acceleration per unit time for the compensation
operation.
Units: Rotary axis [1/s]
linear axis [m/s]
JRK = 0, means no rounding-off.
1000.0
NFX
Position normalization:
360000
Rotary axis:
per meter
NFV
Conversion
NFV
1/s
mm/s
60 s/min
0.001 m/mm 60 s/min
60.0
0.06
1.0
AZ
SET
Set position. For SET = 1, compensation operations which have not been
completed are cancelled.
CP
Correct position actual value. The position actual value is increased by XCP
with a rising edge.
SOC
DOC
MOC
FWD
BWD
YP
0.0
YV
0.0
COR
Correction value for steps in the position reference value and actual value
POV
NOV
9-40
360000
GMC blocks
DON
QF
Configuring data
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Computed in
Normal mode
Special features
20
7
3,5
9-41
GMC blocks
9.3
Symbol
CAMSW
Position actual value
Velocity
Position normalization
Velocity normalization
Axis cycle of the position actual value
Enable, forwards
Enable, backwards
Reset mode
Switch-in threshold 1
Switch-out threshold 1
Switch offset time 1 [ms]
Switch-in threshold 2
Switch-out threshold 2
Switch delay time 2 [ms]
Brief description
R
R
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
R
R
R
R
R
R
XP
XV
NFX
NFV
AZ
ENF
ENR
RM
XA1
XB1
DT1
XA2
XB2
DT2
Q
QN
Q1
QN1
Q2
QN2
QF
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
Cam active
Cam not active
Cam 1 active
Cam 1 not active
Cam 2 active
Cam 2 not active
Group error
The block forms a cam controller for 2 cams. For each cam, the position
and timing delay when switching-in/out can be individually defined. All of
the cams refer to the same position actual value XP and the associated
velocity XV.
A positive time delay (leading) can only be reliably executed for a velocity
which also remains approximately constant! Negative switching delay
times (lagging cams) are generated using a time delay independent of
the velocity. This means, that the velocity signal is only required for
leading cams.
Mode of operation
XA = XB
Q
XA
XB
XB
XA
LU
For the case XA > XB, the active cam range is at both ends of the range.
In the range {XB, XA}, Q = 0.
9-42
GMC blocks
XA > XB
Direction of
rotation
X
XB
XA
t
Q
AZI
POV, NOV
XP
RM = 1
XB
XA
t
DT = 0
DT = 0
XA XB
DT = 0
XA XB
t
Q
t
DT
Q
DT > 0
DT
DT < 0
DT
Q
DT
DT
9-43
GMC blocks
The velocity and position normalization are used to calculate the position
offset from the velocity XV and delay DT (specified in [ms]). The definition
is valid for any application-specific normalization of XV and XP.
Example:
NFV, NFX
m
m
User normalization
s
s = 60
NFV =
=
=
m
Internal _ normalization m
min
60 s
I/O
Pre-assign.
XP
Reference position
0.0
XV
Reference velocity
0.0
NFX
Position normalization:
Rotary axis:
360000
per meter
NFV
NFV
1/s
mm/s
60.0
0.06
1.0
AZ
ENF
ENR
RM
Reset mode: For a 1, active cams are reset with the position jump.
POV
NOV
XA1
1000.0
XB1
2000.0
DT1
XA2
5000.0
XB2
6000.0
DT2
QN
Q1
QN1
Q2
QN2
QF
9-44
360000
0 ms
0 ms
GMC blocks
Configuring data
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
28
9
4,5
9-45
GMC blocks
9.4
CATCH Catch-up/shutdown
Symbol
CATCH
Reference position
Reference velocity
Shutdown position
Offset setpoint
Local velocity
Max. compensation velocity
Max. compensation acceleration
Jerk
Position normalization
Velocity normalization
Axis cycle
Position/speed-controlled
Local/synchronous operation
Overcontrol permitted
Trigger
Enable
Brief description
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
XP
XV
XPS
DYP
VLC
VMX
AMX
JRK
NFX
NFV
AZ
PN
LOC
OVD
TRG
EN
YP
YV
COR
POV
NOV
QSY
QLC
QST
QTR
DON
QF
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
Mode of operation
The block has several operating modes. The transition from one mode to
another is realized using a rising edge at trigger input TRG (trigger
event). The mode inputs PN and LOC are then evaluated and
compensation started. Inputs XPS, DYP, AMX and JRK are only
evaluated when there is a trigger event. This means, that a change at
one of these inputs only becomes effective after a trigger event.
The mode after power-on is determined by the values at the inputs PN,
LOC, VLC and DYP during initialization.
9-46
GMC blocks
Modes
PN
LOC
VLC
Any
Any
Any
I/O
Pre-assign.
XP
Reference position
0.0
XV
Reference velocity
0.0
XPS
0.0
DYP
0.0
VLC
Local setpoint velocity for local operation (LOC =1) in the closed-loop speed
controlled mode (PN = 0). A change is effective as long as TRG = 1.
0.0
VMX
Maximum velocity for offset compensation. This is only valid if the setpoint
velocity remains unchanged (standstill or synchronous operation). This has
no significance for shutdown or when catching-up.
1000.0
AMX
JRK
m
50 2
da
s = 2000 m
=
dt
25ms
s3
NFX
Position normalization:
50.0
2000.0
Example:
This means that for JRK = 2000,
acceleration is 50m/s after 25 ms.
Rotary axis:
Linear axis:
360000
9-47
GMC blocks
NFV
Conversion
NFV
1/s
mm/s
60 s/min
0.001 m/mm 60 s/min
60.0
0.06
1.0
AZ
Axis cycle for the input and output position value (O = linear axis)
PN
360000
0
LOC
OVD
TRG
EN
YP
0.0
YV
0.0
COR
POV
NOV
QSY
QLC
Local velocity reached. This is set to 1 as soon as the transition status in the
speed-controlled local mode has been completed.
QST
Standstill signal
QTR
DON
QF
Configuring data
9-48
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
23
8
4,0
GMC blocks
9.5
EDC Engage/disengage
Symbol
EDC
Reference position
Reference velocity
Axis cycle
Coupling position
Engage/disengage length
Ramp length
Rounding-off (percentage)
Position setting value
Set position
Start/stop trigger
Start/stop continuous
Engage/disengage
Enable
R
R
DI
R
R
R
R
R
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
XP
XV
AZ
XCP
DXL
RMP
DRP
SV
S
SST
SSC
ED
EN
YP
YV
COR
POV
NOV
QSY
QST
QF
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
Brief description
Switch-in operation
XV
YV
YP
YP
2 DXL
DXL
SST
SST
Post-trigger range
Post-triggering range
9-49
GMC blocks
XV
YP
XV
YP
2 DXL
DXL
SST
SST
Post-trigger range
Post-trigger range
Continuous
operation
9-50
GMC blocks
YV
YV
0 XCP
0 XCP
0 XCP
XP
0 XCP
SSC
Intermittent
operation
0 XCP
0 XCP
SSC
Ramps, roundingoff
YP
RMP
2
Rounding-off DRP
RMP
2
DRP = 0 %
YV
DRP = 50 %
dYV
dt
DRP
DRP = 100 %
9-51
GMC blocks
I/O
Pre-assign.
XP
Reference position
0.0
XV
Reference velocity
0.0
AZ
Axis cycle for input and output position value (O = linear axis)
XCP
DXL
360000
RMP
120000
DRP
SV
SST
SSC
ED
EN
YP
0.0
YV
0.0
COR
Correction value when jumping to YP due to the limit to the axis cycle for
systems with rotary axis.
POV
For the position correction YP = YP - COR, POV is set to 1 for the duration of
a machining cycle (position overflow for a positive direction of rotation).
NOV
For the position correction YP = YP + COR, NOV is set to 1 for the duration
of a processing cycle (position overflow for a negative direction of rotation).
QSY
Synchronous operation: Indicates that the master axis and slave axis are in
angular synchronism
QST
QF
9-52
360000
0.0
10 %
0.0
0: Disengaging
1: Engaging
GMC blocks
Configuring data
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
20
7
3,5
9-53
GMC blocks
9.6
Symbol
NAVMC
Hardware address
Encoder pulse number
Reference speed
Master/slave
Mode, hardware
Mode, software
Axis cycle (max. position value)
Reset position
Set position
Position setting value
Setting value for synchronization
Pos. ref. value for synchronization
Enable synchronization
Enable, pulse output at SYP
POV: Subtract position correction
NOV: Add position correction
COR: Position correction value
Normalization, YP numerator
Normalization, YP denominator
Gear factor, numerator
Gear factor, denominator
Position register for interrupt
Use encoder ENC
Alternative encoder
Activate simulation
Simulation speed
Brief description
G
DI
R
BO
W
W
DI
BO
BO
R
R
R
BO
BO
BO
BO
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
BO
DI
BO
R
AD
PR
RS
MS
MHW
MSW
AZ
R
S
SV
SVS
XPS
SP
ESP
CP
CN
DYP
NPN
NPD
NM
DN
REG
SEL
ENC
SIM
XSI
YV
YP
YPS
YDS
YPI
SS
SYP
QPI
COR
POV
NOV
QF
YFC
R
R
R
R
R
BO
BO
BO
DI
BO
BO
BO
W
Digital speed sensing with pulse encoder with the following features:
The machine speed or velocity is sensed with a normalization which
can be specified (e.g.: in [rev/min], [Hz], [m/min], [mm/s] ....) and
taking into account a gearbox between the encoder and machine.
The machine position is sensed with a normalization which can be
specified (e.g.: in [0.01], [m], [mm], ....) and taking into account a
gearbox between the encoder and machine.
Position sensing according to the master-slave principle. This means
that the block, configured as master, senses all of the slave position
actual values which are assigned to it, at the same time.
A synchronizing pulse is monitored and output (e.g. zero pulse). This
pulse is used to correct the position actual value.
9-54
GMC blocks
The master saves the counter statuses for the encoder pulses which it
received in the last interval and the required time. It does this for itself
and all of the slaves which are assigned to it. This means that the
position and speed values of all blocks in a master-slave configuration
are referred to precisely the same instant. It is also possible that the
master and slaves evaluate the same encoder (the same hardware
address). If several NAVMCs are configured at the same hardware
address, then only the hardware settings (input MHW) of the first
configured NAVMC are used.
The following schematic applies for speed and position:
Motor
Machine
DN
NM
Gearbox
Speed
YP, YV
YV =
speed _ encoder[ 1
min
NM
DN
RS
Any
1.0
Hz
Any
60.0
9-55
GMC blocks
Position
m / min
0.335 m
1 / 0.335 = 2.985
Inch / s
22.5 inch
60 / 22.5 = 2.66667
The position outputs YP, YPS, YDP and COR have the basis unit LU
(length unit). If angular degrees are to be used for rotary axis systems,
we recommend 1 LU = 0.001 as base unit; for linear axis systems, 1 LU
= 1 m.
Essentially, any basis unit can be selected. However, it should be
observed that 1 LU is the finest system resolution. This means that
several inputs and outputs are exclusively implemented as integer values
(type DINT). This prevents rounding-off errors from being summed, and
guarantees long-time stability of the position sensing.
The position actual value is calculated as follows
YP = encoder pulses
NM NPN
+ DYP
DN NPD
The quotient NPN / NPD defines the basic unit. In this case, NPN
specifies the required position value, and NPD, the required number of
encoder pulses. (Please note: An encoder with 1024 pulses per
revolution generates 4 1024 = 4096 pulses per revolution, as each
signal edge is evaluated.)
Example
This data is also valid if a gearbox is located between the motor and
machine, as this is taken into account using the gearbox factor (NM, DN).
Sawtooth
generation
9-56
GMC blocks
Function
2 ... 0
Hardware filter
000
Encoder type 1
No filter
Encoder type 2
No filter
001
500 ns
125 ns
010
2 s
Not permissible
011
8 s
Not permissible
100
16 s
Not permissible
Otherwise
Not permissible
Not permissible
6
7
10
Significance
Value
000
Mode
0
Logic
Coarse pulse ignored
001
010
011
100
101
Otherwise
>5
0
1
Synchronization
Edge evaluation
Encoder type
9-57
GMC blocks
Software mode
MSW
Bit(s)
Function
Value
6 ... 0
Not used
Behavior for S = 1
10 .. 9
11
12
13
14
Significance
0 X 127
00
(zero pulse)
01
prerequisite: SP = 1
1*
Enable internal
sawtooth generation
9-58
GMC blocks
I/O
Pre-assign.
AD
Hardware address
PR
RS
MS
Master/slave
MHW
Hardware mode
0x0002
MHS
Software mode
0x007F
AZ
Axis cycle for automatic sawtooth generation and determining the offset
(this may not be negative)
360000
Reset position
Set position
SV
0.0
SVS
0.0
XPS
0.0
SP
Synchronization enable
ESP
CP
CN
DYP
NPN
NPD
NM
DN
REG
Position register for an interrupt. The input value is converted into a position
value and displayed at output YPI (refer to block POSREG)
This function is not possible in the simulation mode. POSREG must be
connected to the same hardware address which is evaluated at NAVMC.
SEL
ENC
SIM
1024
1.0
1
0.0
YV
0.0
YP
0.0
YPS
0.0
YDS
0.0
YPI
0.0
9-59
GMC blocks
SS
SYP
QPI
After changing the output YPI, a pulse is output at QPI for one cycle.
COR
Corrective value for the position actual value. If the position actual value
changes due to CP, CN, synchronization or automatic sawtooth generation,
the absolute value of the change (signed) is indicated at COR.
POV
For the position correction YP = YP - COR, POV is set to 1 for the duration of
a processing cycle.
NOV
For the position correction YP = YP + COR, NOV is set to 1 for the duration
of a processing cycle.
QF
YFC
0x0000
Significance
At least one of the block inputs PR, RS, DN, NM, NPN or NPD has the value zero.
Block was configured as a slave; no master was found (in the same sampling time and in the
execution sequence before the slave).
Master and slave are not configured in the same sampling time.
AZ is negative.
10
Configuring data
9-60
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
30
10
5,0
GMC blocks
9.7
Symbol
POSREG
Hardware address
Enable
Brief description
G
BO
AD
EN
REG
QF
DI
BO
Position register
Group error
The function block is used for an event driven position sensing for
incremental encoders. It has to be calculated in an interrupt task which
becomes active with the event (e.g. at the rising edge of a binary input).
The function block should be used in combination with the position
sensing block NAVMC. The NAVMC has to be configured in a cyclic task
and it is responsible for normalization and setting function for the position
actual values.
This kind of event-driven position sensing should not be applied if the
corresponding NAVMC is configured in a master-slave-group where all
position values have to be sampled absolutely synchronous.
Mode of operation
POSREG
AD
REG
REG
QPI
I/O
Pre-assign.
AD
Hardware address
EN
Enable 1 :
REG
Actual status of the position register of the incremental encoder. Connect this
output to the input REG of the corresponding NAVMC.
QF
9-61
GMC blocks
Configuring data
9-62
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
No
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
2
1
0,5
GMC blocks
9.8
Symbol
PHSFT
Position actual value 1
Position actual value 2
Reference velocity 1
Reference velocity 2
Axis cycle
R
R
R
R
DI
XP1
XP2
XV1
XV2
AZ
YP
YV
COR
POV
NOV
R
R
DI
BO
BO
Brief description
The block shifts a position value by one offset value and limits the result
to a specified axis cycle. It can either involve a steady-state or dynamic
offset value.
Mode of operation
I/O
Pre-assign.
XP1
0.0
XP2
0.0
XV1
Reference velocity 1
0.0
XV2
Reference velocity 2
0.0
AZ
Axis cycle of the position inputs and outputs (0 means linear axis)
YP
YV
Velocity setpoint:
COR
POV
NOV
YV = XV1 + XV2
0
0
0.0
9-63
GMC blocks
Configuring data
9-64
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
10
3
1,5
GMC blocks
9.9
Symbol
DDAZ
Axis cycle
Position actual value 1
Position actual value 2
Position actual value 3
Position actual value 4
Position actual value 5
Position actual value 6
Position actual value 7
Position actual value 8
DI
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
AZ
XP1
XP2
XP3
XP4
XP5
XP6
XP7
XP8
YP
Brief description
The block adds 8 position values and limits the result to the specified axis
cycle.
Mode of operation
YP = (
XPi) mod AZ
i =1
Axis cycle for the position output and all position inputs (0 means linear axis)
XP1 ...
0.0
... XP8
0.0
YP
Configuring data
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
360000
5
2
1,0
9-65
GMC blocks
9.10
Symbol
SPLINE
Type
Start calculation
Linear sections 1
Linear sections 2
Abscissa value, point 1
Ordinate value, point 1
Abscissa value, point 2
Ordinate value, point 2
Brief description
I
BO
W
W
R
R
R
R
TYP
CAL
LM1
LM2
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
R
R
R
R
X31
Y31
X32
Y32
FKT
QF
DI
BO
Mode of operation
9-66
3rd order. The gradient at point Xi is the same as the gradient between
the adjacent points = (Yi+1 Yi-1) / (Xi+1 Xi-1 )
2nd order
3rd order. The gradient at point Xi is the same as the average value of
the gradients of the adjacent segments.
GMC blocks
Individual sections can then be defined as straight line using inputs LM1
and LM2, if TYP is not set to 1. In this case, LM1 and LM2 are evaluated
bitwise. Each bit is assigned another curve section. If the bit is set, then
the section is shown as a straight line.
Assignment:
For example: Section 7 is the section between points (X7,Y7) and
(X8,Y8).
Bit of LM1 or LM2
15
14
13
12
11
10
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
I/O
Pre-assign.
CAL
The calculation is started with a rising edge. The curve which has been used
up until now remains valid until the calculation has been completed.
LM1
LM2
Result function for SPLFKT. This output may only be connected with the
input of block type SPLFKT with the same name. This signals SPLFKT the
curve specification.
QF
Configuring data
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
5
2
1,0
9-67
GMC blocks
9.11
Symbol
CAMD
Reference position
Reference velocity
Calculation function
Axis cycle length, input
Axis cycle length, output
Scaling, input (X axis)
Scaling, output (Y axis)
Scaling, derivation
Absolute output
Stop for YP = AZO
Restart after YP = AZO
Enable
Brief description
R
R
DI
DI
DI
R
R
R
BO
BO
BO
BO
XP
XV
FKT
AZI
AZO
SCX
SCY
SCV
ABS
STP
TRG
EN
YP
YV
COR
POV
NOV
QST
QF
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
The block calculates the ordinate value YP of a cam disk, associated with
input quantity XP, using mathematical functions.
The input position value represents the reference position of a master
axis. The output position YP is the position reference value for a slave
drive. Position steps at the input are transferred, in the absolute output
mode, to the slave. In the relative output mode, the slave remains at the
actual position value for a master axis position jump.
Mode of operation
XP
SCX
XV
YP
COR
POV
NOV
YV
SCV
9-68
GMC blocks
Absolute output
The input and output are systems with linear axis (AZO = AZI = 0)
The characteristic values for XP = 0 and XP = AZI are the same.
AZI
Y
XP
0
AZI
AZO
AZI
YP
TRG
XP
AZI
AZO
YP
t
t
POV
NOV
Relative output
For the relative output of a curve, the return jump of the input position
reference value XP (sawtooth) is not transferred to the slave axis. This
means that it is possible to attach original characteristics seamlessly
together ( i.e.:Y(0) = 0 ).
Example of relative output:
When the sawtooth jumps back, the characteristic is attached, offset by
the value Y(AZI). This means, that at each cycle, YP grows by the value
Y(AZI). If the range 0 YP < AZO is exceeded or fallen below, a modulo
AZO correction is made, which is designated with outputs POV or NOV.
9-69
GMC blocks
Characteristic Y(X)
AZO
YP
Y(AZI)
0
XP
X
AZI
POV
I/O
Pre-assign.
XP
0.0
XV
0.0
FKT
AZI
360000
AZ0
Axis cycle for the output position reference value (O = linear axis)
360000
SCX
1000.0
SCY
1000.0
SCV
ABS
STP
TRG
Restart after the axis cycle limit AZO has been reached for STP = 1
EN
YP
0.0
YV
Velocity setpoint
0.0
COR
Correction value for jumps at YP due to limiting to the axis cycle for rotary
axis systems.
POV
For the position correction YP = YP - COR, POV is set to 1 for the duration of
a processing cycle (position overflow for a positive direction of rotation).
NOV
For the position correction YP = YP + COR, NOV is set to 1 for the duration
of a processing cycle (position overflow for a negative direction of rotation).
QST
Indicates that a stop was made for YP = AZO (to continue: TRG = 0 1).
QF
Configuring data
9-70
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
1.0
35
12
6,0
GMC blocks
9.12
Symbol
TABCAM
Reference position
Reference speed
Table reference
Axis cycle, input
Axis cycle, output
Scaling factor, input
Scaling factor, output
Scaling factor, derivation
Mode absolute
Stop for YP = AZO
Restart after YP = AZO
Enable
Brief description
R
R
DI
DI
DI
R
R
R
BO
BO
BO
BO
XP
XV
TAB
AZI
AZO
SCX
SCY
SCV
ABS
STP
TRG
EN
YP
YV
COR
POV
NOV
QST
QF
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
Position setpoint
Speed setpoint
Position correction value
Positive overflow
Negative overflow
Stopped for YP = AZO
Group error
The block calculates the ordinate value YP of a cam disk, associated with
input quantity XP, using a table of X- and Y-values.
The input position value represents the reference position of a master
axis. The output position YP is the position reference value for a slave
drive. Position steps at the input are transferred, in the absolute output
mode, to the slave. In the relative output mode, the slave remains at the
actual position value for a master axis position jump.
Mode of operation
The cam disk table contains the X- and Y-coordinates generated by the
block TAB. The link to the table is done by connecting output TAB of
block TAB to input TAB of block TABCAM.
If another cam table is to be selected in operation, then this is realized by
changing-over input TAB to another TAB calculation block. In this case,
changeover switches or multiplexors are used.
The input and output position value are normalized using input quantities
SCX and SCY according to the following diagram. The derivative of the
curve is output with the actual velocity XV and the weighting factor SCV
as reference velocity YV.
AZO
SCY
XP
SCX
XV
YP
COR
POV
NOV
YV
SCV
9-71
GMC blocks
Absolute output
The input and output are systems with linear axis (AZO = AZI = 0)
The characteristic values for XP = 0 and XP = AZI are the same.
AZI
Y
XP
0
AZI
AZO
AZI
YP
TRG
XP
AZI
AZO
YP
t
t
POV
NOV
Relative output
For the relative output of a curve, the return jump of the input position
reference value XP (sawtooth) is not transferred to the slave axis. This
means that it is possible to attach original characteristics seamlessly
together ( i.e.:Y(0) = 0 ).
Example of relative output:
When the sawtooth jumps back, the characteristic is attached, offset by
the value Y(AZI). This means, that at each cycle, YP grows by the value
Y(AZI). If the range 0 YP < AZO is exceeded or fallen below, a modulo
AZO correction is made, which is designated with outputs POV or NOV.
9-72
GMC blocks
Characteristic Y(X)
AZO
YP
Y(AZI)
0
XP
X
AZI
POV
I/O
Pre-assign.
XP
0.0
XV
0.0
TAB
AZI
360000
AZ0
Axis cycle length for the output position reference value (0 = linear axis)
360000
SCX
1000.0
SCY
1000.0
SCV
ABS
STP
TRG
Restart after the axis cycle limit AZO has been reached for STP = 1
EN
YP
0.0
YV
Velocity setpoint
0.0
COR
Correction value for jumps at YP due to limiting to the axis cycle for rotary
axis systems.
POV
For the position correction YP = YP - COR, POV is set to 1 for the duration of
a processing cycle (position overflow for a positive direction of rotation).
NOV
For the position correction YP = YP + COR, NOV is set to 1 for the duration
of a processing cycle (position overflow for a negative direction of rotation).
QST
Indicates that a stop was made for YP = AZO (to continue: TRG = 0 1).
QF
Configuring data
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
1.0
35
12
6,0
9-73
GMC blocks
9.13
Symbol
POSMC
Position actual value
Velocity actual value
Target position
Following error window
Target window
Max. velocity
Max. acceleration
Jerk
Position normalization
Velocity normalization
Axis cycle
Forwards
Backwards
Absolute/relative positioning
Start
Stop
Accept actual values
Enable
Brief description
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
XP
XV
XPD
DXE
DYE
VMX
AMX
JRK
NFX
NFV
AZ
FWD
BWD
ABS
STR
HLT
SET
EN
YP
YV
YA
COR
POV
NOV
QP
DON
QXE
QF
R
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
Reference position
Reference velocity
Reference acceleration
Correction value
Positive position overflow
Negative position overflow
Positioning active
Position actual value in the target window
Following error exceeded
Group error
The POSMC block is a setpoint generator for position and velocity for
positioning with either linear or rotary axes. The setpoint characteristics
are obtained as a result of the target position, maximum velocity,
maximum acceleration and their derivatives (jerk). The velocity and
position are calculated, under this secondary condition so that when the
target position is reached, velocity and acceleration go to zero.
The positioning operation within an axis cycle can either be absolute or,
over any distances, relative.
The acceleration parameters AMX and JRK should be selected, so that
the drive can follow the setpoints with the minimum following error. Under
this prerequisite, precision positioning is possible without overshoot.
Mode of operation
Absolute
positioning
9-74
For the absolute positioning, the position reference value YP runs from
the initial value XP to the target position XPD. The distance moved
through is always less than the axis cycle length. The direction of motion
for rotary axis systems is defined by inputs FWD and BWD:
GMC blocks
AZ
FWD
BWD
>0
>0
Backwards
>0
Forwards
Relative
positioning
Reference position YP
Ref. speed YV
dt
AMX
Rounding-off (da/dt)=
dt
Changes during
positioning
Reference
acceleration
The input quantities can change during positioning. In this case, a new
start pulse must be generated. After this, an equalization operation takes
place as transition into the new positioning operation.
I/O
Pre-assign.
XP
0.0
XV
0.0
XPD
Absolute positioning:
Relative positioning:
0.0
DXE
1000
DYE
100.0
VMX
10.0
AMX
10.0
Target position
Positioning distance
9-75
GMC blocks
1000.0
NFX
Position normalization:
Rotary axis:
Linear axis:
NFV
Conversion
NFV
1/s
mm/s
60 s/min
0.001 m/mm 60 s/min
60.0
0.06
360000
1.0
AZ
FWD
Forwards motion for absolute positioning and rotary axis (refer to the table
above)
BWD
ABS
0: Relative positioning
1: Absolute positioning
STR
SET
EN
YP
0.0
YV
0.0
YA
0.0
COR
POV
NOV
QP
DON
QXE
QF
Configuring data
9-76
360000
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
35
12
6,0
GMC blocks
9.14
Symbol
OFSSAV
Position actual value
Position reference value
Axis cycle
Save offset
R
R
DI
BO
XP
XPS
AZ
S
YPD
YPM
R
R
Brief description
The block is used to sense the position offset. It generates the deviation
between the reference and actual position and the shortest path between
two position values for rotary axis systems.
Mode of operation
XP
YPD
YPM
350
10
340
-20
190
270
-90
-90
10
340
-330
30
I/O
Pre-assign.
XP
0.0
XPS
0.0
AZ
YPD
0.0
YPM
Shortest path between the position actual value and position reference value.
0.0
360000
0
9-77
GMC blocks
Configuring data
9-78
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
1
0,3
0,2
GMC blocks
9.15
Symbol
OFSGEN
Offset setpoint
Velocity for compensation
Acceleration for compensation
Jerk
Position normalization
Velocity normalization
Axis cycle
Setting value
Accept setting value
Start offset change
Absolute / relative offset
Compensation using forwards motion
Compensation using backwards motion
Enable
R
R
R
R
R
R
DI
R
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
XP
VMX
AMX
JRK
NFX
NFV
AZ
SV
S
STR
ABS
FWD
BWD
EN
YP
YV
COR
POV
NOV
DON
QF
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
Brief description
Mode of operation
Absolute (ABS = 1)
Relative (ABS = 0)
AZ
FWD
BWD
>0
Shortest distance
>0
Backwards
>0
Forwards
Shortest distance
In the relative mode (ABS = 0), the new offset value is given by
YP(new) = YP(old) + XP
taking into account the axis cycle for rotary axis systems. If a new
compensation operation is started during compensation which is already
running, then the old operation is extended by the value XP. For the
relative mode, XP is not restricted by the axis cycle.
9-79
GMC blocks
I/O
Pre-assign.
XP
0.0
VMX
1.0
AMX
1.0
Units:
JRK
NFX
Position normalization:
NFV
Rotary axis:
Linear axis:
User normalization
Conversion
NFV
1/s
mm/s
60 s/min
0.001 m/mm 60 s/min
60.0
0.06
10.0
360000
1.0
AZ
360000
SV
STR
FWD
BWD
EN
0.0
1
YP = 0;
YP = SV;
YV = 0
YV = 0
YP
0.0
YV
0.0
COR
POV
NOV
DON
QF
Configuring data
9-80
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
30
10
5,0
GMC blocks
9.16
Symbol
GEAR
Reference position
Reference velocity
YV correction factor
Axis cycle, input
Axis cycle, output
Ratio, numerator
Ratio, denominator
Setting value
Set position
Enable
R
R
R
DI
DI
DI
DI
R
BO
BO
XP
XV
CYV
AZI
AZO
NM
DN
SV
S
EN
YP
YV
COR
POV
NOV
QF
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
Brief description
Mode of operation
AZI AZO
Caution: For the case AZI AZO, the normalization for the reference
velocity can change. This depends on the interpretation of the position
values, and is therefore application-specific.
Example:
720
DN = NM = 1;
Position
YP
360
XP
t
Case 1:
9-81
GMC blocks
Case 2:
I/O
Pre-assign.
XP
0.0
XV
0.0
CYV
Correction factor to adapt the output velocity when using the block for axis
cycle conversion (AZI AZO )
1.0
AZI
360000
AZ0
Axis cycle for the output position reference value (O = linear axis)
360000
NM
DN
SV
EN
YP
0.0
YV
Velocity setpoint
0.0
COR
Corrective value for jumps at YP due to limiting to the axis cycle for rotaryaxis systems.
POV
For the position correction YP = YP - COR, POV is set to 1 for the duration of
a processing cycle (position overflow for a positive direction of rotation).
NOV
For the position correction YP = YP + COR, NOV is set to 1 for the duration
of a processing cycle (position overflow for a negative direction of rotation).
QF
Configuring data
9-82
0.0
0
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
25
8
4,0
GMC blocks
9.17
Symbol
INT_MR
Reference velocity
Position normalization
Velocity normalization
Axis cycle
Setting value
Set position
Hold position
Enable
R
R
R
DI
R
BO
BO
BO
XV
NFX
NFV
AZ
SV
S
HLD
EN
YP
YV
COR
POV
NOV
QF
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
Brief description
Mode of operation
9-83
GMC blocks
I/O
Pre-assign.
XV
NFX
Position normalization:
Rotary axis:
0.0
Number of LU per revolution
Linear axis:
Number of LU
360000
per meter
NFV
NFV
1/s
mm/s
60.0
0.06
1.0
AZ
SV
HLT
EN
YP
YV
COR
Correction value for jumps at YP due to limiting to the axis cycle for rotary-axis
systems.
POV
For the position correction YP = YP - COR, POV is set to 1 for the duration of
a processing cycle (position overflow for a positive direction of rotation).
NOV
For the position correction YP = YP + COR, NOV is set to 1 for the duration of
a processing cycle (position overflow for a negative direction of rotation).
QF
Configuring data
9-84
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
15
5
2,5
GMC blocks
9.18
Symbol
WEBSFT
Position actual value
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Position offset
Max. measured value number
Axis cycle
Save measured value
Delete measured value memory
Enable
R
R
R
R
I
DI
BO
BO
BO
XP
XM1
XM2
DX
NMX
AZ
SAV
CLR
EN
YP
QV
QF
R
BO
BO
Brief description
Mode of operation
9-85
GMC blocks
I/O
Pre-assign.
XP
0.0
XM1
Measured value 1
0.0
XM2
Measured value 2
0.0
DX
0.0
NMX
32
AZ
SAV
CLR
EN
YP
QV
QF
Configuring data
9-86
360000
0.0
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
15
5
2,5
GMC blocks
9.19
Symbol
OVFHSK
Correction value, input DI
Positive overflow, input BO
Negative overflow, input BO
POV checkback signal BO
NOV checkback signal BO
Brief description
COI
POI
NOI
PFB
NFB
Mode of operation
Setpoint
generation
COR1
POV1
NOV1
The block contains the overflow signals POI, NOI and the correction
value as input signals. It transfers these to the converter via the
communications interface. The signals are received at the converter and
are sent back as receive acknowledgment via the communications
interface. There, they are connected to the feedback signal inputs PFB,
NFB. Only after an overflow signal has been fed back, is the overflow
signal reset. This overflow cycle generally takes several processing
cycles due to the double transfer involved.
OVFHSK
COI
POI
NOI
PFB
NFB
COR
POV
NOV
Communications
interface
Converter
COR2
POV2
NOV2
9-87
GMC blocks
POI
NOI
POV
PFB
COI
COR
t
I/O
Pre-assign.
COI
POI
NOI
PFB
NFB
COR
POV
For the position correction YP = YP - COR, POV is set to 1 for the duration
of a processing cycle (e. g. position overflow for a positive direction of
rotation).
NOV
For the position correction YP = YP + COR, NOV is set to 1 for the duration
of a processing cycle (e. g. position overflow for a negative direction of
rotation).
QF
Configuring data
9-88
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
Special features
10
3
1,5
GMC blocks
9.20
Symbol
TAB
Coupling module name
User data area (DB No.)
Address parameter, receive
Receive mode
Telegram failure time
Table name
SAVE area
Manual/automatic mode
Valid table
No. of points
X value point i
Y value point i
Index point i
Write point
Output point
Enable
Brief description
GV
GV
S
S
R
S
BO
BO
BO
DI
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
CTS
XDB
US
MOD
TFT
NAM
SAV
AUT
TVL
NP
XP
YP
IP
WR
RD
EN
TAB
DB
YNP
YXP
YYP
YIP
QTS
YTS
YTC
DI
W
DI
R
R
DI
BO
W
W
Table
DB number of the table
Number of points actual
X value actual point i
Y value actual point i
Index actual point i
Block status
Status display
Status display, communications
The function blocks FB TAB and FB TAB_D are used to manage the
tabular values of SIMATIC and SIMADYN D. They only differ by the
managed data types. The FB TAB manages tabular values of the data
type REAL, FB TAB_D, data type DINT.
The following diagram shows a schematic overview of the inputs and
outputs of the FB TAB and its data types:
The representation of FB TAB corresponds, with the exception of the
data types of the following I/O, the representation of the FB TAB_D:
XP
YP
YXP
YYP
9-89
GMC blocks
I/O
Pre-assign.
CTS
XDB
US
Empty string
MOD
TFT
NAM
Table name
(initialization connection)
SAV
SAVE area
(initialization connection)
At this initialization connection it is specified as to whether the table should
be saved in the battery-buffered RAM (SAV = 1) or in the unbuffered RAM
(SAV = 0).
AUT
Manual/automatic mode
Changeover between the manual and automatic mode. Automatic mode
(AUT = 1)
TVL
Valid table
The table becomes valid and is available at output TAB using a positive
edge at input TVL. This is only effective in the manual mode
100 ms
Empty string
After the new table values have been activated, for larger tables, brief
delays can occur before the block again responds to user entries in the
manual mode. In this time, data in the table is internally copied between the
active and inactive tables.
NP
Number of points
(initialization connection)
XP
X value point i
0.0
YP
Y value point i
0.0
IP
Index point i
WR
Write point
RD
EN
TAB
Table
DB
YNP
YXP
0.0
YYP
0.0
YIP
9-90
GMC blocks
QTS
Block status
At block output QTS it is displayed as to whether the block is operating
error-free (QTS = 1) or was inactive (QTS = 0).
YTS
Detailed status display; for values at YTS refer to: D7-SYS online help
"Help for
events" (press key F1 in the CFC and call the help on events topic under
"CFC for SIMADYN D".)
YTC
Configuring data
4.5/point
1.5/point
0.8/ point
others:
T400/PM5:
FM 458/PM6:
CPU550/551
45
15
7.5/point
No
Can be configured in
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Initialization mode
Normal mode
Special features
9-91
GMC blocks
9.21
Symbol
DRVIF
Position ref. value
Speed setpoint
Reference speed
Position correction value input
Drive status word
Brake delay time
Positive position overflow
Negative position overflow
Non-synchronous operation
Standstill detected
Drive fast stop
Enable acknowledge fault
Enable save measured value
R
R
R
DI
DI
SD
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
XP
XV
RS
COI
STW
TBR
POV
NOV
ASY
STS
STP
ACK
ENM
Enable referencing
Set position actual value
Set position ref. value
Enable position control
Enable drive
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
REF
SPA
SPS
ENP
EN
Brief description
YP
YPI
COR
YVI
CTW
QOP
QE
QEN
BRK
ERR
QMV
QRP
QF
R
DI
DI
DI
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
Mode of operation
The inputs EN, ENP, ACK and STS are used to generate control word 1
(refer to the documentation for MASTERDRIVES MC, Chart 180). The
status word 1 of the drive should be placed at the lower word of input
STW.
The drive can be powered-up and power-down using input EN. A rising
edge (EN = 0 1) should be generated to power-up the drive.
9-92
GMC blocks
If the drive has a fault condition when it is being powered-up, the fault is
automatically acknowledged if ACK is set to 1, If the fault cannot be
acknowledged, the power-up operation is cancelled after 2 seconds. In
this case, the drive can only be powered-up, after the fault has been
removed, by a new 0 1 signal edge at EN.
Fast stop
Holding brake
EN=0
Initial status
Drive inhibited
Brake closed
EN=0
or fault
Power-up drive
Close brake
Drive operational
Standstill
Open brake
Open brake
Setpoint/ref. value
generation active
EN=0 or fault
9-93
GMC blocks
When shutting down, the brake is only closed when the standstill signal
STS = 1 is present. The drive is only inhibited (pulse inhibit) after the
brake has been closed.
The assignment of the control word (CTW) and status word (STW) can
be taken from the following table. Only the entries of the status word,
identified with are evaluated.
Bit
9-94
Ready to power-up
ON
Ready
Operation
Fault
No OFF2 present
No OFF3 present
Power-on inhibit
Setpoint is enabled
Alarm
10
11
Fault, undervoltage
12
13
Ramp-function generator
14
15
- Reserve -
16
POV feedback
POV
17
NOV feedback
NOV
18
19
20
Position corrected
21
- not assigned -
22
- not assigned -
23
- not assigned -
24
- not assigned -
- not assigned -
25
- not assigned -
Rest
- not assigned -
- not assigned -
GMC blocks
Non-synchronous
operation
For applications with rotary axis, the position reference value is corrected
(position step) by the axis cycle length, as soon as the rotary axis cycle
has been exceeded. The same position step must be simultaneously
made in the actual value channel in order to avoid giving the closed-loop
position control a fictitious position error. This means that at the same
time as the position step, an overflow signal (POV or NOV) is generated
which means that the correction value COR is either subtracted or added
to/from the position actual value.
This principle assumes that the setpoint/reference value and actual value
generation operate in absolute synchronism, as the overflow signals are
only present for the duration of a machining cycle. For asynchronous
operation (e.g. setpoint generation in a 1 ms cycle, actual value channel
and closed-loop position control (drive) in 3.2 ms), not every overflow
signal is received in the drive. A fictitious error of one axis cycle is
obtained if the overflow signal is missing, as the actual position is not
corrected.
The following steps are required in order to permit asynchronous
operation:
1. POV and NOV signals of the control word in the drive must be
inserted in the status word according to the table above. This means
that the overflow pulses are returned to the setpoint/reference value
generation (feedback).
2. Set input ASY to 1. This means that the POV/NOV signals are
extended until they appear in the status word via the feedback
channel.
If new overflow conditions occur between a position correction and
receiving a feedback pulse, then these are buffered and no position steps
are transferred to the drive. In this particular case, a new position
correction is only made after the feedback pulse has been received. With
this new position correction, all of the buffered overflows are taken into
account.
I/O
Pre-assign.
XP
Reference position
XV
Speed setpoint
RS
Reference speed of the drive: The speed, for the speed normalization used,
which is displayed in the drive as 100%. Also refer to Parameter P353 for
MASTERDRIVES MC. It is not permissible that RS is 0.0!
COI
STW
TBR
Brake delay time; Time to open or close the motor holding brake
0 ms
POV
NOV
ASY
Non-synchronous operation
3000.0
0
0
9-95
GMC blocks
STS
STP
Drive fast stop: brakes the drive along the current limit down to standstill.
ACK
Enable acknowledge fault. For ACK=1, faults present before the drive is
powered-up, are acknowledged.
ENM
REF
SPA
SPS
ENP
Enables the position controller in the drive. The drive can be operated in the
closed-loop speed controlled mode when the position controller is inhibited
EN
Enables the drive. The drive can be powered-up and powered-down using
this input. Also refer to the state diagram above.
YP
YPI
COR
Correction value (step height) to correct the position actual value in the
drive.
YVI
CTW
QOP
QE
QEN
BRK
ERR
Drive fault.
QMV
QRP
QF
Configuring data
Yes
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
15
5
2,5
Cyclic tasks
Computed in:
9-96
Normal mode
GMC blocks
9.22
Symbol
MDCMP1
1. Position ref. value
1. Velocity setpoint
2. Position ref. value
2. Velocity setpoint
Channel selection
Setting value, position
Dynamic position offset
Correction value for the position act. value
Relative velocity for equalization
Relative acceleration for equalization
R
R
R
R
BO
R
R
R
R
R
XP1
XV1
XP2
XV2
SEL
SV
OFS
XCP
VMX
AMX
Jerk
Position normalization
Velocity normalization
Axis cycle
Set position
Correct position actual value
Static offset compensation
Dynamic offset compensation
Equalization using forwards motion
Equalization using reverse motion
Hold
Jog velocity
Jogging forwards
Jogging backwards
Referencing velocity
Referencing mode
Referencing
Reference point detected
Initial position
Traverse to the initial position
R
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
R
BO
BO
R
I
BO
BO
R
BO
JRK
NFX
NFV
AZ
S
CP
SOC
DOC
FWD
BWD
HLT
VJG
JGF
JGB
VRF
MDR
REF
SYN
XHM
POS
Brief description
YP
YV
COR
POV
NOV
DON
QRF
QER
QST
QF
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
Reference position
Reference velocity
Correction value
Positive position overflow
Negative position overflow
Equalization completed
Referenced
Enable referencing
Standstill
Group fault
9-97
GMC blocks
To select the actual block mode, the following priority list applies (* = any;
DOC and SOC can occur simultaneously):
Priority
HLT
JGF
JGB
REF
POS
SOC DOC
*
Setting function
Operating mode
Stopping
Referencing
01
Local operation
9-98
GMC blocks
MDR
Referencing not possible. Set this mode when using absolute value
encoders.
The reference velocity remains, also after passing the reference point
to VRF to REF=0, or another mode is activated.
After the reference point has been passed the drive remains
stationary.
After passing the reference point, the drive positions itself to the initial
position XHM. Positioning also depends on the data entered at inputs
VMX, AMX, JRK, FWD and BWD.
Exiting local
operation
After all of the local operating modes have been exited (i.e. for S = HLT =
JGF = JGB = POS = 0) the position and speed are smoothly transitioned
to the setpoint channel selected using SEL. The block is then in the
synchronous mode.
Setting function
and static
equalization
XP(t)
YP(t)
YP
XP(t)
YP(t)
SV
S
SOC
Setting the static offset
9-99
GMC blocks
Changing the
setpoint channel
Offset equalization
(DOC)
Direction of the
equalization
operation
XCP, CP
9-100
FWD
BWD
>0
Shortest distance
>0
Backwards
>0
Forwards
Shortest distance
If the position actual value and position reference value are changed as
step function, then connections I/O XCP and CP become active. At the
same time as the setpoint step, the position change is entered at XCP
and is transferred as correction to the position actual value with a rising
edge at CP. This function is, e.g. required, if for flying referencing, the
setpoint is to be simultaneously adapted.
GMC blocks
I/O
Pre-assign.
XP1
0.0
XV1
0.0
XP2
0.0
XV2
0.0
SEL
SV
0.0
OFS
0.0
XCP
Correction value for the position actual value. For a rising edge at CP, the
position actual value is increased by XCP as correction (outputs COR, POV,
NOV).
0.0
VMX
Max. relative velocity for the equalization sequence (XV). The equalization
sequence is superimposed on the synchronous operation YV. This means that
the sum of XV and dv act at output YV which means that values greater than the
rated drive velocity can be obtained!
100.0
AMX
100.0
JRK
Jerk = Change in the acceleration per unit time for the equalization sequence.
Units: Rotary axis [1/m]
Linear axis [m/s]
JRK = 0 means no rounding-off.
1000.0
NFX
Position normalization:
36000
NFV
Rotary axis:
Linear axis:
1.0
Examples:
User normalization
1
1.0 = 1 /s
1.0 = 1 mm/s
Conversion
1
1 /s = 60 /min
1 mm/s = 0.06 m/ min
NFV
60.0
0.06
AZ
Set position. For S = 1, equalization sequences which have not been completed,
are cancelled.
CP
Correct the position actual value. The position actual value is increased by XCP
with a rising edge.
SOC
DOC
FWD
BWD
HLT
VJG
JGF
JGB
VRF
36000
0.0
0.0
9-101
GMC blocks
MDR
Mode for the behavior after passing the reference point (refer to the table above)
REF
Enable referencing
SYN
A rising edge at SYN signals that the reference point is passed in the referencing
mode.
XHM
0.0
POS
YP
0.0
YV
0.0
COR
POV
NOV
DON
QRF
QER
QST
QF
Configuring data
Yes
T400 / PM5:
FM458 / PM6:
CPU550 / 551
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
22
7.5
6,0
Cyclic tasks
Computed in:
9-102
Normal mode
GMC blocks
9.23
Symbol
CLUTCH
Reference position
Referencing velocity
Shutdown position
Offset setpoint
Local velocity
Max. equalization velocity
Acceleration when equalizing
Jerk
Position normalization
Velocity normalization
Axis cycle
Position setting value
Set position
Stop as fast as possible
Hold for XPS
Synchronous operation (YP=XP)
Speed synchronism
Local operation
Over control permitted
Forwards
Backwards
Enable
Brief description
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
DI
XP
XV
XPS
DYP
VLC
VMX
AMX
JRK
NFX
NFV
AZ
R
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
SV
S
HLT
STP
SYP
SYN
LOC
OVD
FWD
BWD
EN
YP
YV
COR
POV
NOV
QSY
QLC
QST
QTR
DON
QF
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
9-103
GMC blocks
The block differentiates itself from the CATCH block by a simpler control
interface. Every operating mode can be activated using an input,
whereby the operating data are staggered according to priority. It is not
possible to re-calculate equalization motion in order to enter changed
limit values for speed (VMX), acceleration (AMX) or jerk (JRK) (refer to
input TRG at block CATCH).
The block has several operating modes. To activate a mode, the
associated input should be set to 1. The control inputs are prioritized
according to the following table (* = any input; 1 has the highest priority):
Mode of operation
Prior
ity
HLT
STP
SYP
SYN
LOC
Operating mode
Input
Setting function: YP = SV
XPS
DYP
VLC
-
9-104
GMC blocks
Reference position
0.0
XV
Referencing velocity
0.0
XPS
0.0
DYP
0.0
VLC
Local reference velocity for the local operation. When changed, output YV
tracks the ramp, defined by AMX and JRK.
0.0
VMX
AMX
JRK
1000.0
50.0
2000.0
m
50 2
da
s = 2000 m
=
dt 25ms
s3
Example:
This means that for JRK = 2000, an acceleration of 50m/s is reached after 25
ms.
NFX
Position normalization:
Rotary axis:
Linear axis:
NFV
360000
1.0
Examples:
User normalization
1
1.0 = 1 /s
1.0 = 1 mm/s
Conversion
1
1 /s = 60 /min
1 mm/s = 0.06 m/ min
NFV
60.0
0.06
AZ
Axis cycle for the input and output position value (O = linear axis)
SV
36000
0.0
0
9-105
GMC blocks
HLT
Stopping as quickly as possible: For HLT=1 the speed setpoint is ramped down
to zero.
STP
Hold at XPS: For STP = 1 the reference position remains stationary at XPS.
For OVD = 1, the axis positions to XPS.
SYP
Synchronous operation with a defined offset (DYP) between YP and XP. When
the mode is activated, ramp-up is delayed until YP can engage with the
required offset.
SYN
Synchronous operation for undefined offset between YP and XP. When the
operating mode is activated, YV immediately ramps-up to XV.
LOC
Local velocity input VLC. When VLC is changed, the setpoint speed follows via
ramps.
OVD
FWD
Equalization motion is made in the forwards direction (refer to the table above)
BWD
EN
YP
0.0
YV
0.0
COR
POV
NOV
QSY
QLC
QST
Standstill signal.
QTR
DON
QF
Configuring data
Yes
T400 / PM5:
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
23
7,5
3,8
Cyclic tasks
Computed in:
9-106
Normal mode
GMC blocks
9.24
Symbol
SHEAR
Material position
Format (product length)
Shears circumference
Synchronous operation [degrees]
Velocity normalization
Axis cycle output
Cut enable
Enable block
R
R
R
R
R
DI
BO
BO
XP
FMT
CIR
SYR
NFV
AZO
CUT
EN
YP
YV
YFR
YFI
COR
POV
NOV
QST
R
R
R
DI
DI
BO
BO
BO
Position, shears
Speed, shears
Format actual value (floating point)
Format actual value (integer)
Correction value
Positive overflow
Negative overflow
Standstill
Brief description
The block calculates the reference position and speed for rotary shears
or a cross-sealing device as a function of the material position and
product length.
During operation, the shears can be shutdown at the quiescent position,
which is located with a 180 offset with respect to the cut/sealing position.
The product length can be changed during operation.
Mode of operation
YP
YP
AZO
AZO
Characteristic for
FMT = CIR
AZO
AZO
CIR
FMT
XP
Characteristic for
FMT = CIR
FMT
CIR
XP
For large formats, the shears brakes down to standstill (estimated value:
From product lengths FMT > 2 CIR; dependent on SYR). On the other
hand, for product lengths less than CIR outside the cutting range, the
speed of the shears is higher than the material velocity.
9-107
GMC blocks
Cutting is either enabled or inhibited using the CUT input. In the inhibited
state, the shears are in the quiescent position and AZO. If cutting is
then enabled with CUT = 1, the shears accelerate up to the material
velocity and then cut according to the selected product length.
XP
YP
FMT
XP(t)
AZO
YP(t)
t
CUT
t
Cut
YV
Cut range
t
Behavior when cutting is enabled
Format change
If the cut format is changed (product length), then this only becomes
effective after the next cut. The change must be synchronized with the
axis cycle for the material position. XP must maintain the old axis cycle
limits until the new format has been accepted (old value of FMT)
GEAR
XP
AZI
AZO
SHEAR
YP
Format
XP
YP
FMT
YFI
9-108
GMC blocks
I/O
Pre-assign.
0.0
XP
Material position. Position actual value of the products or the endless material
which is either cut using the shears or is transversely sealed using the sealing
device. (Position normalization as FMT)
FMT
Cutting format. Clearance between two products. The material position must
have axis cycle FMT. XP, FMT and CIR must have the same position
normalization!
20000.0
CIR
50000.0
SYR
10.0
NFV
Speed normalization for the shears speed YV. NFV is the reference speed, i.e.
the speed in RPM, which should be displayed as YV = 1.0.
1.0
AZO
Axis cycle for the shears position. This means a default value of 36000
increments per revolution.
CUT
Enables cutting operation. For CUT = 0 the shears come to a standstill at AZO/2
EN
Block enable
YP
YV
0.0
YFR
0.0
YFI
COR
POV
For a positive position overflow, POV is set to 1 for one processing cycle.
NOV
For a negative position overflow, NOV is set to 1 for one processing cycle.
QST
Shears standstill
QCO
Cutting operation active. After the cut enable has been withdrawn (CUT = 0),
QCO is set to 0 when the shears come to a standstill.
QF
Group fault
Configuring data
Yes
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Can be configured in
36000
0
17
5,5
2,8
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Computed in:
Normal mode
9-109
GMC blocks
9.25
EDC1 engager/disengager
Symbol
EDC1
Reference position
Referencing velocity
Axis cycle, input
Axis cycle, output
Coupling position
Engage/disengage length
Ramp length
Rounding-off (percentage)
Position setting value
Set position
Start/stop trigger
Start/stop continuous
Engage/disengage
Enable
Brief description
R
R
DI
DI
R
R
R
R
XP
XV
AZI
AZO
XCP
DXL
RMP
DRP
R
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
SV
S
SST
SSC
ED
EN
YP
YV
COR
POV
NOV
QSY
QST
QF
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
Engaged operation
XV
YV
YP
YP
2 DXL
DXL
SST
SST
9-110
XV
GMC blocks
Disengaging
operation
XV
YP
YP
2 DXL
DXL
SST
SST
Continuous
operation
9-111
GMC blocks
YV
YV
0 XCP
0 XCP
0 XCP
SSC
XP
0 XCP
0 XCP
0 XCP
SSC
Intermittent
operation
YP
RMP
2
Rounding-off DRP
RMP
2
DRP = 0 %
YV
DRP = 50 %
dYV
dt
DRP
Ramps, roundingoff
9-112
DRP = 100 %
GMC blocks
I/O
Pre-assign.
XP
Reference position
0.0
XV
Referencing velocity
0.0
AZI
36000
AZO
36000
XCP
DXL
36000
RMP
12000
DRP
10 %
SV
SST
SSC
ED
EN
YP
0.0
YV
0.0
COR
Correction value for steps at YP due to limiting the axis cycle for systems with
rotary axis.
POV
For the position correction YP = YP - COR, POV is set to 1 for the duration of a
processing/machining (position overflow for positive direction of rotation).
NOV
For the position correction YP = YP + COR, NOV is set to 1 for the duration of a
processing/machining (position overflow for negative direction of rotation).
QSY
Synchronous operation: This signal indicates that the master axis and slave axis
are operating in angular synchronism with respect to one another
QST
QF
0.0
0.0
1: Engaging
9-113
GMC blocks
Configuring data
Yes
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Can be configured in
27
9
4,5
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Computed in:
9-114
Normal mode
GMC blocks
9.26
Symbol
MCSB
Start position
Start velocity
Start acceleration
End position
End velocity
End acceleration
Time inputs
Max. velocity
Max. deceleration
Jerk
Position normalization
Velocity normalization
No. sequence blocks
Motion command
Update curve
Brief description
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
X0
V0
A0
XE
VE
AE
TX
VMX
AMX
R
R
R
I
I
BO
JRK
NFX
NFV
NFB
CMD
UPD
FKT
DSO
YDT
YTT
YAZ
QVM
QAM
QF
YFC
DI
DI
R
R
DI
BO
BO
BO
I
Calculation function
Cascade output
Duration of the section
Total duration
Total duration (rounded-off)
Vmax exceeded
Amax exceeded
Group fault
Fault code
Mode of operation
(de-activate scaling)
(absolute output of the characteristic)
9-115
GMC blocks
SCV =
60000
NFX NFV
Supplem
entary FB
Basis-FB
MCSB
DSO
DSI
MCSS
DSO
MCSS
FKT
YAZ
YTT
Cam
FKT
AZI
XP
INT
X = 1000
TI = 1 s
60000
NFX * NFV
CAMD
SCV
The initial and end conditions for position, velocity, and acceleration are
entered at block NCSB. If subsequent blocks are used, their motion
sequence starts with the end data of the preceding block.
9-116
GMC blocks
The input CMD defines the required motion sequence version. 9 versions
are available:
CMD
CMD
Command
End position
End velocity
End
acceleration
No function
X0
V0
A0
Absolute positioning
XE
VE
AE
Relative positioning
X0 + XE
VE
AE
X0
X0 + XE
Traverse to velocity VE
undefined
VE
undefined
VE
undefined
VE
X0
V0
A0
XE
VE
AE
10
XE
VE
AE
Maintaining VMX,
AMX
For certain entries, for motion sequence, limit values VMX and AMX
cannot be maintained. This is especially true for CMD = 9, as the time
required for the operation is specified. The shorter the time entered, then
the higher the acceleration rates and velocities. If the limit value is
exceeded, this is displayed as alarm at outputs QVM or QAM. The
following rule applies:
If the limit value is exceeded at the start or the end of the operation, this
is not displayed as alarm. For example, for VMX = 5 m/s, the initial value
of the velocity V0 = 10 m/s is used as start velocity, then this is
interpreted as a transition from a fast to a slow motion section. In this
case, an alarm is not output, i.e. QVM = 0.
However, if the operation starts at VMX = V0 = 5 m/s and A0 = 20 m/s,
then it is unavoidable that the velocity is exceeded along the curve as a
result of the initial acceleration (assumption:
JRK 0). In this case,
QVM is set to 1.
9-117
GMC blocks
Rotary/linear axis
Example, rotary
axis
Fault codes
9-118
YFC
Significance
NO fault
Sequence not possible within the time entered at TX; or the end of
the previous section is located after TX (this involves CMD = 3; 4; 7;
9)
GMC blocks
I/O
Pre-assign.
X0
0.0
V0
0.0
A0
0.0
XE
Final position
0.0
VE
Final velocity
0.0
AE
Final acceleration
0.0
TX
0.0
VMX
Maximum velocity for all sections of the curve (QVM!). When required, VMX is
individually entered for each subsequent block.
10.0
AMX
10.0
JRK
1000.0
NFX
Position normalization:
10000
NFV
Rotary axis:
Linear axis:
60.0
Examples:
User normalization
m
1.0 = 1 /s
1.0 = 1 mm/s
Conversion
m
1 /s = 60 /min
1 mm/s = 0.06 m/ min
NFV
60.0
0.06
NFB
Number of subsequent blocks. This input is used to reserve memory space for
the characteristics. Furthermore, it is required for the interaction with the
subsequent blocks.
CMD
FKT
Reference to the calculated time runs. This output should be connected to the
cam (input FKT)
DSO
Cascade output to extend the curve using subsequent blocks. This output should
be connected with input DSI (block MCSS)
YDT
0.0
YTT
0.0
YAZ
Rounded-off total duration of all cascaded curve sections in [ms] to input the
input axis cycle AZI of cam disk CAMD.
QVM
Alarm: Vmax exceeded. The alarm indicates that the motion inputs will cause the
maximum velocity VMX to be exceeded.
QAM
Alarm: Amax exceeded. The alarm indicates that the motion inputs will cause the
maximum acceleration AMX to be exceeded.
QF
Group fault
YFC
9-119
GMC blocks
Configuring data
Yes
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Can be configured in
20 (... 300)
7 (... 100)
3,5 (... 50)
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Computed in:
Normal mode
9-120
GMC blocks
9.27
Symbol
MCSS
Cascade input
Final position
Final velocity
Final acceleration
Time input
Max. velocity
Max. acceleration
DI
R
R
R
R
R
R
Motion command I
Brief description
DSI
XE
VE
AE
TX
VMX
AMX
DSO
YDT
YTE
QVM
QAM
QF
YFC
DI
R
R
BO
BO
BO
I
Cascade output
Section duration
Time at section end
Vmax exceeded
Amax exceeded
Group fault
Fault code
CMD
Mode of operation
Input DSI should be connected to the block output which defines the
previous motion section. This means that block MCSS generates a
motion sequence which connects seamlessly and jerk-free to the final
conditions (position, velocity, acceleration) of the previous block.
For the MCSS block, the settings VMX, AMX, JRK, NFX and NFV apply
at the basis block (MCSB) of the motion sequence. VMX or AMX should
be set greater than zero if, for the section being considered, different limit
values should apply for velocity and acceleration.
CMD
Input CMD defines the motion sequence version required. 9 versions are
available. In the table, the meanings are as follows:
X0 Initial position (final position of the previous section)
V0 Initial velocity
(final velocity of the previous section)
A0 Initial velocity
(final velocity of the previous section)
9-121
GMC blocks
Updating curves
CMD
Caution: Changes made at the input only update curves if input UPD is
set to 1 at the basis block. While a characteristic is being re-calculated,
the old curve is no longer valid! The associated characteristic block
CAMD outputs position YP = 0 and signals QF = 1 (group fault).
Command
Final position
Final velocity
Final
acceleration
No function
X0
V0
A0
Absolute positioning
XE
VE
AE
Relative positioning
X0 + XE
VE
AE
X0
X0 + XE
Traverse to velocity VE
Undefined
VE
Undefined
VE
Undefined
VE
X0
V0
A0
XE
VE
AE
10
XE
VE
AE
Maintaining VMX,
AMX
9-122
For certain entries, for motion sequence, limit values VMX and AMX
cannot be maintained. This is especially true for CMD = 9, as the time
required for the operation is specified. The shorter the time entered, then
the higher the acceleration rates and velocities. If the limit value is
exceeded, this is displayed as alarm at outputs QVM or QAM (also refer
to MCSB).
GMC blocks
YFC
Fault codes
Significance
No fault
Insufficient memory
Sequence not possible within the time entered at TX or, the end of
the previous section is after TX (involves CMD = 3; 4; 7; 9)
I/O
Pre-assign.
DSI
XE
Final position
0.0
VE
Final velocity
0.0
AE
Final acceleration
0.0
TX
0.0
VMX
Optional max. velocity for the actual curve sections (observe QVM!). For VMX =
0.0, the VMX setting applies at the basis block MCSB of the cascade (chain).
0.0
AMX
Optional max. acceleration for the actual curve sections (observe QVM!). For
AMX = 0.0, the AMX setting applies at the basis block MCSB of the cascade
(chain)..
0.0
Units:
CMD
FKT
Reference to the calculated time curves, This output should be connected to the
cam (input FKT)
DSO
YDT
0.0
YTE
Time at the end of the actual curve section in [ms] referred to the start of the
characteristic.
0.0
QVM
Warning: Vmax exceeded. The alarm signifies that the specified motion causes
the maximum velocity VMX to be exceeded.
QAM
Alarm: Amax exceeded. The alarm signifies that the specified motion causes the
maximum acceleration AMX to be exceeded.
QF
Group fault
YFC
9-123
GMC blocks
Configuring data
Yes
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Can be configured in
9 (... 300)
3 (... 100)
1,5 (... 50)
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Computed in:
Normal mode
9-124
GMC blocks
9.28
Symbol
CAMSW1
Time since the curve start
Refer to the curve definition
Curve value switch-in
Deadtime switch-in [ms]
R
DI
R
R
XP
FKT
Y1
DT1
R
R
R
R
BO
BO
BO
XS1
Y2
DT2
XS2
TSM
UPD
EN
Q
QN
QF
YFC
BO
BO
BO
I
Cam active
Cam inverse
Group fault
Fault code
Brief description
Mode of operation
The block inputs XP and FKT are connected to the same outputs as the
associated cam. The reference of the block to the characteristic is
established by connecting input FKT to the outputs of block MCSB
having the same name (generates the characteristic). A sawtooth signal
is connected at input XP; this increases (rate-of-rise) by a value of 1.0
per millisecond.
Characteristic YP(t)
XS1 < 0
XS1 > 0
Y1
Y2
XP = t
Example 1:
XS1>0; XS2 < 0;
DT1 = DT2 = 0
Example 2:
DT1 = 20 ms
DT2 = -20 ms
|XS2|
|XS1|
Q(t)
XP = t
Q(t)
XP = t
20 ms
20 ms
9-125
GMC blocks
Switch-in threshold
Deadtime
The switch-in instant can be offset using input DT1. Positive values of
DT1 are effective, to compensate the deadtime, this means that switch-in
is realized DT1 milliseconds earlier than the switching threshold is
reached. Negative values delay the switch-in instant.
Switch-out
An independent curve point Y2, search range XS2 and time offset DT2
apply for the switch-out instant.
Shift mode
For the switching offset (DT1, DT2) it must be known whether the curve
is passed-through sporadically or periodically. If the curve is sporadically
passed-through, this means that an undefined time expires after the
curve has been completed before the curve is passed-through again. On
the other hand, if the curve is periodically passed through, this means
that input XP is controlled from a continuous sawtooth signal, whereby
the curve is passed through once in one sawtooth cycle.
For the sporadic mode, the switching instants can be shifted as a
maximum up to the range limits. In this case, TSM should be set to 0. For
the periodic mode (TSM = 1), the switching instant can be shifted beyond
the range limit. This means, for example, switch-in can be shifted so far
that it occurs in the previous cycle.
Computation time
The search for the instant which is associated with a required switching
threshold involves a lot of computation time. The search mechanism can
be de-activated (UPD = 0) in order to avoid unnecessarily high
computation times. In this case, a change at the inputs (Y1, Y2, XS1,
XS2, DT1, DT2 and TSM) is not detected.
For UPD =1 all of the inputs with the exception of XP should be
connected to fixed values. Connections to fluctuating values (e.g. analog
values) result in high computation loads!
Fault codes
9-126
YFC
Significance
No fault
Insufficient memory
Search range lies outside the curve (the search starts after the curve
and the search direction is increasing)
GMC blocks
I/O
Pre-assign.
0.0
XP
Time since the start of the curve. This input should be connected with a
sawtooth signal which increases by 1.0 per millisecond each time the curve is
run-through!
FKT
Reference to the curve function. Connect the input with output FKT of the
curve generation (block MCSB).
Y1
0.0
DT1
0.0
XS1
0.0
Y2
0.0
DT2
0.0
XS2
0.0
TSM
Shift mode:
UPD
EN
Configuring data
Yes
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Can be configured in
11 (... 168)
3.5 (... 56)
1,8 (... 28)
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Computed in:
Normal mode
The computation times in brackets apply once after the switching thresholds have
been changed.
9-127
GMC blocks
9.29
Symbol
ENC2
Hardware address
Hardware mode
Gearbox factor, numerator
Gearbox factor, denominator
G
W
DI
DI
AD
MHW
NM
DN
ENC
QF
YFC
Brief description
Mode of operation
NAVMC
AD
Encoder 2
ENC2
AD
ENC
SEL
ENC
Encoder 3
ENC2
AD
ENC
If the system is to toggle between more than two encoders, then this can
be realized by changing-over to additional ENC2 blocks using switches
or multiplexers.
If all of the encoders used supply the same position data per increment,
then a gearbox factor of 1 is set (NM = DN = 1).
In all other cases, it is possible to convert the position normalization of
the NAVMC using the gearbox factor. This is required, for example, if the
encoders have another resolution or a mechanical gear is being used.
Example: Changing-over to an encoder with higher resolution
Encoder 1: 512 increments/revolution
Encoder 2: 2048 increments/revolution
NM / DN = 512 / 2048 NM = 1; DN = 4
9-128
GMC blocks
Encoder 2
37
Motor
19
1024 Pulses/rev
1024 Pulses/rev
NM = 19; DN = 37
Hardware mode
MHW
Bit(s)
2 ... 0
Function
Value
Hardware filter
Encoder type 1
Encoder type 2
000
No filter
No filter
001
500 ns
125 ns
010
2 s
Not permissible
011
8 s
Not permissible
100
16 s
Not permissible
Others
Not permissible
Not permissible
6
7
10
Significance
Synchronization
Mode
Logic
000
001
010
011
100
101
Others
>5
Edge evaluation
Encoder type
9-129
GMC blocks
I/O
Pre-assign.
AD
MHW
Hardware mode
NM
DN
ENC
QF
YFC
Error code
Configuring data
9-130
Bit
0
16#0002
Significance
Master and slave are not configured in the same sampling time.
Yes
T400, PM5
FM458, PM6
CPU550/CPU551
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Computed in
Normal mode
Special features
4.5
1.5
0.8
GMC blocks
9.30
Symbol
NAVDP
Position reference value R
Encoder position DI
Position measured value DI
Encoder status word W
Operating mode W
No. of binary positions of GX2 I
Axis cycle DI
Pos. normalization, numerator DI
Pos.normalization, denominator DI
Reset position BO
Set position BO
Position setting value R
Request synchronization BO
Setting value f. synchronization R
Request measured value BO
Pos.ref.value of the meas.value R
Subtract pos. correction value BO
Add position correction value BO
Position correction value DI
Acknowledge encoder fault BO
Brief description
XP
GX1
GX2
G1S
MOD
BIT
AZ
NPN
NPD
R
S
SV
SYN
SVS
MES
XPM
CP
CN
DYP
ACK
XER
YP
YPM
YDM
G1C
QM
QMA
QMD
QSA
QSD
COR
POV
NOV
QF
YFC
ERR
DI
R
R
R
W
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
DI
BO
BO
BO
W
DW
9-131
GMC blocks
The position outputs YP, YPM, YDM and COR have the basis unit LU
(length unit). If systems with rotary axis and angular degrees are to be
used, we recommend the basis unit
1 LU = 0.001 - for systems with linear axis, 1 LU = 1 m.
Principally, every basis unit can be adjusted. However it should be
carefully noted that 1 LU is the lowest system resolution. This is the
reason that several inputs and outputs are exclusively implemented as
values with an integer multiple (type DINT). This prevents rounding-off
errors from being summed (accumulated) and guarantees long-term
stability of the position sensing function.
The position actual value is calculated as follows
YP = encoder pulses
NPN
+ DYP
NPD
The quotient NPN / NPD defines the basis unit. In this case, NPN
specifies the required position value and NPD the required number of
encoder pulses. (Please note: An encoder with 1024 pulses per
revolution supplies 4 * 1024 = 4096 pulses per revolution as every signal
edge is evaluated.)
Example:
If a gearbox is located between the motor and the machine, then the
gearbox factors
in NPN and NPD must be taken into account.
9-132
GMC blocks
Sawtooth
generation
For systems with rotary axis, a position overflow must be prevented for
YP. This means that YP must
be cyclically corrected (e.g. after every revolution) by the distance moved
(axis cycle). A sawtooth signal is obtained at output YP (at constant
speed). To achieve this, two different techniques are available.
1. The correction by the value DYP with rising edge at inputs CP and
CN. Generally, these signals are received from the setpoint channel.
However, this technique should not be used simultaneously with
other techniques (i.e. it should not be combined with other
techniques).
2. Internal generation of the sawtooth signal. In this case, bit 11 of MOD
should be set to 1.
If YP exceeds the value AZ, YP is set to YP - AZ. If YP drops below
0, YP is set to YP + AZ. The outputs POV and NOV are set for the
duration of one cycle.
Position correction
For each correction, the absolute value of the correction value is output
at COR. For a positive
overflow, COR is subtracted from YP and output POV is set for the
duration of a cycle.
For a negative overflow, COR is added to YP and a pulse is generated at
the NOV output.
If a correction with the same sign is made in two or several consecutive
sampling times, the correction is displayed, alternating, at POV and NOV.
In this case, the sign of COR is adapted so that the subsequent blocks
execute the correction with the correct sign.
Operating mode
Bit
0
Function
Edge for measured value
sensing
Value
Meaning
Incremental encoder
11
sawtooth generation
9-133
GMC blocks
Flying
measurement and
referencing
(synchronizing)
Both of these functions run in a similar fashion. They are started using
the particular input signals. The block generates the required encoder
control word according to the PROFIdrive specifications, sets the outputs
and evaluates the encoder status word. This sequence can be roughly
sub-divided into three phases:
Activation
The function has been activated and waits for an acknowledgement
from the drive
Measurement
The acknowledgement has been received, waits until the measured
value is there
Encoder control
word G1C
Depending on input MOD, bit 0, bit 7, 4-5 and bit 0 or bit 1 are set in the
encoder control word G1C.
Relevant bits in the encoder control word G1C
Bit
Function
Value
Meaning+
Flying measurement or
referencing (homing)
0
1
No function requested
Measuring probe, pos. edge or reference mark 1
Flying measurement or
referencing (homing)
0
1
No function requested
Measuring probe, negative signal edge
Command
00
01
10
11
No function requested
Activate referencing
Read value
Cancel
Flying measurement or
referencing (homing)
0
1
Referencing (homing)
Flying measurement
15
0
1
No function requested
Reset
4-5
G1S encoder
status word
9-134
Bit 8 = 1 signals that the measuring probe has been deflected. When the
measuring probe is deflected, output QM is set. Bit 15 signals an encoder
fault and causes the measurement to be cancelled using command 3
in bit 4, 5 from encoder control word G1C. Bit 15 is set in control word
G1C after an encoder fault and after the encoder fault acknowledgement
ACK.
GMC blocks
Fault codes
YFC:
Bit
Significance
Illegal parameter at input BIT. The value lies outside the interval
8...32
Errors when reading the absolute track of the absolute value encoder
For an encoder fault/error ERR contains bits 0...4 from GX2 - also refer to
the documentation to communicate via PROFIBUS-DP.
I/O
Default
XP
GX1
GX2
G1S
MOD
Mode
BIT
24
AZ
36000
NPN
36000
NPD
Reset position
Set position
0.0
4194304
9-135
GMC blocks
SV
SYN
Request synchronization
SVS
MES
Request measurement
XPM
CP
CN
DYP
ACK
XER
YP
0.0
YPM
0.0
YDM
0.0
G1C
QM
QMA
Measurement active
QMD
Measurement completed
QSA
Synchronization active
QSD
Synchronization completed
COR
Correction value for the position actual value. When the position actual value
is changed
due to CP, CN, synchronization or automatic
sawtooth generation, the absolute value (with sign)
of the change is displayed at COR.
POV
NOV
QF
Group fault
YFC
ERR
Configuring data
9-136
0.0
0
0.0
0
0.0
360000
FM458-1 DP
Yes
Can be configured in
Alarm tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
GMC blocks
9.31
Symbol
DRVIF2
Status word 1 W
Status word 2 W
Fast stop, drive BO
Enable drive BO
Acknowledge fault BO
Drive-specific control word 1 W
Drive-specific control word 2 W
Max. number of incorrect cycles I
Brief description
SW1
SW2
STP
EN
ACK
CW1
CW2
MXE
CT1
CT2
SON
SOP
SOE
ERR
SOI
WRN
CES
QF
QSL
QLZ
W
W
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
BO
Control word 1
Control word 2
Ready to power-up
Ready
Operation enabled
Drive fault
Power-on inhibit
Alarm
Enable setpoint
Group fault
Sign of life error status
Sign of life error for slaves
Powering-up and
powering-down a
drive
The inputs EN, ACK and STP are used to generate control word 1.
The drive can be powered-up and powered-down using input EN. A rising
edge (EN = 0 1) must be generated to power-up a drive.
If a drive fault is present when attempting to power-up a drive, then the
fault is automatically
acknowledged if ACK is set to 1. If the fault cannot be acknowledged,
then the power-on operation is interrupted after 2 seconds. In this case,
the drive can only be powered-up after the fault has been removed
using a new 0 1-edge at EN.
9-137
GMC blocks
Fast stop
Status diagram
S1 : Power on inhibited
Fast stop
Drive off
Fast stop
Fast stop
Ready to be
powered-up
S2:
Drive on
S3:
Drive off
Ramp stop
Power up
Drive off
S4: Operation
If bit 3 of CT1 is set the drive goes directly into state S4 from state S3.
Control word 1,
CT1
Value
Cause
0x043A
STP = 1
Drive off
0x043E
Drive on
0x047F
9-138
GMC blocks
Function
Value
Meaning
Off
On
Operating condition
OFF3
Fast stop
Operating condition
Operation enabled
Enables operation
Operating condition
No significance
Acknowledgement
Jogging 1 off
Not used
Jogging 2 off
Not used
10
Value
Meaning
Off
Drive OFF
Ready to power-up
Drive ON
Ready
Not evaluated
Inhibits operation
Releases operation
Fault-free
Fault
Not evaluated
Function
Drive ON
Signal
Name
SON
Ready to power-up
S2
SOP
Ready to operate
S3
SOE
Operation enabled
S4
ERR
Error
SOI
Power-on inhibited
WRN
Alarm
S1
9-139
GMC blocks
Device-specific
inputs
The user can inter-link device-specific signals with control words CT1
and CT2 via inputs CW1 and CW2. The following bits are masked:
CW1, bit 11 - 15 with CT1,
CW2, bit 0 - 11 with CT2.
Sign-of-life
monitoring
I/O
Default
SW1
0x0040
SW2
0xF000
STP
EN
ACK
CW1
0x07FF
CW2
0xF000
MXE
CT1
0x0000
CT2
0xF000
SON
SOP
SOE
ERR
SOI
WRN
CES
QF
Group fault
QSL
QLZ
9-140
10
GMC blocks
Configuring data
FM458-1 DP
Yes
Can be configured in
Alarm tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
9-141
GMC blocks
9.32
Symbol
RCVT5
Pointer to the telegram buffer DW
Offset ( bytes ) DI
Reference speed R
Telegram 5 /105 BO
Brief description
PTR
OFF
RS
TLG
ST1
NIB
ST2
G1S
GX1
GX2
Y
MLD
QF
YF
W
DI
W
W
DI
DI
R
W
BO
W
Status word 1
Speed actual value B
Status word 2
Encoder status word
Encoder position
Position measured value
Speed actual value
Message word
Fault status block
Status info block
Mode of operation
9-142
TLG
Telegram
MLD
105
GMC blocks
Telegram
OFF
18
105
105
20
QF
Meaning
YF
1
Meaning
Insufficient memory for the buffer;
Remedy: Reduce the buffer length or the configured software.
The block connected via PTR does not have the same sampling time.
Remedy: All of the pointer-based communication blocks, inter-linked
through a PTR-CFC connection, must have the same sampling time.
Offset greater than the buffer length, cyclic check, as OFF can be
changed online
Remedy: The offset must lie within the buffer length.
No data present;
Remedy: Check whether the telegram blocks CRV_P/CTV_P have
been
correctly initialized, are operating correctly and data is being
transferred.
9-143
GMC blocks
I/O
Default
PTR
OFF
Offset in bytes
RS
Reference speed
3000.0
TLG
Telegram 5 /105
ST1
NIB
ST2
G1S
GX1
GX2
MLD
QF
Fault status block (for the fault codes, refer to the table above)
YF
Configuring data
9-144
0
0
0x0040
0
0xF000
0
0.0
0x0000
0
16#0000
FM458-1 DP
Yes
Can be configured in
Alarm tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
GMC blocks
9.33
Symbol
SNDT5
Pointer to the telegram buffer DW
Offset (bytes) DI
Control word 1 W
Speed setpoint R
Control word 2 W
Encoder control word W
Incremental position difference DI
Position controller gain factor R
Reference speed R
Torque reduction I
Telegram 5 /105 BO
Brief description
PTR
OFF
CT1
Y
CT2
G1C
XER
KPC
RS
TRQ
TLG
Mode of operation
SNDT5 accesses the send data buffer using a pointer operation and
retrieves the individual values from the inputs corresponding to the
telegram specification. The CTV_P function block can, for example,
supply the pointer for the data buffer.
The function blocks must be executed in the following sequence:
CRV_P RCVT5 NAVDP DRVIF2 SNDT5 CTV_P
After the block has been initialized, a plausibility check is used to
determine whether the pointer PTR is pointing to a valid memory range.
As long as the pointer PTR does not have a valid value, then the send
data buffer is not written into. As soon as a correct pointer is present, the
value is transferred (accepted) once. A new pointer is only accepted after
the block has been initialized.
Only PROFIBUS telegrams 5 or 105 can be sent.
The telegram is selected when initializing using the TLG input.
TLG
Telegram
TRQ
9 words
105
10 words
0-100%
9-145
GMC blocks
Telegram
OFF
18
105
105
20
QF
Meaning
YF
1
Meaning
Insufficient memory for the buffer;
Remedy: Reduce the buffer length or the configured software.
The block connected via PTR does not have the same sampling time.
Remedy: All of the pointer-based communication blocks, inter-linked
through a PTR-CFC connection, must have the same sampling time.
Offset greater than the buffer length, cyclic check, as OFF can be
changed online
Remedy: The offset must lie within the buffer length.
9-146
GMC blocks
I/O
Default
PTR
OFF
Offset in bytes
CT1
Speed setpoint
CT2
G1C
XER
KPC
RS
Reference speed
3000.0
TRQ
Torque reduction
TLG
Telegram 5 /105
NSB
QF
Fault status block (for the fault codes, refer to the table above)
YF
Status information on the block (for the fault codes, refer to the table above)
Configuring data
0
0
0x0000
0
0x0000
1.0
FM458-1 DP
Yes
Can be configured in
Alarm tasks
Cyclic tasks
Executed in
Normal mode
16#0000
2.5
9-147
10
Special blocks
10.1
Symbol
FGEN
Reference position R
Reference velocity R
Angle, end of cut R
Angle, start of cut R
Transition point, normal curve R
Format R
Factor, overspeed R
Position normalization R
Curve selection I
Calculate constants BO
Select diagnostics DG1 I
Select diagnostics DG2 I
Brief description
ARF
VRF
AX
AY
AZ
FMT
OVS
NRM
MOD
CAL
DS1
DS2
YDS
YDV
FEL
PST
LST
DXN
DXS
YAR
AM1
AM2
SIN
DG1
DG2
QCR
QFR
QHL
QF
YFC
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
BO
BO
BO
BO
W
10-1
Special blocks
Mode of operation
Position of the shears from which the shears and material run
asynchronously (the shears are then no longer in contact with the
material)
AY
Position of the shears from which the shears and material run in
synchronism (the shears are then in contact with the material)
AZ
FMT
For a constant velocity VRF of the material web, the following typical
velocity characteristics are obtained. The setpoint velocity for the shears
drive (Vknife) is obtained from the sum of the material velocity (Vmaterial)
and the output quantity YDV:
AZ=0
AZ=1.0
AZ
Vknife
Vmaterial
AY
AY
AX
AX
Format range
Cutting range
10-2
Special blocks
The position reference value YDS is formed from the reference position
ARF. After the cut, the reference position must be reduced by the cut
format so that the various operations are repeated. For systems using a
rotary axis, the reference position and the actual value of the shears
position should be set to zero at the center of the cutting range.
Knife velocity
AY
Vmaterial
AX
AY
AX
Vknife
t
Knife position
?
AY
Waiting
pos.
AX
t
Overvelocity OVS
If, when cutting, the knife is to be moved faster than the material (above
synchronous operation), then input OVS is set to a value greater than 1.
At the same time, the setpoint velocity must be externally multiplied by
the overvelocity factor.
For OVS = 1.05, the shears, when cutting, move 5% faster than the
material. OVS is limited to within the range 0.5< OVS < 2.0.
Fault codes
Bit
Significance
Comment: (AY AX) should be greater than 0.5, as the nonsynchronous motion to the material must occur in the angular range
between AX and AY.
AY greater than 1.0 (this is only an alarm) or (AY AX) < 0.1
10-3
Special blocks
I/O
Default
ARF
Reference position
VRF
Reference velocity
AX
0.1
AY
0.9
AZ
0.5
FMT
Format
1.0
OVS
1.0
MOD
Curve selection
NRM
CAL
Calculate constants
DS1
DS2
YDS
YDV
Velocity setpoint; supplementary setpoint that must be added to the material velocity
in order to calculate the velocity of the knife drive
FEL
PST
LST
DXN
DXS
YAR
AM1
AM2
SIN
0
0
SIN = 0
SIN = sin( (ARF- AX) / (AZ AX))
SIN = 1.0
DG1
DG2
QCR
QFR
QHL
QF
Input error
YFC
10-4
1.0
Special blocks
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Computed in
Init mode
Normal mode
Special features
105.0
35.0
17.5
10-5
Special blocks
10.2
Symbol
STATIS
Evaluation quantity
1st range limit
2nd range limit
3rd range limit
4th range limit
5th range limit
6th range limit
7th range limit
8th range limit
Edge trigger input
Level trigger input
Reset
Use abs. value X
Number of values
Maximum number of values
Brief description
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
BO
BO
BO
BO
I
I
X
XL1
XL2
XL3
XL4
XL5
XL6
XL7
XL8
TGE
TGL
R
ABS
N
NMX
YL1
Y12
Y23
Y34
Y45
Y56
Y67
Y78
YG8
VAL
QF
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
BO
BO
Example
N = 100
XL1 = 0.0
XL2 = 1.0
XL3 ... XL8 > 1.0
For example, contained in 100 measured values:
26 values with value < 0.0
14 values with 0.0 < value < 1.0
YL1 = 26/100 = 0.26
Y12 = 14/100 = 0.14
Trigger inputs
10-6
Special blocks
I/O
Default
X
Evaluation quantity
0.0
st
XL1
1 range limit
0.1
XL2
0.25
XL3
0.5
th
XL4
4 range limit
0.75
XL5
1.0
XL6
XL7
th
1.5
th
2.0
th
5.0
6 range limit
7 range limit
XL8
8 range limit
TGE
TGL
ABS
0.01
NMX
100
YL1
0.0
Y12
0.0
Y23
0.0
Y34
0.0
Y45
0.0
Y56
0.0
Y67
0.0
Y78
0.0
YG8
0.0
VAL
Prerequisite: The range limits XL1 ... XL7 are sorted in increasing numbers (the
range limits are only checked in each processing cycle).
QF
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Computed in
Normal mode
Special features
27.0
9.0
4.5
10-7
Special blocks
10.3
Symbol
TRACK
Position actual value R
Cut length setpoint R
Equivalent cutting length R
Maximum format, waste sheets R
Minimum format, waste sheets R
Minimum clearance between defects R
Distance, detector R
Tolerance R
Position actual value for a cut R
Number of defects (4..32) INT
Operating mode INT
Defect detection BO
Start cut pattern calculation BO
Delete defect memory BO
Enable BO
Brief description
XP
CL
CLS
MAX
MIN
MEG
DXD
TOL
XPC
NE
MOD
ERR
CAL
RES
EN
YCL
YEC
QE
QFC
QFE
QFS
QFF
QNC
END
R Cut length
DINT Defect counter
BO Material defect
BO Immediate format change
BO Replacement format
BO Waste cut
BO Sheet with defect position
BO Cut with defect position
BO End of the material web
Mode of operation
The block tracks the position actual value of the material web to be cut
(input XP). If XP reaches the value position actual value for cut (XPC),
then the next cut is made. The distance to the next cut can be calculated
from this.
It is assumed that the position actual value XP increases and when
cutting is reduced by the length of the sheet presently being cut. The cut
length for the subsequent sheet is output at YCL. After the cut has been
detected, the cut length of the following sheet is output.
The distance between the defect detection and the shears (DXD) must
be at least twice that of the synchronous cutting length of the shears
(circumference of the knife drum).
DXL
Detector
Shears
Detector
DXL
Shears
Material defect
Material defect
Max.
cutting length
Max.
cutting length
Generally, the detector to detect material defects is further away from the
shears as the largest sheet to be cut. In this particular case, the cut
length can already be determined before the start of the sheet was cut.
10-8
Special blocks
If the required cut length is greater than the distance between the
detector and the shears, then the cut length of the current sheet can still
change if a material defect is detected. This is indicated using a pulse at
output QFC. In this case, the system changes-over from an extremely
long cut length (>DXD) to a somewhat shorter cut length. As a result of
the large cut length, during the format change, the shears are in the
quiescent position so that no steps/jumps can occur in the position
reference value of the shears.
The start and end of a material defect are detected at input ERR. Up to
32 defects can be simultaneously tracked; these flow into a cut
optimization.
There are 4 different versions to optimize the cut. These are selected as
a function of the mode MOD.
MOD = 0
Prerequisites
MIN
Strategy
CL
CL
MIN
CLS
CL
X
MIN
CL
MIN
X: Cut length depending on the position of the defect (random); MIN < X < CL
10-9
Special blocks
Strategy
This mode is suitable for applications where areas with defects are to be
cut-out with the smallest possible pieces of waste material. The standard
CL format is only used as maximum format to limit the sheet length if no
defects are detected.
The first cut is made before the position with defect and the second cut
after the position with defect - however, offset by a minimum distance
MIN.
If additional positions with defects follow within a short distance (< MIN),
the sheet length is increased up to a maximum of MAX.
CL
X: Cut length depending on the position of the defect (random); MIN < X < CL
Strategy
CL
X: Cut length depending on the position of the defect (random); MIN < X < CL
Strategy
10-10
Special blocks
MOD = 4 material change (a gap between the old and new material web)
Prerequisites
MIN
3
4
CLnew
CLnew
Shears
Cutting positions
MIN
2
CLold
1
CLold
This cut is not permissible as the residual piece is then too short
Prerequisite: MIN < CL
Strategy
For MOD = 4, the cut length is controlled for two consecutive material
webs. If the remaining piece of the old material web may not fall below a
minimum length, then this minimum length is defined at input MIN (pieces
which are too small can possibly jam in the machine).
The first sheet of the new material web is CL long.
If the new material web is to be cut with a different cutting length than the
previous one, then CL must be set to the new cutting length as soon as
output END is set to 1.
At the last cut before the gap, the position of the next cutting position
must be known in order to be able to calculate the associated cutting
length. This is not possible for extremely large gaps as the new start of
the material was still not detected at this instant in time. In this case, the
format length is initially defined to be an extremely large format (1000
DXD) and after the start of the material has been detected, is corrected to
correspond to the actual format (this is displayed by QFC = 1).
This technique cannot be used for larger gaps.
10-11
Special blocks
I/O
Default
XP
CL
Cutting length setpoint (standard format; highest priority). This standard format is
not limited by MIN or MAX!
1000
CLS
600
Maximum waste sheet length. If, due to many material defects, no sheets with
length CL or CLS can be cut, then MAX is the maximum size of the waste pieces to
be cut.
5000
MIN
Minimum format. This is the shortest sheet length for waste pieces which may be
cut. The following must apply: MAX MIN
500
Special case, MAX = MIN: All waste sheets have the length MAX.
MEG
Minimum distance between defects. If the distance between two material defects is
less than MEG, then they are considered to be one defect.
DXD
Distance between the shears and the detector that detects the material defect.
TOL
Defect detection tolerance. The start and end of the detected material defect is
shifted by the value TOL which means that the length of the defect position is
increased by the absolute value 2 TOL. This allows inaccuracies when detecting
defects or sequences of defects to be compensated if under all circumstances it
should be prevented that a cut is made within the defect position.
XPC
NE
MOD
Operating mode
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
50
5000
1
1000
ERR
Defect detection. Connection of the signal from the material defect detection (1 =
defect present)
CAL
Start of the cutting pattern calculation. A rising signal edge (01) at CAL initiates
the evaluation of the detected defects whereby the cut length for the next cuts are
calculated.
This function is optional as an automatic cut pattern calculation is made before each
cut.
RES
Deletes the defect memory. For Res = 1, all of the material defects which are
presently being tracked are deleted.
EN
Enables the cut optimization. For EN = 0, the cutting length setpoint is transferred
through to the output (YCL= CL).
YCL
Cutting length setpoint for the following cut (not for the current sheet).
YEC
Defect counter. Number of detected material defects since the block was enabled or
since the defect memory was deleted
QE
10-12
Special blocks
Default
QFC
For the special case that the cutting length is greater than the distance to the defect
detection (CL > DXD), then the currently active cutting length must be corrected.
This is displayed at output QFC (this is a pulse which is 20 cycles long).
QFE
QFS
Waste cut. The actual cutting length is neither the standard format nor the
replacement format.
QFF
QFF indicates that the current sheet has a location with defect
QNC
Indicates that the cut is made at a position with a defect. For large positions/areas
with defects and restricted cutting conditions, it can occur that the cut must be made
at the defect position. (for example, at MIN = MAX then waste sheets are always cut
with length MAX)
END
End of the material web. This output only becomes active for MOD = 4. This
indicates that a change in the cutting length CL only has an effect on the
subsequent material web.
Configuringdata
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
Yes
Can be configured in
Interrupt tasks
Cyclic tasks
Computed in
Normal mode
Special features
13.5
4.5
2.3
10-13
Appendix
A.1
Typ
Designation
Capter
@CPN
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
50,0
16,5
8,3
4.7.1
@DPH
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
15,4
5,1
2,6
4.3.1
@MSC
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
8,1
2,7
1,4
4.2.1.1
@TCI
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
50,0
16,5
8,3
4.5.3.1
@TCP
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
50,0
16,5
8,3
4.4.2.1
@TRI
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
16,0
5,3
2,7
4.5.3.2
ACOS
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
38,4
12,7
6,4
2.1
ADC
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
18,6
6,1
3,1
3.1
ADD
Adder
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,4
1,8
0,9
2.2
ADD_D
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,7
1,2
0,6
2.4
ADD_I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,7
1,2
0,6
2.3
ADD_M
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
60,0
19,8
9,9
2.5
ADDAZ
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,0
1,7
0,9
9.8
AENC
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
50,0
16,5
8,3
3.3
A-1
Appendix
Typ
Designation
Capter
AFC
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,8
1,9
1,0
3.2
AND
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,2
1,4
0,7
6.1.1
AND_W
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,2
1,7
0,9
6.1.3
AND12
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,5
0,5
0,3
6.1.2
ANS
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,8
1,6
0,8
6.5.1
ANS_I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,5
1,5
0,8
6.5.2
ASI
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,2
1,4
0,7
7.1
ASIN
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
17,3
5,7
2,9
2.6
ATAN
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
7,1
2,3
1,2
2.7
AVA
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,6
0,9
0,5
2.8
AVA_D
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,6
0,9
0,5
2.9
B_DW
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
15,0
5,0
2,5
5.1.2
B_W
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
20,8
6,7
3,4
5.1.1
BF
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,2
1,1
0,6
6.9.1
BF_W
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
6,8
2,2
1,1
6.9.2
BII8
Binary input
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
13,4
4,4
2,2
3.4
BIQ8
Binary output
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
12,7
4,2
2,1
3.5
A-2
Appendix
Typ
Designation
Capter
BNR
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
6,6
2,2
1,1
5.2.1
BSW
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,2
0,7
0,4
6.5.3
(INTEGER type)
BY_W
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,5
0,8
0,4
5.1.3
CAMD
Cam disk
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
35,0
11,6
5,8
9.10
CAMSW
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
28,0
9,2
4,6
9.2
CAMSW1
T400, PM5
FM458, PM6
CATCH
Catch up/shutdown
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
23,0
7,6
3,8
9.3
CCC4
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
249,3
82,3
41,2
4.1.1
CDC4
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
185,9
61,4
30,7
4.1.2
CLUTCH
Engage/disengage (coupling)
T400, PM5:
PM6, FM458
23
7,5
9.22
CNM
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,9
1,0
0,5
6.7.1
CNM_D
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,9
1,0
0,5
6.7.2
CNM_I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,6
0,9
0,5
6.7.3
COS
Cosine function
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
14,9
4,9
2,5
2.10
CPY_P
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
9,0
3,0
1,5
4.9.1
CRV
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
71,7
23,7
11,9
4.1.3
CRV_P
T400 / PM5
+0,05 per Byte
FM458 / PM6
+0,05 per Byte
CPU550 / 551
+0,05 per Byte
60
4.9.2
20
10
A-3
Appendix
Typ
Designation
Capter
CTR
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
6,3
2,1
1,1
6.3.1
CTV
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
66,9
22,1
11,1
4.1.4
CTV_P
T400 / PM5
per Byte
FM458 / PM6
per Byte
CPU550 / 551
per Byte
105, 0+1
4.9.3
35, 0+1
17,5+1
D_I
DOUBLE-INTEGER to INTEGER
converter
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,3
0,4
0,2
5.1.4
D_R
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,8
0,6
0,3
5.1.5
DAC
Analog output
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
12,8
4,2
2,1
3.6
DAT
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,8
0,9
0,5
6.8.1
DB_P
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,9
1,3
0,7
4.9.4
DEL
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,1
0,7
0,4
1.1
DEZ
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,5
0,8
0,4
1.2
DFR
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
6,0
2,0
1,0
6.7.4
DFR_W
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,3
1,4
0,7
6.7.5
DIAPRO
Diagnostics DP (PROFIBUS DP
coubling )
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
30,5
10,1
5,1
4.6.1
DIF
Differentiator block
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
9,5
3,1
1,6
1.3
DIV
Divider
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
35,7
11,8
5,9
2.11
DIV_D
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,3
1,8
0,9
2.13
A-4
Appendix
Typ
Designation
Capter
DIV_I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,3
1,8
0,9
2.12
DIV_R
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,0
1,7
0,9
2.14
DLB
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,6
0,9
0,5
6.8.2
DPI
Parameter block
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,7
1,6
0,8
4.3.2
DRD; DRD_D,
DRD_I
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
3,6
1,2
0,6
4.9.5
DRD_8
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
11,4
3,8
1,9
DRD_8D
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
30,0
10,0
5,0
DRD_8I
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
13,8
4,6
2,3
DRD_BY
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
3,0
1,5
0,8
DRVIF
T400 / PM5
PM6 / FM458
15
5
9.20
DRVIF2
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5
2.5
9.31
DT1
DT1 block
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
13,3
4,4
2,2
1.4
DTS
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,3
1,8
0,9
6.9.3
DW_B
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
15,0
5,0
2,5
5.1.6
DW_W
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,5
0,5
0,3
5.1.7
A-5
Appendix
Typ
Designation
Capter
DWR, DWR_D,
DWR_I
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
3,6
1,2
0,6
4.9.6
DWR_8
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
12,0
4,0
2,0
DWR_8D
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
30,0
10,0
5,0
DWR_8I
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
25,8
8,6
4,3
DWR_BY
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
5,4
1,8
0,9
DX8
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,3
1,4
0,7
6.6.1
DX8_I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,2
1,4
0,7
6.6.2
EDC
Engage/disengage
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
20,0
6,6
3,3
9.4
EDC1
Engager/disengager
T400, PM5
FM458, PM6
27
9
9.24
ENC2
T400, PM5
FM458, PM6
CPU550/ 551
4,5
1,5
0,8
9.28
EPE
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
6,7
2,2
1,1
7.2
ETE
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,0
1,0
0,5
6.9.4
FGEN
Format generator
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
105,0
35,0
17,5
10.1
FRM
Formula block
T400 / PM5
xx
(fr den Ausdruck:
(X1+X2)*X3)
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
xx
xx
2.30
FUZ_I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
70,0
23,1
11,6
1.6
GEAR
Gearbox block
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
25,0
8,3
4,2
9.15
A-6
Appendix
Typ
Designation
Capter
I_D
INTEGER to DOUBLE-INTEGER
converter
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,6
0,5
0,3
5.1.8
I_R
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,5
0,5
0,3
5.1.9
INT
Integrator
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
7,5
2,5
1,3
1.7
INT_MR
Virtual master
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
15,0
5,0
2,5
9.16
LIM
Limiter
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,0
0,9
0,5
1.8
LIM_D
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,0
0,9
0,5
1.9
LVM
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,9
1,6
0,8
6.9.6
MAS
Maximum evaluator
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,9
1,3
0,7
2.15
MCSB
T400/PM5
20 (...300)
FM458/PM6 7 (...100)
CPU550/551 3,5 (...50)
9.25
MCSS
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
9 (...300)
3 (...100)
1,5 (...50)
9.26
MDCMP
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
20,0
6,6
3,3
9.1
MDCMP1
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
22
7,5
3,8
9.26
MER
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
8,1
2,7
1,4
4.2.3.1
MER_I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
7,8
2,6
1,3
MER_D
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
9,6
3,2
1,6
MER1
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,0
1,3
0,7
4.2.2.2
MER16
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
13,1
4,3
2,2
4.2.2.3
A-7
Appendix
Typ
Designation
Capter
MERF
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
10,5
3,5
1,8
4.2.5.1
MERF_I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
7,6
2,5
1,3
MERF_D
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
11,1
3,7
1,9
MERF0
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
18,0
5,9
3,0
4.2.4.1
MERF1
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
10,1
3,3
1,7
4.2.4.2
MERF16
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
17,2
5,7
2,9
4.2.4.3
MERO
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
7,0
2,3
1,2
4.2.2.1
MFP
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,8
1,3
0,7
6.2.1
MIS
Minimum evaluator
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,4
1,5
0,8
2.16
MSI
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
13,0
4,3
2,2
4.2.1.2
MSIPRI
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
22,4
7,4
3,7
4.2.1.3
MUL
Multiplier
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,5
1,5
0,8
2.17
MUL_D
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,3
1,8
0,9
2.19
MUL_I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,3
1,8
0,9
2.18
MUX8
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,6
1,5
0,8
6.6.3
MUX8_I
3,4
1,1
0,6
6.6.4
N2_R
2,0
0,7
0,4
5.1.10
A-8
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
Appendix
Typ
Designation
N4_R
2,0
0,7
0,4
5.1.11
NACTON
Natural constants
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
-------
2.20
NAND
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,2
1,1
0,6
6.1.4
NAV
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
38,5
12,7
6,4
3.7
NAVDP
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
9
4.5
9.30
NAVMC
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
30,0
10,0
5,0
9.5
NAVS
Speed/position/position difference
sensing
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
48,5
16,0
8,0
3.8
NCM
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,7
1,2
0,6
6.4.1
NCM_D
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,6
0,9
0,5
6.4.3
NCM_I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,6
0,9
0,5
6.4.2
NOP1
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,5
0,5
0,3
6.9.7
NOP1_B
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,5
0,5
0,3
6.9.8
NOP1_D
1,5
0,5
0,3
6.9.9
NOP1_I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,2
0,4
0,2
6.9.10
NOP8
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
6,7
2,2
1,1
6.9.11
NOP8_B
6,8
2,2
1,1
6.9.12
NOP8_D
6,5
2,2
1,1
6.9.13
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
Capter
A-9
Appendix
Typ
Designation
Capter
NOP8_I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
6,9
2,3
1,2
6.9.14
NOR
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,5
1,2
0,6
6.1.5
NOT
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,6
0,5
0,3
6.1.6
NOT_W
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,6
0,5
0,3
6.1.7
NSW
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,1
0,7
0,4
6.5.4
NSW_D
2,1
0,7
0,4
6.5.5
NSW_I
2,5
0,8
0,4
6.5.6
OFSGEN
Offset input
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
30,0
10,0
5,0
9.14
OFSSAV
Offset calculation
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,0
0,3
0,2
9.13
OR
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,8
0,9
0,5
6.1.8
OR_12
1,5
0,5
0,3
6.1.9
OR_W
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,9
1,3
0,7
6.1.10
OVFHSK
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
10,0
3,3
1,7
9.18
PAC
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,0
1,3
0,7
6.10.1
PAI
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,0
1,7
0,9
6.10.2
PAS
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,0
1,3
0,7
6.10.3
PC
P controller
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
11,7
3,9
2,0
1.10
A-10
Appendix
Typ
Designation
Capter
PCL
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,1
0,7
0,4
6.2.2
PDE
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,2
0,7
0,4
6.2.3
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,0
1,3
0,7
6.2.4
PHSFT
Phase shifter
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
10,0
3,3
1,7
9.7
PIC
PI controller
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
14,3
4,7
2,4
1.11
PIN8
Priority evaluator
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
13,7
4,5
2,3
6.9.15
PLI10
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
12,3
4,1
2,1
2.21
PLI20
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
14,9
4,9
2,5
2.22
PNO
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,0
1,7
0,9
7.3
POSMC
Positioning block
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
35,0
11,6
5,8
9.12
POSREG
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,0
0,7
0,4
9.6
PSL
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
36,6
12,1
6,1
7.4
PST
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,4
1,5
0,8
6.2.5
PT1
PT1 element
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,5
1,8
0,9
1.12
PWM
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,1
1,0
0,5
1.13
R_D
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,2
1,7
0,9
5.1.12
R_I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,8
1,6
0,8
5.1.13
A-11
Appendix
Typ
Designation
Capter
R_N2
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,0
0,7
0,4
5.1.14
R_N4
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,0
0,7
0,4
5.1.15
RCVT5
Receive block
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4
2
9.32
RFG
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,7
0,9
0,5
7.5
RGE
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
32,9
10,9
5,5
1.14
RGJ
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
15,0
5,0
2,5
1.15
RSR
3,5
1,2
0,6
6.7.6
RSS
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,5
1,2
0,6
6.7.7
RTCABS
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
7,0
2,3
1,2
4.5.1
RTCREL
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,0
1,7
0,9
4.5.2
SAV
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,1
1,4
0,7
6.8.3
SAV_B
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,0
1,3
0,7
6.8.4
SAV_D
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,8
1,3
0,7
6.8.5
SAV_I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,5
1,2
0,6
6.8.6
SBI
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,6
1,8
0,9
3.9
SBQ
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,4
1,8
0,9
3.10
SER
Service block
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,0
0,7
0,4
7.6
A-12
Appendix
Typ
Designation
Capter
SFC
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
75,0
25,0
12,5
8.1
SFCSI
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
30,0
10,0
5,0
8.2
SFCTI
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
30,0
10,0
5,0
8.3
SH
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,7
1,2
0,6
6.9.16
SHEAR
Cross-cutter/cross sealer
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
17
5,5
2,8
9.23
SII
Inverter
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,5
0,5
0,3
2.23
SIN
Sine function
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
7,7
2,5
1,3
2.24
SNDT5
Send block
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2.5
1.3
9.33
SPLINE
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,0
1,7
0,9
9.9
SQG
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,2
0,7
0,4
7.7
SQGB
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,1
1,0
0,5
7.8
SQR
Square-root extractor
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,0
1,7
0,9
2.25
SSD
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,6
1,5
0,8
7.9
STATIS
Statistical evaluation
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
27,0
9,0
4,5
10.2
STG
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,7
0,9
0,5
7.10
SUB
Subtractor
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,6
1,5
0,8
2.26
SUB_D
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,8
0,9
0,5
2.28
A-13
Appendix
Typ
Designation
Capter
SUB_I
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,8
0,9
0,5
2.27
SWB_DW
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,6
0,5
0,3
5.2.2
SWB_W
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,5
0,5
0,3
5.2.3
SWBI
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,5
0,5
0,3
5.2.4
SWBO
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,5
0,5
0,3
5.2.5
SYF1
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,3
1,8
0,9
7.11
SYF4
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
8,2
2,7
1,4
7.12
SYNPRO
SYNC/FREEZE DP (PROFIBUS DP
coupling)
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
10,0
3,3
1,7
4.6.2
TAB, TAB_D
4,5/point
1,5/point
0,8/point
T400/PM5
FM 458/PM6
CPU550/551
45
15
7,5
9.19
TABCAM
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
35,0
11,6
5,8
9.11
TAN
Tangent function
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
23,1
7,6
3,8
2.29
TRACK
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
13,5
4,5
2,3
10.3
TRCC, TRCC_D
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
50,0
16,5
8,3
4.4.1.1
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
18,0
5,9
3,0
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
0,2
0,1
0,1
TRCC_I
TRHI
A-14
4.4.2.2
Appendix
Typ
Designation
Capter
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
5,0
1,7
0,9
4.4.2.3
TSAV, TSAV_B,
TSAV_I, TSAV_D
T400 / PM5
FM458 / PM6
CPU550 / 551
4.0
1.3
0.7
6.8.7
UDI
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
4,4
1,5
0,8
6.3.2
USF
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,0
0,7
0,4
7.13
W_B
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
16,2
5,3
2,7
5.1.16
W_BY
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
2,4
0,8
0,4
5.1.17
W_DW
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
1,5
0,5
0,3
5.1.18
WEBSFT
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
15,0
5,0
2,5
9.17
XOR
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,2
1,1
0,6
6.1.11
XOR_W
T400/PM5
FM458/PM6
CPU550/551
3,8
1,3
0,7
6.1.12
A-15
Appendix
A.2
Numerical table
Connection Explanation
type
Value range
Resolution
Binary signal
BO
Boolean quantity
Logical 0 or 1
Normal signal
Floating point
number
X*1.2E-7
with X in the
value range 1)
Integer
Integer number
-32768 .. 0 .. 32767
DI
Increased accuracy
BY
Status word
Status word
DW
Increased accuracy
TS
Real time
(as floating-point
number)
0 ms .. 3.4 E38 ms
X*1.2E-7 ms
with X in the
value range 1)
Binar vector
Time
1)
Transfer
characteristics
1. -2.147483648 E9 .. 1
0 .. 2.147483647 E9
The diagrams below illustrate the value range for all SIMADYN D
connection types. The abscissa has the value of the user interface.
These values are valid when configuring with CFC, for service and
diagnostics as well as operator control and visualization using CFC
online.
The ordinates represent internal processing values. The graph shows the
conversion syntax and possible statements regarding the transformation
of values when interconnecting connectors having different
interpretations.
A-16
Appendix
Floating-point value
R
0
Internal
processing
value
-R
-3.4 E38
3.4 E38
Hex value
BO
BY, W
Hex value
7F
FF, FFFF
FFFF FFFF
0
FF
7F, 7FFF
7FFF FFFF
80
Hex value
I, DI
Floating-point value
7FFF,
7FFF FFFF
0
FFFF,
FFFF FFFF
8000,
8000 0000
-32768
-2.147 E9
0
0
7F
7FFF
32767
2.147 E9
FF
FFFF
Floating-point value
-R
0
DW
Hex value
-3.4 E38
TS
-R
0
3.4 E38
0 ms
3.4 E38 ms
A-17
Index
@
@CPN Local coupling, central block........................................................................................... 4-77
@DPH Parameter processing central block................................................................................ 4-41
@MSC Message system central block ....................................................................................... 4-12
@TCI System trace central block................................................................................................ 4-54
@TCP Single trace, central block ............................................................................................... 4-46
@TRI Acquisition block system trace.......................................................................................... 4-57
A
ACOS Arc cosine function............................................................................................................. 2-1
ADC Analog input via A/D converter ............................................................................................. 3-2
ADD Adder .................................................................................................................................... 2-1
ADD_D Adder (Double Integer type)............................................................................................. 2-1
ADD_I Adder (Integer type)........................................................................................................... 2-1
ADD_M Modulo adder for axis cycle-correct addition................................................................... 2-2
ADDAZ adder with axis cycle limiting.......................................................................................... 9-65
AENC absolute value encoder (SSI/EnDat).................................................................................. 3-5
AND block (BOOL type) ................................................................................................................ 6-1
AND_W AND block (Word type) ................................................................................................... 6-3
AND12 AND block, status Word (Word type)................................................................................ 6-1
ANS Automatic numerical changeover switch (Real type).......................................................... 6-22
ANS_I Automatic numerical changeover switch (Integer type)................................................... 6-23
ASI Acknowledge signal (BOOL type) .......................................................................................... 7-1
ASIN Arc-sine function .................................................................................................................. 2-3
ATAN Arc-tangent function............................................................................................................ 2-3
AVA Absolute value generator with sign evaluation ..................................................................... 2-3
AVA_D Absolute value generator with sign evaluation (Double Integer type).............................. 2-4
B
B_DW Conversion, 32 binary quantities into a double word (32-bit) ............................................ 5-1
B_W Converter, 16 binary quantities into a status Word .............................................................. 5-1
BF Flash function for a binary quantity (BOOL type) .................................................................. 6-52
BF_W Flash function for a status Word (Word type) .................................................................. 6-53
BII8 Binary input .......................................................................................................................... 3-15
BIQ8 Binary output ...................................................................................................................... 3-17
BNR Binary thumbwheel switch input ......................................................................................... 5-11
BSW Binary changeover switch (Integer type)............................................................................ 6-24
BY_W Status byte to status Word converter................................................................................. 5-1
C
CAMD cam disk........................................................................................................................... 9-68
CAMSW cam block with 2 cams ................................................................................................. 9-42
CAMSW1 cam controller for time characteristics...................................................................... 9-125
I-1
Index
D
D_I Double-Integer to Integer converter........................................................................................ 5-2
D_R Double Integer to real converter............................................................................................ 5-3
DAC Analog output...................................................................................................................... 3-19
DAT Function block to input/output real values in/out of a data memory (Real type)................. 6-44
DB_P Data block for pointer-based processing .......................................................................... 4-86
DEL Dead line block ...................................................................................................................... 1-1
DEZ Dead zone block.................................................................................................................... 1-3
DFR D-flipflop, R-dominant (BOOL type) ....................................................................................6-38
DFR_W Reset-dominant D flipflop (Word type) ..........................................................................6-40
DIAPRO Diagnostics DP (PROFIBUS DP coupling)...................................................................4-72
DIF Differentiator block.................................................................................................................. 1-5
DIV Divider .................................................................................................................................... 2-5
DIV_D Divider (Double Integer type)............................................................................................. 2-5
DIV_I Divider (Integer type)........................................................................................................... 2-5
DIV_R Divider (real type)............................................................................................................... 2-5
DLB Delay block (Real type) ....................................................................................................... 6-45
DPI PKW parameter block .......................................................................................................... 4-41
DRD Read blocks for pointer-based communications............................................................ 4-88
DRVIF Interface to the drive........................................................................................................ 9-92
DRVIF2 Interface to the drive.................................................................................................... 9-137
DT1 block ...................................................................................................................................... 1-7
DTS Synchronization delay time (BOOL type)............................................................................ 6-54
DW_B Conversion double word (32-bit) into 32 binary quantities ................................................ 5-3
DW_W Conversion 32-bit double word into two 16-bit words ....................................................... 5-3
DWR Write blocks for pointer-based communications ........................................................... 4-91
DX8 Demultiplexer, 8 outputs, can be cascaded (Real type)...................................................... 6-25
DX8_I Demultiplexer, 8 outputs, can be cascaded (Integer type)............................................... 6-27
E
EDC engage/disengage .............................................................................................................. 9-49
EDC1 engager/disengager........................................................................................................9-110
ENC2 Optional incremental encoder for NAVMC ..................................................................... 9-128
EPE Delete change memory ......................................................................................................... 7-2
ETE Edge evaluator (BOOL type) ............................................................................................... 6-55
I-2
Index
F
FGEN Format generator.............................................................................................................. 10-1
FRM Formula block ..................................................................................................................... 2-16
FUI_W First-up indicator (Word type) ......................................................................................... 6-56
FUZ Fuzzy controller (Real type) ................................................................................................ 1-10
FUZ_I Fuzzy controller (INTEGER type)..................................................................................... 1-13
G
GEAR gearbox block................................................................................................................... 9-81
I
I_D Integer to Double Integer converter........................................................................................ 5-4
I_R Integer to real converter.......................................................................................................... 5-4
INT Integrator .............................................................................................................................. 1-15
INT_MR virtual master ................................................................................................................ 9-83
L
LIM Limiter................................................................................................................................... 1-18
LIM_D Limiter (Typ Double Integer)............................................................................................ 1-20
LVM Limit value monitor with hysteresis, 2 directions (BOOL type) ........................................... 6-57
M
MAS Maximum evaluator .............................................................................................................. 2-6
MCSB generating motion sequences (basis block) .................................................................. 9-115
MCSS generating motion sequences (subsequent block) ........................................................ 9-121
MDCMP compensation block for mode changeover................................................................... 9-37
MDCMP1 basic and equalization functions for Motion Control.................................................. 9-97
MER, MER_I, MER_D Message block for one activated message with measured value (R type) 428
MER0 Message block for 16 activated messages ...................................................................... 4-21
MER1 Message block for one activated message with text........................................................ 4-23
MER16 Message block for 16 activated messages with text...................................................... 4-25
MERF, MERF_I, MERF_D Message block for an activated and a de-activated message with
measured value ....................................................................................................................... 4-38
MERF0 Message block for 16 activated and de-activated messages ........................................ 4-31
MERF1 Message block for an activated and a de-activated message....................................... 4-33
MERF16 Message block for 16 activated and de-activated messages with text........................ 4-35
MFP Pulse generator (BOOL type) ............................................................................................. 6-10
MIS Minimum evaluator................................................................................................................. 2-7
MSI Message output block .......................................................................................................... 4-15
MSIPRI Message output block (printer) ...................................................................................... 4-18
MUL Multiplier................................................................................................................................ 2-8
MUL_D Multiplier (Double Integer type)........................................................................................ 2-8
MUL_I Multiplier (Integer type) ...................................................................................................... 2-8
MUX8 Multiplexer, can be cascaded (Real type) ........................................................................ 6-29
MUX8_I Multiplexer, can be cascaded (Integer type) ................................................................. 6-31
N
N2_R Conversion 16-bit fixed-point format (N2) to real................................................................ 5-5
I-3
Index
O
OFSGEN offset input................................................................................................................... 9-79
OFSSAV offset calculation .......................................................................................................... 9-77
OR block (BOOL type)................................................................................................................... 6-5
OR_12 OR logic gate, status word (WORD type) ......................................................................... 6-5
OR_W OR block, status Word (Word type)................................................................................... 6-6
OVFHSK overflow handshake procedure ................................................................................... 9-87
P
PAC Process interrupt counter.................................................................................................... 6-64
PAI Process interrupt, periphery input.........................................................................................6-66
PAS Process interrupt software .................................................................................................. 6-68
PC P controller ............................................................................................................................ 1-22
PCL Pulse contractor (BOOL type) ............................................................................................. 6-11
PDE Switch-on delay (BOOL type) ............................................................................................. 6-12
PDF Switch-off delay (BOOL type).............................................................................................. 6-13
PHSFT phase shifter ................................................................................................................... 9-63
PIC PI controller .......................................................................................................................... 1-25
PIN8 Priority evaluator................................................................................................................. 6-60
PLI10 Polygon curve, 10 points................................................................................................... 2-10
PLI20 Polygon curve, 20 breakpoints.......................................................................................... 2-12
PNO CPU number (INTEGER type).............................................................................................. 7-3
POSMC positioning block............................................................................................................ 9-74
POSREG Position register reading ............................................................................................. 9-61
PSL Processor utilization (Real type)............................................................................................ 7-4
PST Pulse extender (BOOL type) ............................................................................................... 6-15
PT1 element ................................................................................................................................ 1-34
PWM Pulse-width modulator ....................................................................................................... 1-36
I-4
Index
R
R_D Real to Double Integer converter .......................................................................................... 5-7
R_I Real to Integer converter ........................................................................................................ 5-7
R_N2 Conversion, real to 16-bit fixed-point format....................................................................... 5-8
R_N4 Conversion, real to 32-bit fixed-point format....................................................................... 5-9
RCVT5 Receive block ............................................................................................................... 9-142
RFG Ramp function (REAL type) .................................................................................................. 7-6
RGE Ramp-function generator.................................................................................................... 1-45
RGJ Ramp-function generator with jerk limiting.......................................................................... 1-53
RSR RS flipflop, R-dominant (Integer type) ................................................................................ 6-41
RSS RS flipflop, S-dominant (BOOL type).................................................................................. 6-42
RTCABS Date and time output ................................................................................................... 4-58
RTCREL Relative time output ..................................................................................................... 4-59
S
S7AMA User data area alarmmessages..................................................................................... 4-67
S7EMA User data area eventmessages ..................................................................................... 4-65
S7FKA User data area functionkeyarea...................................................................................... 4-70
S7IA User data area interfacearea.............................................................................................. 4-62
S7OS OS-Communication .......................................................................................................... 4-60
SAV Value buffer (Real type) ...................................................................................................... 6-46
SAV_B Value buffer (BOOL type) ............................................................................................... 6-47
SAV_D Value buffer (Double Integer type) ................................................................................. 6-48
SAV_I Value buffer (Integer type) ............................................................................................... 6-49
SBI Status byte input................................................................................................................... 3-38
SBQ Status byte output............................................................................................................... 3-40
SER Service block......................................................................................................................... 7-9
SFC control block .......................................................................................................................... 8-1
SFCSI SFC step information block ............................................................................................... 8-6
SFCTI SFC transition information block...................................................................................... 8-10
SH Shift block (Word type) .......................................................................................................... 6-62
SHEAR cross-cutter/cross sealer.............................................................................................. 9-107
SII Inverter ................................................................................................................................... 2-14
SIN Sine function......................................................................................................................... 2-14
SNDT5 Send block.................................................................................................................... 9-145
SPLINE cam disk with 32 points (calculation)............................................................................. 9-66
SQG Square-wave generator (Real type) ................................................................................... 7-11
SQGB Clock generator for binary signals (BOOL type).............................................................. 7-13
SQR Square-root extractor.......................................................................................................... 2-14
SSD Output on 7-segment display (Word type) .......................................................................... 7-15
STATIS Statistical evaluation ...................................................................................................... 10-6
STG Step function (REAL type) .................................................................................................. 7-16
SUB Subtractor ........................................................................................................................... 2-15
SUB_I Subtractor (Integer type) .................................................................................................. 2-15
SWB_DW Byte reverser for double-Word inputs ........................................................................ 5-14
SWB_W Byte reverser for Word inputs....................................................................................... 5-16
SWBI Byte reverser for real-type inputs...................................................................................... 5-18
SWBO Byte reverser for real outputs.......................................................................................... 5-20
SYF1 System error field (Word type, 1 word long)...................................................................... 7-18
SYF4 System error field (Word type, 4 words long).................................................................... 7-21
SYNPRO SYNC/FREEZE DP (PROFIBUS DP coupling) .......................................................... 4-74
I-5
Index
T
TAB, TAB_D Tabular values manager ....................................................................................... 9-89
TABCAM cam disk in tabular form .............................................................................................. 9-71
TAN Tangent function.................................................................................................................. 2-15
TRACK Cut optimization for cross-cutters................................................................................... 10-8
TRCC, TRCC_I, TRCC_D Analog trace acquisition block .......................................................... 4-42
TRHI Single trace, header block ................................................................................................. 4-50
TRP, TRP_B, TRP_I, TRP_D Single trace acquisition block ...................................................... 4-52
TSAV, TSAV_B, TSAV_I, TSAV_Dvalues are backed-up in the technology save area (TSAVE
area)......................................................................................................................................... 6-50
U
UDI Up/down pulse evaluator (BOOL type) ................................................................................6-19
USF User flags (Word type) ........................................................................................................ 7-24
W
W_B Converter, status Word into 16 binary quantities ............................................................... 5-10
W_BY Status Word to status byte converter............................................................................... 5-10
W_DW Conversion from two 16-bit words into a 32-bit-double word ......................................... 5-10
WEBSFT measured value offset ................................................................................................. 9-85
X
XOR block (BOOL type) ................................................................................................................ 6-7
XOR_W XOR block, status Word (Word type).............................................................................. 6-8
I-6